5 - Communication · 2016. 7. 25. · TSX CPP 110 TSX SAY 100 TSX SAY 1000 TSX SCP 11p (2) TSX SCY...

5/0

5

5/1

5

Contents 5 - Communication 5

Selection guide Ethernet CPUs and modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2

5.1 - Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Readyb Physical Ethernet communication architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8

b Ethernet TCP/IP network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/10

b Selection of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/12

b Transparent ready communication services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/16

b Embedded Web servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/16

v Standard Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/18

v FactoryCast Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/20

v FactoryCast HMI Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/22

b I/O Scanning et Global Data services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/28

b SNMP and TCP Open services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30

b Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/32

b Ethernet TCP/IP processor and coprocessor and embedded Web server. .page 5/36

b Transparent Ready Ethernet Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/48

b ConneXium industrial Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/54

b Ethernet TCP/IPnetwork, connection by 10BASE5 interface (AUI) . . . . page 5/60

5.2 - CANopen and AS-Interface busesb CANopen machine bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/62

b AS-Interface bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/66

b AS-Interface bus power supply module and unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/70

5.3 - Modbus Plus network/Modbus busb Modbus Plus network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/74

b Modbus bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/78

5.4 - X-Way network and busb X-Way communication structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/82

b Fipway network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/86

b Fipio bus

v Manager function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/90

v Agent function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/94

v Fipio/Fipway optic transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/98

v Fipio/Fipway characteristics and connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/100

b Uni-Telway bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104

b Asynchronous serial links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/108

b Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports . . . . . . . . page 5/110

b Jnet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/112

5.5 - Fieldbusesb INTERBUS bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/114

b Profibus DP bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/118

5/2

5

Selection guide Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Ethernet CPUs and modulesTransparent Ready

ApplicationsNetwork type

Processors with built-in TCP/IP Ethernet port (heterogeneous industrial local area network)

Type of network Ethernet TCP/IP

Structure Physical interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)Method of access CSMA-CDData rate 10/100 Mbit/s

Medium Double twisted pairFiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system

Configuration Maximal number of devices Maximum of 64 stations per networkMaximum length 100 m max. between hub and terminal deviceNumber of networks/station 0 (1) 2 (1) 3 (1)

Other built-in port – Fipio bus manager function

– Fipio bus manager function

Basic services Services TCP/IP Uni-TE/Modbus message handlingServices X-Way Inter-network X-Way routing, X-Way/Uni-Telway routing, module diagnosticsEthway –

Embedded Web serverservices

Basic services "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics"Data Editor" access to PLC variables and data

FactoryCast services –

Factory Cast HMI services –

Transparent Ready communication services I/O Scanning (64 stations)

Global DataNetwork management (SNMP)FDR server for automatic reconfiguration (BOOTP/DHCP protocols)

–

Type of processor –

Module format Double format processor

Type of module TSX P57 2623M TSX P57 2823M TSX P57 3623M TSX P57 4823M

Page 5/40(1) Excluding embedded Ethernet port.

5/3

5

5

Ethernet TCP/IP modules (heterogeneous industrial local area network)

10BASE5 (AUI), 10BASE-T (RJ45) 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (RJ45)CSMA-CD10 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s

Triaxial cable or double twisted pairFiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system

Double twisted pairFiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system

1 to 4 depending on processor or coprocessor used

–

Uni-TE message handling, common words, application to application

–

– "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics"Data Editor" access to PLC variables and data

“Alarms viewer” “Graphic Data Editor” Display of user Web pages (1.4 Mb available)

– “Alarms viewer” alarm display“Graphic Data Editor” graphic object editorDisplay of user Web pages (8 Mb available)

FactoryCast HMI services (2)

– I/O Scanning (64 stations) –

– Global Data –

– FDR server for automatic reconfiguration (BOOTP/DHCP) –

TCP Open – TCP Open –

All types of Premium processors TSX P57 1p/57 2p/57 3p/57 4p and Atrium coprocessor T PCX 57 20/57 35

Standard format module

TSX ETY 110 TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 5103 TSX WMY 100

5/41 5/27(2) FactoryCast HMI services : HMI database, E.mail with automatic sending on events, interpreted math and logic functions, connection to relational databases

and simulator tool.

5/4

5

Selection guide (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Network and bus modules

Applications Local area network conforming to Modbus Plus standard

Local area network conforming to Fip

Type of network or bus Modbus Plus Fipway

Structure Physical interface Modbus Plus standard Fip standard

Method of access Rotating token Bus managed by bus arbitratorData rate 1 Mbit/s 1 Mbit/s

Medium Twisted pair Twisted shielded pairFibre optic via transceivers or repeaters

Configuration Maximal number of devices 32 per segment 64 on all segments

32 per segment 128 on all segments

Maximal length 450 m per segment1800 m with 3 repeaters

1000 m per segment5000 m maxi with 3 repeaters

Number of links/station 1 max. 1 to 4 depending on the model of processeur

Services Message handling - Write/read varaibles- Global database- Peer Cop service

- Uni-TE- COM/shared table- Application-to-application- Telegram

Type of processor All type of Premium processor and Atrium coprocessor

Nature of module PCMCIA type III card on processor/coprocessor

PCMCIA type III card on processor/coprocessor and on TSX SCY 21601 module

Type of module TSX MBP 100 TSX FPP 20

Pages 5/77 5/89

5/5

5

5

CAN fieldbus Open industrial sensor/actuator bus conforming to AS-i standard

Modbus open industrial bus

Bus CANopen V4.02 AS-Interface Modbus

ISO 11898 V1 AS-Interface standard

V2 AS-Interface standard

RS 232DRS 485 isolated20 mA CL

RS 485 isolated

CSMA/CA, multi-master Master/slave Master/slave20 Kbit/s...1 Mbit/s according to distance 167 Kbit/s 19.2 Kbit/s max.

Twisted shielded pair 2-wire AS-Interface cable Twisted shielded pair

127 slaves 31 discrete devices 31 + 31 discrete, analog or security devices

32 devices max. 48 slave addresses max.

32 devices max.247 slave addresses max.

From 20 m (1 Mbit/s)…2500 m (20 Kbit/s) 100 m200 m with repeaters

15 m in RS 232D1000 m in RS 4851300 m in 20 mA CL or intégrated link

1300 m

1 max. 2 to 8 depending on the model of processor According to power consumption (see page 8/2)

- Implicit PDO exchange- Explicit SDO exchange or CAN function block- Explicit PDU CAN exchange

Transparency of exchanges with sensor/actuator devices

Modbus master/slace RTU or ASCII 13 Modbus functions (read/write bits and words, diagnostic…)

All type of Premium processor (except TSX P57 153) and Atrium coprocessor

All type of Premium processor and Atrium coprocessor

PCMCIA type III card on processor/coprocessor Standard format module PCMCIA type III card inserted on (1)


TSX CPP 110 TSX SAY 100 TSX SAY 1000 TSX SCP 11p (2) TSX SCY 11601 built-in link TSX SCY 21601

5/63 5/67 5/80(1) Premium processor/Atrium coprocessor and TSX SCY 21601 communication module.(2) At the end of reference, replace p by 1: RS 232D, by 2: 20 mA CL or by 4: isolated RS 485.

1

1

5/6

5


Network and bus modules

Applications Local area network conforming to Fip Uni-Telway multicomponent industrial bus

Type of network or bus Fipio (Agent) Fipio (gestionnaire de bus)

Bus Uni-Telway

Structure Physical interface Fip standard RS 485 non-isolated

RS 485 isolated

Method of access Bus managed by bus arbitrator Master/slaveData rate 1 Mbit/s 19,2 Kbit/s max. (1)

Medium Twisted shielded pairFibre optic via transceivers or repeaters

Twisted shielded pair

Configuration Maximal number of devices 32 per segment, 128 on all segments (limited to 64 with TSX P57 153M processor )

5 (excluding programming terminal)

28, (96 slaves addresses max.)

Maximal length From 1000 m to 15 000 m (depending on the medium use) with repeaters

10 m 1000 m 15 m in 20 mA CL

Number of links/station 1 max. 1 max. According to power

Services Message handling - Uni-TE- Periodic data exchange - Application-to-application- Transparent exchange of remote I/O

- Uni-TE Client/Server 240 bytes (128 bytes on- Application-to-application 240 bytes (128 bytes- Transparency of all devices on X-Way architecture

Type of processors All type of Premium processor and Atrium coprocessor

TSX P57 p53MTSX P57 p823M T PCX 57 353M

All type of Premium processor and Atrium coprocessor

Nature of module PCMCIA type III card on processor or coprocessor

Built-in on the processor or coprocessor

Uni-Telway built-in link


Type of module TSX FPP 10 Built-in link on processor

AUX terminal port

TSX SCY 21601

Pages 5/97 5/93 5/107

2

2

1

2 1 2

5/7

5

5

Jnet proprietary industrial local network

INTERBUS industrial fieldbus Profibus industrial fieldbus

Jnet INTERBUS Profibus DP

RS 232RS 485 isolated20 mA CL

RS 485 isolated

20 mA CL RS 485 isolated RS 485

Rotating token Master/slave generation 4 Master19,2 Kbit/s 500 Kbit/s 9,6 Kbit/s...12 Mbit/s according to

lenght of bus

Twisted shielded pair Twisted shielded pair,Fiber optic, infra-red ...

Twisted shielded pair,Fiber optic or infra-red

2 in RS 232D,28 in RS 485,16 in 20 mA CL

32 (16 if SMC PLC in the network) 512 slaves max. with 254 bus terminal blocks max.

126 slaves

1300 m 200 m depending on network topology

400 m max. (inter-station bus) 1200 m (9,6 Kbit/s), 4800 m with 3 repeaters100 m (12 Mbit/s), 400 m with 3 repeaters

consumption(see page 8/2) 3 maxi 1 ou 2 depending on the type of Premium processor/Atrium coprocessor

terminal port) on terminal port) via the master

Shared table pwith a total of 128 words (64 words if SMC PLC in the network)

- Data process implicit exchange- Pre-processing - Logical addressing- Segmentation

- Read/write access for DP slave I/O data

- Data transfer for slave diagnostics - Parametering and monitoring

requests- Inter-master dialog not supported

All type of Premium processor(except TSX 57 1p) and Atrium coprocessor

PCMCIA type III card on processor or coprocessor and on TSX SCY 21601 module

PCMCIA type III card on TSX SCY 21601 module


PC card on ISA bus


TSX SCP 11p(1)

TSX JNP 112 TSX JNP 114 TSX IBY 100 TSX IBX 100 TSX PBY 100

5/113 5/117 5/119

(1) At the end of reference, replace p by 1: RS 232D, by 2: 20 mA CL or by 4: isolated RS 485.

5/8

5

5.1

Architecture Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent ReadyLogical Ethernet communication architecture

Company

Enterprise

Factory

Workshop

MES: Manufacturing Execution System (production management system)ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning (integrated management software packages)HMI/SCADA: Human/Machine Interface/Supervision Control And Data AcquisitionGateway: Bridge to sensor/actuator bus, to installed base network, field bus, etc.

Internet

Site 1

Site 2

Site 3

MES ERP

Unix Windows Linux

HMI + SCADA

Industrial PC

Quantum Quantum

Quantum

Quantum

Momentum M1E

Robot

Servodrive

Inputs/outputs

Workshop 2Workshop 1

Distributed I/O

Gateway

PLC

Dialog terminal

Premium

Intranet

ET

HE

RN

ET

TC

P/IP

5/9

5

5.1

Architecture (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent ReadyPhysical Ethernet communication architecture

(1) In general, several collision domains should be defined in order to increase the architecture surface and improve performance. See pages 4/48 to 5/53.

Public telecommunications network, ADSL Site 1

100 mmax.

100 mmax.

100 mmax.

210 m maximum

Hub

100 mmax.

Switch Redundant optical ring ERP

MES

Specialized linkFrame RelayATM

Switches (VLAN)or routers

Switch

100 mmax.

3,100 mmax.

Collision domain 2

Hub

Switch

Site 3Router

Site 2RouterWAN

Provider

Router Firewall

Quantum

Quantum

Premium

Premium

TSX Micro

Hub Hub

Collision domain 3(1)AS-Interface bus

ATV58

Momentum M1ETransceiver

Magelis iPCVijeoLook

Third-party device

Gateway

Momentum

Switch

Switch

RAS

(max. 50 switches)

100BASE-FX

Collision domain 1

Full Duplex Half Duplex

100BASE-TX

Fiber optics

Internet Provider

Robot

5/10

5

5.1

Presentation Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Ethernet TCP/IP networkTransparent Ready

The Transparent Ready concept is presented by Schneider Electric as a means of providing transparent communication between PLC devices, production and management. Network technologies and new services associated with these enable data to be shared and distributed between sensors, PLCs, workstations and third-party devices in a more and more effective way. Web servers built into the network components and PLC devices can be used to: b Transparent access to configuration data.b Perform remote diagnostics.b Integrate simple human/machine interface functions. This concept is based on the Ethernet TCP/IP industrial standard which offers a single network and which satisfies most communication requirements from the sensors/actuators to the production management systems.Where various communication systems are usually required, the standard technologies used in Transparent Ready can be used to achieve major savings in terms of definition, installation, maintenance or training.The Transparent Ready concept is based on:b Services based on Ethernet TCP/IP and which satisfy PLC constraints in terms of functionalities, performance and service quality.b Products including Several PLC ranges, distributed I/Os, industrial terminals, variable speed drives, gateways and a growing number of partner products.b A ConneXium wiring offer; ConneXium is an accessory range of hubs, switches and cables adapted to the environment and its industrial constraints.

Modbus, the industrial communication standard since 1979, has been combined with Ethernet TCP/IP, which supports the Internet revolution, to make Modbus TCP/IP, a completely open Ethernet protocol. The development of a connection to Modbus TCP/IP requires no proprietary component or license purchase. This protocol may be easily combined with any device supporting a standard TCP/IP communication stack. Specifications can be obtained free of charge from the website: www.modbus.org.

The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally recognized. Thousands of manufacturers are already implementing this protocol. Many have already developed a Modbus TCP/IP connection and many products are currently available.The simplicity of Modbus TCP/IP enables any small field team, such as an I/O module, to communicate over Ethernet without the need for a powerful micro-processor or a lot of internal memory.

Because of the simplicity of its protocol and the high speed of 100 M bits/s Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP delivers excellent performance. This means it is possible to use this type of network in real-time applications such as I/O Scanning. See page 5/28.

Presentation

Services

Applica- tions

Transport

Link

Physical

Networkmanage-ment

GlobalData

Automatic FDRreconfiguration

WebServer

Message handling

ModbusI/OScanning

SNMP NDDS DHCP TFTP FTP HTTP Modbus

UDP TCP

IP

Ethernet 802.3 and Ethernet II

MIB

Tra

nsp

aren

t R

ead

y Modbus communication standard

Modbus TCP, simple and open

Modbus TCP, high-performance

5/11

5

5.1

Presentation (continued), service

Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Ethernet TCP/IP networkTransparent Ready

An identical application protocol is used for Modbus serial link, Modbus Plus or Modbus TCP. This therefore makes it possible to route messages from a network to another without changing protocol. As Modbus is implemented above the TCP/IP layer, users can also benefit from the IP routing which enables devices located anywhere in the world to communicate without having to worry about the distance between them.Schneider offers an entire range of gateways for interconnecting a Modbus TCP/IP network to already existing Modbus Plus or Modbus serial link networks. For further details, consult our regional sales office.The IANA institute (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) has assigned Schneider port TCP 502 (Well known port), which is reserved for the Modbus protocol. This protocol will shortly be also subject to an RFC (Request For Comments), documents which form standard references within the Internet community.

Maximum size of data:Read: 125 words or registers.Write: 100 words or registers.

b HTTP "Hypertext Transfer Protocol" (RFC1945)The HTTP protocol (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is used for transmitting Web pages between a server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since 1990.Web servers embedded into Ethernet TF devices are at the heart of the Transparent Ready concept, and are used to provide easy access to devices anywhere in the world from a standard browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.

b BOOTP/DHCP (RFC1531BOOTP/DHCP is used to automatically provide the devices with the IP parameters. This avoids having to manage the addresses of each device individually. Management is instead performed in a dedicated IP address server.DHCP protocol (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used to automatically assign the devices their configuration parameters. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP. DHCP protocol is made up of 2 components: v One for providing the IP network address,v One for providing the IP parameters specific to the device from a DHCP server.Schneider Electric devices can be:v BOOTP clients allowing automatic recovery of an IP address from a server,v BOOTP servers enabling a device to distribute IP addresses to the network stations.Schneider uses standard BOOTP/DHCP protocols for its Faulty Device Replacement service (FDR).

b FTP "File Transfer Protocol" (RFCs 959, 2228, and 2640)File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides basic file sharing elements. Many systems use FTP protocol to exchange files between devices.Transparent Ready devices implement FTP for transferring certain data to or from devices, in particular when downloading firmware or user Web pages.

b SNMP "Simple Network Management Protocol" (RFCs 1155, 1156 and 1157)The Internet community developed standard SNMP for managing the different components of a network through a single system. The network management system can exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function enables the manager to view the status of the network and devices, modify their configuration and feed back alarms in the event of failure. Transparent Ready devices are SNMP-compatible and can be integrated naturally in a network managed via SNMP.

b COM/DCOM "Distributed Component Object Model"COM/DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) or OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) is the name of the technology used in Windows components. This enables Windows applications to communicate transparently.These technologies are used in the OFS Data server software. See pages 5/30 and 5/31.

Presentation (suite)

Modbus TCP/IP, one standard

Modbus TCP/IP characteristics

Standard Ethernet Services

Modbus TCP/IP function codes dec hexaBits access Read of n input bits 02 02

Read of n output bits 01 01

Exceptional read status 07 07Write 1 output bit 05 05Write of n output bits 15 0F

Read of 1 input word 04 04Read of n input words 03 03Write 1 output word 06 06

Write of n output words 16 10Diagnostics Diagnostics 08 08

Event counter 11 0B

Event connection 12 0CIdentification 17 11

Premium function codes supported for accessing data and diagnostics.

5/12

5

5.1

Selection Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Ethernet TCP/IP networkTransparent Ready communication services

Pages 5/12 and 5/13 describe the different Transparent Ready services from which you can select whichever is most suitable for carrying out the function required by the industrial application.

Presentation

3

1

1

22

3

3

Network manager

PC + Internet browser

Premium

Quantum

ATV-58

Momentum

Magelis

Gateway

Premium

10/100 Mbps Ethernet

MES client ERP client

Installed base

5/13

5

5.1

Selection (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5


At this level, what is needed is communication via a standard protocol infrastructure enabling large volumes of data to be exchanged with production management systems. In certain cases, the PLC must be able to adapt to the protocol of the connected system. Response times are not critical.

The following Transparent Ready services are mainly used:

b HTTP communication, data viewing via Web pages and Java Applets.b Exchanges in compliance with the OPC (OLE for Process Control) standard via an OFS data server.b TCP/IP Modbus message handling. b Open TCP.

For this type of communication, it is also necessary to transfer large volumes of data to a group of PLCs.The required response time is between 0.5 and 2 seconds.

The following Transparent Ready services are used:

b TCP/IP Modbus message handling.b Data exchanges in compliance with the OPC standard via an OFS data server.b Open TCP.

An elementary HMI (Human/Machine Interface) application must allow the status of a field device to be viewed by maintenance personnel.

The following Transparent Ready services are used:

b HTTP server and communication.b Data display through personalized Web pages.

Control level 1Communication between MES/ERP systems and PLCs

Communication between supervision systems and PLCs

Communication between IHM applications and “field” PLCs/devices

5/14

5

5.1



Simple communication interfaces are required to provide exchanges with the PLCs. Point-to-point data is sent according to the programming algorithms or on demand, for access at the initiative of a programming or diagnostics terminal. The required response time is between 0.2 and 1 seconds.

The main Transparent Ready service used is Modbus TCP/IP message handling.

Broadcast communications must enable several applications to be synchronized through real-time exchanges. In this case the volume of exchanged data is reliable.The required response time is between 10 and 500 milliseconds.

The Global Data service of Transparent Ready is particularly well suited to this type of exchange.

PLC applications are essentially responsible for managing the inputs and outputs of peripheral devices. Data must be transferred to all devices in a quick, deterministic and repetitive way. The required response time is between 10 and 100 milliseconds.

The Transparent Ready service I/O Scanning is used to meet these requirements.

This type of communication is used to configure, monitor and maintain workshop-level devices. It must remain simple in order for less well-trained personnel to access the first diagnostics level from a standard PC.

The adapted Transparent Ready services are:

b HTTP server for displaying diagnostics Web pages and customized Web pages.b Standard SNMP network management protocol.

Inter-PLC level 2Communication to PLCs for programming, diagnostics and data transfer

Inter-PLC communication for synchronizing applications

Field level 3Communication between the PLC and field devices for managing the automation process

Communication between the PC and field PLCs or devices

5/15

5

5.1



The following table can be used to select a Transparent Ready service according to the type of communication required.

These services provide high-performance and reliable communication in Schneider architectures featuring Quantum/Premium/Momentum/TSX Micro PLCs. However, in certain cases it is also necessary for these architectures to communicate with the installed base, or with third-party devices:

b Communication with the Schneider Electric installed base.

The Transparent Ready architecture offers a number of means of facilitating the extension of existing installations. These are the portability of applications, upgrade procedures, the growing compatibility of protocols, the availability of gateways for interconnecting the different networks, etc.

b Interoperability with third-party devices or protocols.

Finally, certain applications need to communicate with devices from other suppliers than Schneider Electric. This can be achieved in a variety of ways, through access to standard protocols from the PLC (Open TCP message handling) or through the hosting of Schneider protocols in third-party devices.

Selection of Transparent Ready services

Communication Control level 1 Inter-PLC level 2 Field level 3 Seepages

Transparent Ready Services Communication with MES/ERP

Supervision HMI application Inter-PLC communication

Inter-PLC synchronization

Communication with peripherals (I/O)

Diagnostics, maintenance of devices

Modbus TCP/IP 5/10

Web/FactoryCast servers 5/16

I/O Scanning 5/28

Global Data 5/29

SNMP 5/30

Open TCP 5/31

OFS server 6/30

5/16

5

5.1

In line with the Transparent Ready approach, TSX Micro, Premium, Quantum, Momentum and Advantys STB automation platforms all provide transparent access to data in realtime using Web-based technologies via their Ethernet TCP/IP or FactoryCast communication module.

The Transparent Ready communication modules in automation platforms integrate Ethernet TCP/IP services (Modbus TCP/IP messaging, SNMP network management functions, etc.) and provide the following Web functions:b Standard Web serverb FactoryCast Web serverb FactoryCast HMI Web service

Standard Web services can be used to execute diagnostic and maintenance functions on automation system installations locally or remotely using a simple Internet browser:b PLC system and I/O module diagnostics, PLC error display ("Rack Viewer" pages ready to use).b Display and adjustment of PLC variables ("Data Editor" pages ready to use).

The embedded Web server is a realtime PLC data server. All the data can be presented in the form of standard Web pages in HTML format and can therefore be accessed using any Internet browser that supports the integrated Java code. The standard functions provided by the Web server are supplied "ready to use" and therefore do not require any programming at either PLC level or at the level of the PC device supporting the Internet browser.

In addition to providing standard Web services, the FactoryCast Web server can be used to control and monitor automation system installations both locally and remotely. The following functions are available:b Management of system alarms and PLC application with partial or global acknowledgment ("ready to use" pages for the "Alarm Viewer" function).b Application graphics diagnostics (customized graphical views created by the user using the "Graphic Data Editor" function).b Graphics control via animated Web pages created by the user and stored in the FactoryCast module.

FactoryCast Web servers can also be used to customize control, diagnostics and maintenance interfaces via user-defined Web pages and Web pages transferred to the module using FactoryCast configuration software (maximum available memory required is 8 Mb).

In addition to the FactoryCast Web functions, the FactoryCast HMI Web server provides HMI Web functions, which are executed in the module itself:b Realtime HMI database management, independent of the PLC processorb Arithmetic and logical calculations based on HMI datab Connectivity with relational databasesb Transmission of electronic messages (e-mail)

FactoryCast HMI is an active Web server, which can be used to execute HMI functions integrated in a PLC module. This eliminates the need for communication via polling to update the HMI/SCADA database.In FactoryCast HMI modules, the HMI functions are executed without affecting the PLC application program and therefore the cycle time.

Presentation

Ethernet TCP/IP communication

Standard Web server

FactoryCast Web server

FactoryCast HMI Web server user

Global data - I/O scanning communication

Ethernet TCP/IP PLC module services

Standard Web server


FactoryCast HMI Web server


Transparent Ready embedded Web serversFactoryCast offer

5/17

5

5.1

Presentation (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Transparent Ready embedded Web serversFactoryCast offer

FactoryCast is a range of PLC modules associated with their configuration software and combines the following features:b Realtime communication functions based on Ethernet TCP/IPb Predefined Web pages, which enable advanced installation diagnosticsb The capacity to store dynamic user-defined Web pages

Selection of Transparent Ready modules - Web serverAutomation platform Ethernet TCP/IP

Transparent Ready moduleWeb server integrated in the moduleStandard FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI

Quantum 140 NOE 771 00/01

140 NOE 771 10/11

140 NWM 100 00

Premium TSX ETY 4103

TSX ETY 110WS

TSX ETY 5103

TSX WMY 100

TSX Micro TSX ETZ 410

TSX ETZ 510

Momentum 171 CCC 960 20/30

171 CCC 980 20/30

Advantys STB STB NIP 2212

5/18

5

5.1

Functions Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Transparent Ready embedded Web serversStandard Web services

"Rack Viewer" and "Data Editor" functions are supported by the Ethernet TCP/IP modules of the following:b TSX Micro platformb Premium platform b Quantum platformb Momentum platformb Advantys STB distributed I/Osb FactoryCast modules See module reference on page 5/17.

These functions can be accessed using a standard Internet browser connected to the network. They are "ready to use" and secure (password-protected).

They can be used locally or remotely via:v Intranetv A modem and RAS serverv Internet

Standard Web services

Internet

Firewall

Intranet

Remote Web clients

"Thin Client" PC Web client

Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server TSX Micro + Web server

"Thin Client" Magelis iPC Web client

5/19

5

5.1

Functions (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Transparent Ready embedded Web serversStandard Web services

The "Rack Viewer" function (PLC rack display) can be used for PLC system and I/O diagnostics. It displays the following in realtime:

b LED status on the front panel of the PLCb The PLC versionb The hardware configuration of the PLC including the status of the system bits and wordsb Detailed diagnostics of all I/O module channels or application-specific channels in the configuration

The "Data Editor" function can be used to create tables of animated variables for realtime read/write access to lists of PLC data.

The variables to be displayed can be entered and displayed either symbolically (S_Pump 234) or by their address (%MW99).

These variables only support write access if this option has been enabled using the FactoryCast configuration software. A second password must be entered and verified when writing a value to a variable.

Various animation tables containing specific application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by the user and saved in the Ethernet TCP/IP module.

"Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics function

Quantum hardware configuration

Premium main rack hardware configuration

"Data Editor" read/write function for PLC data and variables

Variables table

5/20

5

5.1


Transparent Ready embedded Web serversFactoryCast Web server

In addition to standard Web services, FactoryCast modules (see selection table on page 5/16) support the following functions:b Alarm Viewerb Creation and display of graphical views via an online graphics editor (Graphic Data Editor supplied)b Hosting and display of Web pages created by the user

FactoryCast configuration software (supplied with FactoryCast modules) is required for the last 2 functions.

"Alarm Viewer" is a ready-to-use password-protected function. Based on the diagnostics buffer managed in the PLCs (specific memory area used to store all diagnostic events), this function is available with the Premium/Atrium platforms (with PL7 or Unity software) and the Quantum platform (with Unity software).

This function can be used to process alarms (display, acknowledgment and deletion) managed at PLC level by the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as DFBs (system-specific diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic function blocks created by the user).

The diagnostics viewer is a Web page comprising a list of messages, which displays the following information for each alarm: v Its state v The type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB)v Its geographical areav The dates and times of the occurrence/removal of a fault


Intranet

Internet

Remote Web client

Firewall

Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server TSX Micro + Web server

Modem +RAS server

“Thin Client” Magelis iPCWeb client

Alarm Viewer function

Alarm Viewer page

5/21

5

5.1


Transparent Ready embedded Web serversFactoryCast Web server

This function can be used to create graphical views online, animated by PLC variables.

These views are created using a library of graphic objects, which are predefined by simple copy/paste operations. The object parameters are set according to user requirements (color, PLC variables, labels, etc.). The graphic objects provided, which are the basic elements of the view, are as follows:b Analog and digital indicatorsb Horizontal and vertical bar chartsb Boxes for displaying messages and entering valuesb Pushbutton boxesb Functions for recording trendsb etc.

The views created can be saved in the FactoryCast modules.

These customized graphic objects can be reused in user Web pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages.

In addition, FactoryCast Web modules have 8 Mbytes of memory (1), which is accessed in the same way as a hard drive and can be used to host user-defined Web pages.These Web pages can be created using any standard tool (2) that enables creation and editing in HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are provided in the Graphic Data Editor supplied with FactoryCast.

The Web pages created can be used, for example, to:b Display and modify all PLC variables in realtimeb Create hyperlinks to other external Web servers (documentation, suppliers, etc.)

This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic screens used for the following purposes:b Display, monitoring, diagnosticsb Generation of realtime production reportsb Maintenance helpb Operator guides

The configuration software for FactoryCast Web servers is supplied on CD-ROM with every FactoryCast module (TSX Micro, Premium or Quantum).

The software is used for the configuration and administration of the Web server embedded in these modules. The software is compatible with Windows 95/98, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0 and Windows XP operating systems. It offers the following functions:b Access security managementb Definition of user names and associated passwords for accessing Web pagesb Definition of access to variables authorized for modificationb Saving/restoration of an entire websiteb Transfer of Web pages created locally by the user on their PC workstation to the FactoryCast module and vice versa

(1) Memory is not affected in the event of power outages or if the PLC is reinitialized.(2) For example, Microsoft FrontPage.

FactoryCast Web server (continued)

Graphic Data Editor function

Function for hosting and displaying user Web pages

Configuration software for FactoryCast Web servers

5/22

5

5.1


Transparent Ready embedded Web serversFactoryCast HMI Web server

The FactoryCast HMI range comprises two Web server modules embedded in the PLC (one for the Premium platform and one for the Quantum platform) and FactoryCast HMI application development software (to be ordered separately).

These modules have the same Web functions as FactoryCast modules, namely: b Ethernet TCP/IP communication functions: v TCP/IP messaging service with Modbus TCP and Uni-TE TCP protocolsv SNMP agent for standardized network management, which supports standard MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB.

b Standard Web and FactoryCast services: v "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics functions, see page 5/17v "Data Editor" read/write functions for PLC variables, see page 5/17v "Alarm Viewer" alarm display functions, see page 5/20 v "Graphic Data Editor" online graphical editor functions, see page 5/21v Function for hosting and displaying user Web pages, see page 5/20

FactoryCast HMI modules also provide the following specialized HMI Web services:b Realtime database management specific to the module, combining PLC data acquisition and the management of local internal variables. b Arithmetic and logical calculations for pre-processing data.

b E-mail with automatic transmission triggered by a specific process event.

b Connection to the SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle relational databases for archiving data for tracking or logging.

By simply setting parameters, the FactoryCast HMI application development software can be used to set up these functions in an intuitive and user-friendly way.A simulation mode, which is integrated in the software, can be used to test the operation of the FactoryCast HMI application without a module and without the need for a physical connection to a PLC, thereby simplifying debugging.

FactoryCast HMI Web services

Functions:Pages 5/24 to 5/26

Description:Page 5/27

Characteristics:Page 5/27

References:Page 5/27

5/23

5

5.1

FactoryCast HMI Web servers can be integrated in various architectures:

b Installations that require a flexible and cost-effective HMI solutionb "Hybrid" architectures supplementing conventional SCADA systemsb Architectures where a direct link is required between automation systems and information management levels (IT link).

The use of Web-based technologies means that FactoryCast HMI can replace conventional HMI or SCADA solutions in applications where architectures require a flexible multistation HMI, thus providing a temporary "nomadic" remote control function.

These architectures consist of:b Several PLCs networked on Ethernet, which have FactoryCast HMI Web server modules.b One or more PC terminals with "Thin Client" interface equipped with a simple Web browser. b If necessary, a relational database in which FactoryCast HMI can archive data directly from the automation system.

FactoryCast HMI modules read PLC data and execute HMI services (E-mail, interpreted calculations, connection to relational databases, updating Web pages) at source in the PLC, without affecting the PLC program or the scan time.

This solution provides:b A reliable HMI application, which is executed at source in a robust PLC device.b An integrated multistation interface and remote access that is easy and cost-effective to set up ("Thin Client" terminal).b An HMI application that is easy to maintain (the application is housed in a single location on the server side).b Preventive maintenance via E-mail.b Greater availability of data archiving done from source.

In this type of architecture, FactoryCast HMI supplements conventional SCADA systems. SCADA Vijeo Look or Monitor Pro software meets the requirement for centralizing information for global supervision from a central site.

Combining a FactoryCast HMI solution and a conventional SCADA solution enables: b Simplification of the SCADA application by locating some of the SCADA processing at source, at PLC level. b Increased availability of the traceability function due to the direct connection between FactoryCast HMI modules and relational databases.b Powerful "ready to use" remote diagnostics capacities.b "Nomadic" stations to be connected to the Intranet or Internet via "Thin Client" PC or PDA devices.

Architectures

Relational database

Ethernet TCP/IP

Thin Client

IPC

Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server

TSX MicroPremium

Flexible Web HMI solution

SCADA Vijeo Look

MIS IT links

NomadHMI

Intranet

Quantum + Web serverPremium + Web server

Hybrid architectures







5/24

5

5.1

Presentation, functions



In this type of architecture FactoryCast HMI eliminates the need for intermediate devices (gateways), which are expensive to install and maintain, by establishing a direct link between the automation levels and the global information management levels (MES, ERP, etc). The PLC directly archives information from the automation system in relational databases, which allows a "collaborative" automation system to be set up, making it easier to share data in real time.

This solution results in:b Simplified architecturesb Lower installation, development and maintenance costsb Increased reliability of information (the data is collected at source)b Greater availability of data archiving

With an internal architecture similar to that of an HMI/SCADA system, FactoryCast HMI modules manage their own variable database in realtime, independently of the PLC program. It is this variable database that is used to execute various functions, including internal processing, archiving, alarm, E-mail, etc.Variables in this realtime database are updated using the automation system data acquisition service. This service becomes operational once the following parameters have been set in the FactoryCast HMI software:b Direct import of PLC variable/symbol databases (no double entry).b Definition of the frequency of acquisition (period at which this variable is updated).

Note: A FactoryCast HMI application running in a Premium configured FactoryCast HMI module can access also the remote PLC variables in the architecture via a transparent network (X-Way/Uni-TE transparent protocols).

Characteristics: v Maximum number of I/O variables per application: 1000 variables from PLCs v Maximum number of internal variables per application: 100v Acquisition frequency: 500 ms, minimum

Direct links with the information management levels

Quantum + Web serverPremium + Web server

Nomad HMI

Intranet

MIS IT links

Specialized HMI servicesPLC acquisition and realtime database

PLC data

FactoryCast HMI realtime

database

FactoryCast HMI modules

Transmission of E-mail

IPC

Thin Client Relational database

Web page display

Database connection

Interpreted calculations




5/25

5

5.1



The FactoryCast HMI module can, on a specific event, send E-mail completely autonomously to a predefined list of E-mail addresses. This function is executed independently of the PLC program.

The event that triggers the E-mail may be associated with the following:b A PLC variable (I/O, internal variable)b An alarm, a threshold overshootb A machine or process stateb An operator action, etc.

When an E-mail is sent to a destination E-mail address, it must pass through an SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server. This server receives the E-mail and waits for the recipient to acknowledge it. The E-mail service is compatible with all SMTP servers. A return address can be defined should delivery to the destination address fail.

Characteristics:v Configuration of the SMTP server: Compatible with all SMTP serversv Maximum number of E-mail: 100v Contents of E-mail messages: Free text with embedded dynamic variable values (from the PLC) and hypertext links (unlimited)

The FactoryCast HMI module can be connected directly and completely autonomously to the following remote relational databases:b SQL Serverb MySQLb Oracle

This connection enables all internal or process data to be archived so that it can be logged and traced.

The data can be archived (written) periodically and/or on a specific event. These variables can either be from PLCs (I/O bits, internal bits, internal words and registers) or local to the module. The FactoryCast HMI "Roll Over" function checks the size of tables by managing the maximum number of records. This circular data archiving function automatically deletes the oldest data and can be accessed by simply setting parameters in the FactoryCast HMI software.

Characteristics: v Number of databases that can be connected: 3v Number of tables that can be written per database: 10, maximumv Number of columns per table: 50, maximumv Type of database supported: Oracle, SQL Server and MySQLv Automatic table creation: The FactoryCast HMI server automatically creates a table in the database if one does not already exist

The FactoryCast HMI server can carry out various arithmetic and logical operations on a combination of variables from the HMI database and does this independently of the PLC processor. These calculations include, for example, scaling, formatting, logic processing for event triggering, etc.

This calculation function is provided in the form of spreadsheets where the formulae are defined in cells. The spreadsheets are interpreted and processed by the server. The result of each formula is associated with a new internal variable. The processing of each spreadsheet is initiated by a trigger.

Specialized HMI services (continued)

E-mail transmission

Connection to relational databases

Calculation functions

Presentation:Pages 5/22 to 5/24




5/26

5

5.1


Transparent Ready EthernetFactoryCast HMI Web server

FactoryCast HMI application development software, referenced TLX CD FCHMI V1M, provides multiproject management and complete control of FactoryCast HMI applications, during both the development and the debugging phases, thanks to the online mode and simulation mode (operational when the system is offline) options.

This software enables the intuitive and user-friendly setup of HMI functions by simply setting parameters using a tree structure of the application and can be used for complete management of the Web site:

b Setting parameters for HMI functions:v Configuration of PLC interfaces: Import symbol databases and set parameters for the acquisition periodv Configuration of spreadsheetsv Configuration of E-mailv Configuration of connections to databases

b Management of the Web site:v Management of the Web site tree structure (creation/deletion of HTML folders and files)v Management of default Web site pagesv Management of user Web site pages (1)v Graphic object editor for animating Web pagesv Launch of the system editor for HTML pages (FrontPage or similar)v Up/downloading/comparison of Web pages in online modev Debugging of Web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including animations and Java beans)

b Simulation modeThe application and the Web site (including animations and Java beans) can be debugged in either online or simulation mode, which enables operation to be tested without a FactoryCast HMI module and without a physical connection to a PLC, thus simplifying debugging.

An integrated graphics editor in the FactoryCast HMI software can be used to easily customize the following graphic objects: bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc.User Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (FrontPage or similar, not supplied).FactoryCast HMI includes a plug-in for FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to set up animations, which enable PLC variables to be accessed in realtime in the HTML pages created by the user. They are created in the HTML editor by simply inserting customized graphic objects (FactoryCast Java beans).

(1) Creation of user Web pages: User Web pages created in the FactoryCast HMI environment are actual animated supervision screens and can be used to monitor your process. Based on HMI Web technology, they enable realtime access to PLC variables thanks to the FactoryCast graphic objects library (FactoryCast Java beans).

FactoryCast HMI application development software





5/27

5

5.1

Description, characteristics,references


Transparent Ready EthernetFactoryCast HMI Web services

The TSX WMY 100 (for Premium platform) and 140 NWM 100 00 (for Quantum platform) modules are equipped with the following on the front panel:

1 A display block, which indicates the module status and the transmission status of the Ethernet TCP/IP network.

2 An RJ45 connector (with Premium/Quantum) and an MTRJ connector for a 100BASE-FX interface (with Quantum).

To be ordered separately: Accessories and connecting cables, see Ethernet ConneXium wiring system (see page 5/59).

(1) Includes documentation in electronic format.

Description

1

2

TSX WMY 100

CharacteristicsFactoryCast HMI module type TSX WMY 100 140 NWM 100 00

Modicon automation platform Premium Quantum

Communication servicesInterface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX and 100BASE-FX Connection type Point-to-point connection (via a standard RJ45 connector), which enables the formation of a

(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) star network (the stations are linked to ConneXium hubs or switches).

Number of stations 64 stations maximum per networkTransmission speed 10/100 Mbit/s with automatic speed recognition

Ethernet communication servicesNetwork management SNMP agent, supports standard MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB

TCP/IP services Uni-TE v Client/server modev Client/server requests of 256 bytes

(synchronous mode)v Client/server requests of 1 K byte

(asynchronous mode)

-

Modbus v Client/server modev Asynchronous requests of 256 bytes

X-Way services v X-Way inter-network routingv X-Way/Uni-Telway routingv Module diagnostics

-

Web server servicesEmbedded Web server Standard services v "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics

v "Data Editor" access to PLC data and variablesFactoryCast services v "Alarm Viewer" alarm display

v "Graphic Data Editor" graphic object editorv Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available)

FactoryCast HMI services v HMI database (1000 variables, maximum)v E-mail transmission (100, maximum)v Connection to SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle databases: connection to 3 databases max.,

10 tables maximum in write mode per database; v Interpreted arithmetic and logical calculationsv Simulator for debugging the HMI application offline

ReferencesEthernet TCP/IP Transparent Ready modulesEmbedded Web server

Name and description

Speed Reference Weightkg

FactoryCast HMI FactoryCast HMI Premium module

10/100 Mbit/s TSX WMY 100 0.340

FactoryCast HMI Quantum module

100 Mbit/s 140 NWM 100 00 -

TSX WMY 100

140 NWM 100 00

FactoryCast HMI installation software (to be ordered separately)

Name and description

Use Operating system

Reference Weightkg

Multilingual FactoryCast HMI (1)

Development and debugging of the HMI application

Windows 2000, Windows XP

TLX CD FCHMI V1M 0.340



140 NWM 100 00

5/28

5

5.1


Ethernet TCP/IP networkI/O Scanning and Global Data services

The I/O Scanning service can be used to manage the exchange of distributed I/Os on the Ethernet network after a simple configuration operation, with no need for special programming.The I/Os are scanned transparently by means of read/write requests according to the Modbus Master/Slave protocol on the TCP/IP profile. This principle of scanning via a standard protocol enables communication with any device which supports a Modbus server on TCP/IP.This service can be used to define:b An %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs.b An %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs.b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan.During operation, the module:b Manages the TCP/IP connections with each of the distributed devices.b Scans the devices and copies the I/Os into the configured %MW word zone.b Feeds back status words so that correct operation of the service can be monitored from the PLC application.b Applies the preconfigured fallback values in the event of a communication problem.Within the framework of the Schneider Alliances partnership program, Schneider Electric has developed an offer of hardware and software products which enable the I/O Scanning protocol to be implemented on any type of product which can be connected to the Ethernet network (please consult your Regional Sales Office).

Characteristics: 64 stations (128 with TSX 57 5p processors) can exchange a maximum of 120 words each. The maximum size for all 64 stations in the PLC managing the service is 2 K %MW in inputs and 2 K %MW in outputs.

The Faulty Device Replacement service uses the standard BOOTP, DHCP, file management and TFTP technologies with the objective of simplifying Ethernet device maintenance.It enables a faulty device to be replaced by a new product while guaranteeing its detection, reconfiguration, and automatic restart by the system, without difficult manual intervention.The principal steps are:b A device using the FDR service is faulty.b Another similar device is taken from the maintenance pool, preconfigured with the “role_name” (or identifier) of the device that is out of service, then reinstalled on the network.b The FDR server (which can be a Quantum or Premium PLC Ethernet module) detects the new addition, configures its IP address and transfers all configuration parameters to it.b The substituted device verifies if all the parameters are indeed compatible with its own characteristics, then switches to operating mode.

I/O Scanning service

Word table

Read Write

Ethernet TCP/IP

Input wordsOutput wordsof devices

Replacement service for faulty devices (FDR, Faulty Device Replacement)

5/29

5

5.1


Ethernet TCP/IP networkI/O Scanning and Global Data services

I/O Scanning service diagnostics can be performed in 3 ways:b By the application program from a data field specific to the PLC.b From the debugging screen in the installation software.b From the PLC system diagnostics function viewed with the Internet browser on a PC station.

The Global Data service ensures data exchanges in real time between stations belonging to the same distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote applications, or share a common database among several distributed applications.The exchanges are based on a standard producer/consumer protocol, guaranteeing optimal performance while maintaining a minimum network load. This RTPS (Real Time Publisher Subscriber) protocol is promoted by the IDA (Interface For Distributed Automation) organization, and has already been adopted as a standard by several manufacturers.

Characteristics: A maximum of 64 stations can participate in Global Data within the same distribution group.Each station can:b Publish one 1024-byte variable. The publication period can be configured from 1 to n periods of the MAST task of the processor.b Subscribe to between 1 and 64 variables. Validity for each variable is controlled by Health Status Bits, linked to a refresh timeout configurable between 50 ms and 1 s. Access to a variable element is not possible. The total size of the subscribed variables reaches 4 K contiguous bytes.In order to optimize Ethernet network performance further still, Global Data can be configured with the "multicast filtering" option, which together with switches in the ConneXium range, perform data broadcasting only on Ethernet ports, where there is a Global Data service subscriber station. If these switches are not used, Global Data is transmitted in "multicast" on all switch ports.

The diagnostics screens use a color code to show Global Data status:b Configured/not configured/faulty.b Published/subscribed.

I/O Scanning service diagnostics

Global Data service

Distribution group 1Data exchange of 4 Kb max.

Data exchange of 4 Kb max.Distribution group 2

IP multicast 239.255.255.251

IP multicast 239,255,255,250

Ethernet TCP/IP

Global Data service diagnostics

5/30

5

5.1


Ethernet TCP/IP networkSNMP and TCP Open services

The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) protocol is used, from a network management station, to monitor and control all Ethernet architecture components and thus ensure rapid diagnostics if a problem occurs.It is used to:b Query devices such as computer stations, routers, switches, bridges or terminal devices (DTE) in order to view their status.b Obtain statistics for the network on which the devices are connected.This management software respects the traditional Client/Server model. However, in order to avoid confusion with other communication protocols using this terminology, we prefer to use the expression: b Network manager for the Client application running on the computer station.b SNMP agent for the server application that runs on the device.Transparent Factory can be managed by any SNMP network manager, including HP Openview or IBM Netview.

Standard SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used to access configuration and management objects included in the MIB (Management Information Base) for the devices. These MIBs must comply with certain standards in order to be accessed by all managers on the market. However, depending on the device complexity, manufacturers can add certain objects to the private databases.

The Schneider Electric Transparent Factory private MIB includes management objects specific to the Schneider offer. These objects simplify installation, implementation, and maintenance for Schneider Transparent Factory products in an open environment using standard network management tools.The Transparent Factory products support 2 SNMP network management levels:b Standard MIB II, a first level of network management, can be accessed via this interface. It lets the manager identify the devices forming the architecture and retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of the Ethernet TCP/IP interfaces.b MIB Transparent Factory interface; management of the Transparent Factory devices is improved via this interface. This MIB includes a set of data that enables the network management system to supervise all the Schneider Transparent Factory services.The Schneider Electric Transparent Factory private MIB can be downloaded from the Web server from any Ethernet Transparent Factory module in a PLC.

Premium platform Ethernet modules support a number of communication protocols based on the TCP/IP standard.Among these, the Modbus protocol has public specifications and its simplicity recommends it for the needs of communication with third-party devices (see Schneider Alliances partnership program).However, for certain applications, it may prove necessary to use other protocols. This is the case when, for example, users wish to integrate Premium platforms into existing architectures which use a particular communication protocol, possibly a proprietary one.To meet these needs for open access, 2 interface levels are included in the Schneider offer:b A library of basic functions, which can be used in C language, enables direct access to the socket interface on TCP. The user can thus create his own communication functions using SDKC development software and take advantage of the ease of use which this program offers in terms of development and debugging. Once generated, these function blocks are used in the application like any standard PL7 programming software function block.b A library of basic function blocks known as EFs, which can be used directly in the application programs with PL7 language. These are the same as functions developed in C language seen earlier, but are designed for use by non-computer specialists. These EF function blocks are not modifiable.

SNMP service protocol

Open TCP

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Application

Presentation

Session

Transport

Network

Link

Physical

OSI Model Ethernet TCP/IP profile

Modbus

Socket access

TCP

IP

ISO 8802.2 - ISO 8802.3

ISO 8802.3 (Ethernet)10/100 Mbps

5/31

5

5.1


Ethernet TCP/IP networkSNMP and TCP Open services

Operating in TCP connection client/server mode, the basic functions on the Berkeley socket interface enable:b Management of 16 connections on the Open profile out of a maximum of 32b Creation of sockets and their attachment to any TCP port.b Switching of these sockets to "listen for a connection request from a remote client" mode.b Opening of a connection.b Transmission and reception of data on these connections (lenght of data to send and receive is 240 bytes max.).b Closing this connection.

The TCP Open offer consists of a CD-ROM containing the TCP/IP function libraries. Open access on TCP is only possible via TSX ETY 110WS/5103 Ethernet modules (1). With open access on TCP, all the basic functions of TSX ETY 110 WS/5103 modules can be used.

The TCP/IP TLX CD TCP 50M function library comprises:b The SDKC program enhancement library that provides access to the module TCP/IP socket functions.b The user's manual in English (no printed version).b EF elementary communication function blocks (Socket/Bind/Listen/Accept/ Shutdown/Close/Send/Receive/Select/Set_Socket Option/Connect) for installation using PL7 software (version u V3.3).b Higher level EF function blocks, provided by way of example, which can perform more advanced functions such as the complete sequence for establishing or closing a connection, or sending or receiving data. The source files for all these EF blocks are also supplied.b An example of a PL7 application communicating with a TELNET application on a PC.

If dedicated function blocks need to be created, the SDKC program for C language function development, version u V3.3 should be installed on the development station (see page 6/7).

The development of C language functions requires compliance with certain setup precautions:b To set up these services, the user should be familiar with the TCP/IP profile.b In addition, since the SDKC program enables access to all the PLC internal resources, all the necessary precautions should be taken when developing EF communication blocks to avoid endangering the PL7 application, especially on the commonly fragile operating modes such as cold/warm restarts, response to a fault, etc.b The user should also take care to maintain the requests from the different communication profiles at a level compatible with the performance required by the application.b Finally, it is the responsibility of the client application software (PL7 or C program) to manage the operating modes for communication which may be specific to the application, for example the behavior if a remote device fails to respond or in the event of a break in connection.

For these different reasons, we recommend that you consult your Regional Sales Office to ensure that your TCP protocol open access project is feasible.

(1) Open access on TCP requires TSX ETY 110 WS modules, version u PV 03 and SV 2.9. In addition, it should be integrated on a configuration with a TSX P57 pp3 processor (or TSX P57 pp2 version > V3.3).

Open TCP (continued)Functions

Description

Setup precautions

5/32

5

5.1

Characteristics Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent ReadyPerformance

When selecting an architecture, it is advisable to take performance into account at the earliest possible stage.

For this, the designer must:b Have a clear idea of his needs as regards:v quantity and type of devices to be interconnected,v volume and type of exchanges,v expected response times,v environment.

b Compare his needs with the characteristics of the offers available and be aware that the precise performance level between any 2 points on an architecture is dependent on the weakest link in the chain, which can be:v a function of the hardware,v but also a function of the applications (size, architecture, OS, machine power, etc.) which are often poorly defined at this stage of project.

b Select the most suitable architecture.

The objective of the following pages is to answer the second point by explaining the performance of the different components which constitute an Ethernet architecture, concentrating on the following 2 aspects:b Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges (see pages 5/33 and 5/34).b Application response time (see page 5/35).

As in any communication system, the performance of an Ethernet architecture is linked to numerous parameters which depend on the:

b Hardware used:v network bandwidth,v module resources,v processor resources (PLC, PC or other CPUs).

b Application services used:v Modbus (or Uni-TE) industrial messaging handling service,v Global Data service,v I/O Scanning service,v Others (Web access, TCP Open communication).

The difficulty in determining the correct size of an architecture is due to the fact that the majority of these parameters are linked.

b For purposes of simplification, the values shown in the tables which follow have been reduced. If these are adhered to, correct operation of the architecture is ensured. If the performance levels obtained are not sufficient, please consult our Regional Sales Office for a more detailed study.

b The performance levels indicated depend relatively little on the size of messages. Limiting factors have much more to do with the number of messages. It is therefore necessary to group as much useful information as possible within the same message using the most suitable Modbus request.

Selecting the communication architecture

Introduction

Notes

5/33

5

5.1

Characteristics (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5


The methodology presented below in 4 steps can be used to determine the message processing capacity on Ethernet TCP/IP.

Using the tables below, calculate the exchanges necessary for the application, i.e. for each station on the architecture and for each service used, the number of messages to be transmitted and received per second.

Using the table below, compare the total number of messages received via the Modbus and Uni-TE service for each station (value R1, R2 or Ri) with the station processor processing capacity. If the result of this initial calculation is positive, go to step 3.

v mes/cyc: number of messages being received per cycle from the PLC master task (typical cycle from 50 to 100 ms).v mes/s: number of messages transmitted and received per second.

(1) A temporary overload on several PLC cycles, due, for example, to an adjustment terminal or the temporary connection of an Internet browser, is acceptable.

Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges

Step 1: calculation of exchanges necessary for the application

Messages transmitted per second from

Station A Station B Station N Total number of messages received per station

Messages per second sent to

Station A R1

Station B R2

Station N Ri

Total number of messages transmitted per station

E1 E2 Ei Network loadCru = Σ [R1…Ri, E1…Ei]

Not applicable

Step 2: station processor processing capacity (system requests)

Premium or Atrium platform Messages being received Messages being transmitted

Communication by EFs or EFBs

Modbus requests (1)

v 4 mes/cycwith TSX 57-10v 8 mes/cycwith TSX 57-20v 12 mes/cycwith TSX 57-30v 16 mes/cycwith TSX 57-40

Does not constitute a limiting factor

5/34

5

5.1


Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent ReadyPerformance.

For each station, compare the total number of messages received (Σ [values Ri, Rj] and the total number of messages transmitted (Σ [values Ei, Ej] for station N, for example) with the bus or network processing capacity shown below. If the result of this second calculation is positive, go to step 4.

b Modbus requests:v 125 words or registers in read access,v 100 words or registers in write access.b Global Data: 512-word published variable, subscription to a maximum of 64 variables, with a maximum size of 2 K %MW.b I/O Scanning: v 2 K %MW as input,v 2 K %MW as output.

The bandwidth management service shows load level for the Ethernet module. This enables the user to monitor any drift and anticipate possible problems.

Ethernet module load is indicated in 3 ways:b Anticipated load in the PL7 configuration screen.b Actual load in the PL7 diagnostics/debugging screen, as well as in Web diagnostics pages. The load is displayed as a bar graph, animated in real time.b In the SNMP interface for access to the SNMP network manager.

The bandwidth is shown as a percentage for each of the following services:b Modbus (and Uni-TE) message handling.b I/O Scanning.b Global Data.b Other.

In spite of the large bandwidth of an Ethernet Network (100 Mbps), the user must ensure that the actual application load does not exceed 25 to 30 % of the hypothetical network capacity. If this should occur, this load must be reduced via a switched architecture (use of switches). See page 5/52.

(1) 100 % of the module load corresponds to the processing of 450 message transactions, or 2000 distributed input/output pollings, or 800 Global Data subscriptions. If these services are used partially, then the module load will be calculated proportionately.

Step 3: bus or network module processing capacity

Processing Premium Ethernet TCP/IPTSX ETY 110/210TSX ETY 110WS

TSX ETY 4103/5103TSX P57 pp23

Message transactions 60 450 (1)

Scanning I/O polling Service not available 2000 (1)

Global Data subscriptions Service not available 800 (1)

Characteristics summary

Network bandwidth management in the Ethernet TCP/IP modules

Step 4: network load

5/35

5

5.1



PLC-module processor exchanges are synchronous with the PLC cycle, in the same manner as the input/output exchanges. When an event appears, (input switching to 1 for example), a message can only be transmitted after this input has been taken into consideration (start of the following cycle) and the PLC program has been executed, i.e. approximately 1.5 cycles after the event has appeared.

Network access time (NAT) shown in the table below as ms, totals the module transit time and the delay before the message can be transmitted across the network.

Transaction time TT includes the delay between the transmission of a message from a client station 1, its reception by a server station 2, processing the request, sending back the response and its acceptance by station 1 (update of an output for example).

As the block diagram above shows, the duration of the transaction will be between:b TTmin = 2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT minimum.b TTmax = 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT maximum.

Average duration is:b TT = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT.

Response time (RT) includes the delay between a remote input, processing by the PLC application and updating a remote output: b RT = 2 x CT + 1 ms per device.

The transaction time (TT) includes the delay between publication of a Global Data by station 1, its reception and processing by remote station 2 and its retransmission to the initial station 1:

For an exchanged variable: b If CT < 5 ms, TT = 5 to 6 x CT.b If CT u 10 ms, TT = 3 x CT.

Application response timeFor the Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging handling service

Processing Premium Ethernet TCP/IPTSX ETY 110/210TSX ETY 110WS

TSX ETY 4103/5103TSX P57 pp23

Modbus requests < 25 ms < 10 ms

Station 1

Event

CT1

NAT NAT

CT2 CT2 Station 2

Report

TT

CT1 CT1 CT1

Action

For the I/O Scanning service

Device 1

Device 2

Manager

Hub

Input

Output

CT

RT

Ethernet TCP/IP

For the Global Data service

Station 1

Top synchro

CT CT CT

NAT NAT

CT CT Station 2

Return synchro

TTTransaction time

Publication

PublicationSubscription

TT = Transaction timeCT1 = Device 1 cycle timeNAT = Network access timeCT2 = Device 2 cycle time

5/36

5

5.1


Ethernet TCP/IP network

Today, Ethernet enables distributed automation platforms to respond to: b Needs for a single communication network.b Demands for real-time performance on the factory floor.b Needs for open access to control/monitoring software using standard communication protocols and applications based on Internet technology.All these criteria are reinforced by the capacity of the Schneider offer to provide high-level services which enable the user to reduce his development and operating costs.Premium platforms are connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP network via 4 Premium processors with built-in Ethernet port links and 5 modules:b TSX P57 2623/2823/3623/4823 processors, of which 2 models have a built-in Fipio bus link (bus manager).b TSX ETY 110/210 modules, including the 2 communication profiles; TCP/IP on Ethernet (10 Mbps) and Ethway. The TSX ETY 210 model is designed specifically for use with Warm Standby architectures.b TSX ETY 110 WS module including the 2 TCP/IP profiles on Ethernet (10 Mbps) and Ethway, joined by the integrated Web server function with services at FactoryCast level.b TSX ETY 4103 including the TCP/IP profile with I/O Scanning and Global Data functionalities on 10/100 Mbps Ethernet and the integrated Web server function as a standard service.b TSX ETY 5103 module, including all TSX ETY 4103 module functions, including the integrated Web server function with services at FactoryCast level.

Architecture of Premium Ethernet TCP/IP modules

The various services are provided by Ethernet processors and modules:b Standard TCP/IP protocol enables Premium devices to communicate with:v Quantum and Momentum M1E devices using Modbus message handling,v TSX Series7 and April 5000/7000 devices via X-Way architecture using X-Way/Uni-TE/

Ethway message handling.v I/O type peripheral devices, by simple configuration via the I/O Scanning function,v PCs and Magelis IPC terminals supporting an internal browser connected to Web

FactoryCast servers integrated in the Micro, Momentum, Premium and Quantum PLCs,v third-party products using any protocol on TCP/IP courtesy of the TCP Open function.v These various services were introduced previously (see pages 5/12 to 5/31).b Ethway, which incorporates all the mechanisms of the X-Way communication architecture (X-

Way addressing system, Uni-TE message handling, COM distributed database), but on a proprietary protocol.

Nota : the TSX ETY 110/210/110 WS, TSX ETY 4103/5103 Ethernet modules for Premium PLCs ensure transparent routing of X-Way and Uni-TE messages from a TCP/IP network to an X-Way network and vice versa.

TCP/IP and Ethway profiles

LLC IEEE 802.2MAC IEEE 802.3

CSMA-CDIEEE 802.3

Uni-TECOM

X-Way addressing

LLC IEEE 802.2/MAC IEEE 802.3CSMA-CD

IEEE 802.3

IP (RFC791)

TCP (RFC793)

Uni-TE/X-WayModbus

Network

Link

Physical

Application

Presentation

Session

Transfer

7

6

4

3

2

1

5

OSI model Ethernet TCP/IP profile Ethway profile

Global Data

UDP (RFC768)

5/37

5

5.1

Description,characteristics



The TSX P57 2623/2823M and TSX P57 3623/4823M double format processors with built-in Ethernet port include the following on the front panel:1 A display unit including 5 display LEDs:v RUN display LED (green): processor operating (program execution),v ERR display LED (red): default processor or its integrated devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card),v I/O display LED (red): fault originating from another module in the station or configuration fault,v TER display LED (yellow): terminal port active,v FIP display LED (red): built-in Fipio bus active.2 Display block connected to the built-in Ethernet port including 5 display LEDs:v RUN display LED (green): Ethernet port ready,v ERR display LED (red): fault on Ethernet port.,v COL display LED (red): collision detection,v STS display LED (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics,v Two TX and RX display LEDs (yellow): transmission/reception activity.3 A RESET button which, when pressed, triggers a cold restart of the PLC.4 A female 8-way mini-DIN connector for connecting or adjusting the programming

terminal.5 A female 8-way mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral

device.6 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet network.7 A slot for a memory extension card in PCMCIA type I format.8 A slot for a communication card in PCMCIA type III format.9 A SUB-D 9-way connector (on models TSX P57 2823/4823M) for Fipio bus

manager communication.

Description of TSX P57pp23 processors with integrated Ethernet port

TSX P57 2623/3623M

1 3 2 1 3 2

6

8

54

9

7

TSX P57 2823/4823M

Characteristics of the integrated Ethernet port in TSX P57 pp23 processors

Principal characteristicsType of processors TSX P57 2623 TSX P57 2823 TSX P57 3623 TSX P57 4823

Number of inputs/outputs Discrete 1024 1024 1024 2048

Analog 80 80 128 256Application-specific channels 24 24 32 64

Fipio field bus Built-in link – yes – yes

Maximum memory capacity With PCMCIA 160 K words 160 K words 384 K words 512 K words

Configuration (10baseT/100baseTX)Number of stations Point-to-point connection (via standard RJ45 connector) to form a (10baseT/100baseTX)

star network (the stations are connected to ConneXium hubs or switches)64 stations maximum per network

Number of network connections(1)

With Premium processor - TSX P57 2623/2823M: 0- TSX P57 3623: 2 max.- TSX P57 4823: 3 max.

Web server servicesIntegrated Web server (2) Standard services - "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics

- Access to "Data editor" PLC variables and data

Transparent Factory communication servicesI/O Scanning service Number of stations 64

User interface - 2 K %MW as inputs / 2 K %MW as outputs in the "scanner" PLC- 120 words maximum per "scanned" device

Global Data service - Publication of 1 variable whose size is between 1…1024 bytes- Subscription of 1…64 variables (4 Kb max.) for the entire distribution group

Network management SNMP agent, support for standard MIB II and private MIB TF EthernetFDR function FDR server for automatic reconfiguration on replacement of a faulty module (BOOTP/DHCP

protocols)

Standard servicesTCP/IP services Uni-TE - Client/server mode

- Client/server requests of 256 bytes (synchronous mode)- Client/server requests of 1 K byte (asynchronous mode)

Modbus - Client/server mode- Synchronous requests of 256 bytes

X-Way services - X-Way inter-network routing- X-Way/Uni-Telway routing- Module diagnostics

(1) Number of network connections excluding integrated Ethernet port.(2) For the PC station, requires an Internet browser (Internet Explorer version u 5.0).

5/38

5

5.1

Descriptioncharacteristics (continued)



The TSX ETY 110/210/110 WS modules are single format modules which are installed in a rack slot of a Premium PLC station or Atrium coprocessor.

The front panel on the TSX ETY 110/210/110 WS modules comprises:

1 A display block indicating the module status.2 A standard connector for 10baseT interface (RJ45).3 A standard connector for 10base5 interface (AUI).4 Four thumbwheels for defining the station number and network number.

Description of TSX ETY 110/210/110 WS modules

1

2

3

4

Characteristics of TSX ETY 110/210/110WS modules

ConfigurationNumber of stations 10baseT Point-to-point connection (via standard RJ45 connector) to form a (10baseT) star network (the

stations are connected to ConneXium hubs or switches)64 stations maximum per network

10base5 64 stations maximum per network

Length of network 10base5 - 500 m maximum for electrical link between 2 end stations on one segment- 1,500 m max. total length for electrical link (3 segments connected by 2 repeaters)- 2,800 m max. total length for mixed electrical/fibre optic link (3 electrical segments and 1 fibre optic segment of 1,000 m connected by 1 repeater and 2 electrical/fibre optic half repeaters.)

10baseT - 1000 m max. (3,100 m with fibre optic)

Number of network connections

Per Premium processor or Atrium coprocessor

- TSX P57 1pp/2pp, TPCX 57 203: 1 max.- TSX P57 3pp, TPCX 57 353: 3 max.- TSX P57 4pp 4 max.

Web server servicesModule types TSX ETY 110/210 (1) TSX ETY 110WS

Integrated Web server (2) Standard services – - "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics- Access to "Data editor" PLC variables and data

FactoryCast services – - Alarm viewer- Graphic Data Editor- Display of user Web pages (1.4 Mb available)

Transparent Factory communication servicesNetwork management SNMP agent, support for standard MIB II and private MIB TF Ethernet

TCP Open (3) – Direct access to the TCP layer via 2 interface levels:- EFS function block library- Library of basic functions for use with C language


- 256 bytes of client/server requests (synchronous mode)- 1 K byte of client/server requests (asynchronous mode)

Modbus - Client/server mode- 256 bytes of synchronous requests

Ethway services Uni-TE - Client/server mode- 256 bytes of client/server requests (synchronous mode)- 1 K byte of client/server requests (asynchronous mode)

Common words Shared database of 256 words

Application-to-application Priority exchange of point-to-point messages (maximum 256 bytes)

X-Way services - X-Way inter-network routing- X-Way/Uni-TE routing- Module diagnostics

(1) The TSX ETY 210 module, designed for use with Warm Standby architectures, also ensures seamless addressing when making the "Normal/Help" switch, as well as architecture diagnostics and maintenance through access to the "Help" PLC.

(2) For the PC station, requires an Internet browser (Internet Explorer version u 5.0).(3) Requires the TCP Open CD-ROM supporting the TCP/IP and TLX CD TCP 42M functions

library.

5/39

5

5.1

Description,characteristics



TSX ETY 4103/5103 modules are single format modules which are installed in a rack slot of a Premium PLC station or Atrium coprocessor.

The front panel on the TSX ETY 4103/5103 module comprises:

1 A display block indicating the module status.2 A standard connector for 10baseT/100baseTX (RJ45) interface.

Description of TSX ETY 4103/5103 modules

1

2

Characteristics of TSX ETY 4103/5103 modules

Configuration (10baseT/100baseTX)Number of stations Point-to-point connection (via standard RJ45 connector) to form a (10baseT/100baseTX)

star network (the stations are connected to Transparent Factory hubs or switches)64 stations maximum per network

Length of network 10baseT 1,000 m max. (3,100 m with fibre optic)

10baseTX 412 m max. between 2 stations within the same collision domain (1)

Number of network connections

Per Premium processor or Atrium coprocessor

- TSX P57 1pp/2pp, TPCX 57 203: 1 max.- TSX P57 3pp, TPCX 57 353: 3 max.- TSX P57 4pp: 4 max.

Web server servicesModule types TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 5103

Integrated Web server (2) Standard services - "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics- Access to "Data editor" PLC variables and data

FactoryCast services – - Alarm viewer- Graphic Data Editor- Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available)

Transparent Factory communication servicesI/O Scanning service Number of stations 64

User interface - 2 K %MW as inputs/2 K %MW as outputs in the "scanner" PLC- 120 words maximum per "scanned" device

Global Data service - Publication of 1 variable between 1…1024 bytes- Subscription of 1…64 variables (4 Kb max.) for the entire distribution group

Network management SNMP agent, support for standard MIB II and private MIB TF Ethernet

TCP Open (3) – Direct access to the TCP layer via 2 interface levels:- EFS basic function block library - Library of basic functions for use with C language

FDR function FDR server for automatic reconfiguration on replacement of a faulty module (BOOTP/DHCP protocols)


- 256 bytes of client/server requests (synchronous mode)- 1 K byte of client/server requests (asynchronous mode)

Modbus - Client/server mode- 256 bytes of synchronous requests

X-Way services - X-Way inter-network routing- X-Way/Uni-Telway routing- Module diagnostics

(1) The network can be extended by using switches to separate the collision domains.(2) For the PC station, requires an Internet browser (Internet Explorer version u 5.0).(3) Requires the TCP Open CD-ROM supporting the TCP/IP and TLX CD TCP 42M functions

library.

5/40

5

5.1

References Modicon Premium automation platform 5


The TSX P57 pp23M processors comprise:b A memory extension slot (PCMCIA type I card) and a slot for a communication card (PCMCIA type III card).b Two terminal ports (female 8-way mini-DIN connector), Uni-Telway or character mode.b An Ethernet 10baseT/100baseTX port, 10/100 Mbps (RJ45 connector).

The TSX P57 processors enables program loading via the terminal port at a maximum speed of 115 Kbps (limited to 19.2 Kbps for the TSX P57 2623/2823M processors.The built-in Fipio link (bus manager) for TSX P57 2823 and TSX P 57 4823M processors accepts a maximum of 127 connection points.

Premium processors with integrated Ethernet port

I/O capacity (2) Memory capacity

Communication and services profiles

Max. no. of bus/network modules

Reference(1)

Weight

kgTSX 57-20 1024 discrete I/Os80 analog I/Os24 application-specific channels

48 K integrated words160 K words max. on PCMCIA

Uni-TE on TCP/IPModbus on TCP/IPX-WayBasic Web serverI/O ScanningGlobal DataNetwork management

1 built-in Ethernet4 AS-i buses1 third-party bus

TSX P57 2623M 0.640

64 K integrated words160 K words max. on PCMCIA


1 built-in Ethernet1 built-in Fipio4 AS-i buses1 third-party bus

TSX P57 2823M 0.680

TSX 57-30 1024 discrete I/Os128 analog I/Os32 application-specific channels

64/80 K integrated words (3)384 K words max. on PCMCIA


1 built-in Ethernet2 networks8 AS-i buses2 third-party buses

TSX P57 3623M 0.640

TSX 57-40 2048 discrete I/Os256 analog I/Os max.64 application-specific channels

96/176 K integrated words (3)512 K words max. on PCMCIA


1 built-in Ethernet1 built-in Fipio3 networks8 AS-i buses2 third-party buses

TSX P57 4823M 0.680

(1) Maximum cumulative values. The number of remote inputs/outputs via bus is not counted.(2) Product delivered with multilingual installation guide (processors and discrete inputs/outputs):

French, English, German, Spanish and Italian.(3) The second value corresponds to the built-in memory capacity when the processor is

equipped with a PCMCIA memory card.

TSX P57 2623/3623M

TSX P57 2823/4823M

5/41

5

5.1

References (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5


Premium modules for the Ethernet TCP/IP network Network modules for Premium PLCsNumber of modules per PLC

Communication/services profiles

Rate Integrated Web server

Reference Weight

kg1 for 57-10/203 for 57-304 for 57-40

Uni-TE on TC/IPModbus on TC/IPEthway/X-Way

10 Mbps No TSX ETY 110 0.370

No TSX ETY 210(1)

0.370

Uni-TE on TC/IPModbus on TC/IPEthway/X-WayNetwork managementTCP Open

10 Mbps FactoryCast service(1.4 Mb available for user Web pages)

TSX ETY 110 WS(2)

0.370

Uni-TE on TC/IPModbus on TC/IPX-WayI/O ScanningGlobal DataNetwork management

10/100 Mbps Standard service (without user Web page)

TSX ETY 4103 0.340

Uni-TE on TCP/IPModbus on TC/IPX-WayI/O ScanningGlobal DataNetwork managementTCP Open

– FactoryCast service(8 Mb available for user Web pages)

TSX ETY 5103(2)

0.340

Ethernet cards for PC-compatiblesDescription Use Supplied with Reference Weight

kgEthernet cards for PC-compatibles

PCI extension bus slot Windows 95, Windows NT 4 (SP6), Windows 2000 and Windows XP

TCC ETH 01 –

ISA extension bus slotShort format

DOS 6, OS/2 2.2 drivers,Windows 95, Windows NT4(SP6), Windows 2000 and Windows XP

TSX ETH PC 101M 0.720

X-Way drivers package for PC-compatibles

Composition, see page 6/15 1 CD-ROM See page 6/15 –

TSX ETY 110/210/110 WS

TSX ETY 4103/5103

TCC ETH 01

TSX ETH PC 101M

Accessories and connection cablesDescription Reference Weight

kgFor 10baseT/100baseTX (RJ45) interface See page 5/59 –

For 10base5 interface (AUI) See page 5/61 –

(1) Module designed for Warm Standby architectures.(2) Benefits from TCP Open services. Supplied with a CD-ROM including the FactoryCast

configuration and administration software for the integrated Web server function and documentation in English.

5/42

5

5.1


ConneXium industrial EthernetTransparent Ready

Product type Hubs

Module function Network hub for star or tree topology

Interfaces 4 10BASE-T ports 3 10BASE-T ports2 10BASE-FL ports

4 100BASE-TX ports

Connection type Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable and redundant fiber optic ring

Twisted pair cable

Connector type Shielded RJ45 Shielded RJ45 (10BASE-T)ST-BFOC (10BASE-FL)

Shielded RJ45

Operating voltage 18 to 32 VDC safe extra-low voltage (TBTS)

Terminal block 1 x 5 pin pluggable

Model 499 NEH 104 10 499 NOH 105 10 499 NEH 141 00

Pages 5/59

5/43

5

5.1

5

Switches

Network switches for communication between 2 or several collision domains

5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 2 100BASE-TX ports

5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 2 100BASE-FX ports

8 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports

Twisted pair cable and redundant fiber-optic ring

Twisted pair cables

Shielded RJ45 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) SC (100BASE-FX)

Shielded RJ45 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

19.2 to 30 VDC safe extra-low voltage (TBTS)

18 to 32 VDC safe extra-low voltage (TBTS)

1 x 3 pin pluggable 1 x 5 pin pluggable

499 NES 251 00 499 NES 171 00 499 NOS 171 00 499 NES 181 00

5/59

5/44

5

5.1



Product type Transceivers

Module function Network transceiver for line or bus topology

Interfaces 1 10BASE-T port and 1 10BASE-FL port

1 100BASE-TX port and 1 100BASE-FX port

Connection type Twisted pair cable and fiber optic cable

Connector type Shielded RJ45 (10BASE-T)ST-BFOC (10BASE-FL)

Shielded RJ45 (100BASE-TX)SC (100BASE-FX)

Operating voltage 18 to 32 VDC safe extra-low voltage

Terminal block 1 x 5 pin pluggable

Model 499 NTR 100 10 499 NTR 101 00

Pages 5/59

5/45

5

5.1

5

Bridges

Modbus bus to Ethernet network communication Modbus Plus network to Ethernet network communication

1 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port 1 serial RS 232/RS 485 port

1 10BASE-T, 1 10BASE2, 1 10BASE5, 1 Modbus Plus port

Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable and redundant fiber optic ring

Shielded RJ45 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)RJ45 (RS 232/RS 485)

Shielded RJ45 (10BASE-T)BNC (10BASE2)AUI (10BASE5)SUB-D 9 contacts (Modbus Plus)

12 or 24 VDC 110/220 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz

1 x 3 pin pluggable –

174 CEV 300 20 174 CEV 200 30

5/59

5/46

5

5.1



Product type Optical cables

Cable type Standard glass fiber optic

Preassembled connector type MT/RJ-SC duplex MT/RJ-ST duplex MT/RJ-MT/RJ duplex

Cable length 5 m (16.4 ft)

Radiation susceptibility No radiation along the cable

Agency approvals Category 5 of cabling standard EIA/TIA-568; Class D of IEC 11801/EN50173

Model 490 NOC 000 05 490 NOT 000 05 490 NOR 000 05

Pages 5/59

5/47

5

5.1

5

Electrical cables

Shielded and foiled twisted pair straight through cable Shielded and foiled twisted pair crossed over cable

RJ45 (two per cable)

2, 5, 12, 40, 80 m (6.5, 16.4, 39.4, 131.2, 262.4 ft) 5, 15, 40, 80 m (16.4, 49.2, 131.2, 262.4 ft)

Category 5 of international cabling standard EIA/TIA-568; Class D of IEC 11801/EN50173; Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH); flame retardant of NFC32 070 #1 (C2) and CEI 322/1

UL, CSA 22.1 and NFPA 70 Category 5 of international cabling standard EIA/TIA-568; Class D of IEC 11801/EN50173; Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH); flame retardant of NFC32 070 #1 (C2) and CEI 322/1

UL, CSA 22.1 and NFPA 70

490 NTW 000 pp 490 NTW 000 ppU 490 NTC 000 pp 490 NTW 000 ppU

5/59

5/48

5

5.1

Presentation,characteristics


ConneXium wiring systemTransparent Ready, Ethernet infrastructure

Industrial Ethernet networks can use various standards. In each case, a set of rules must be respected when determining what topology will be produced and with what performance level.

The ConneXium offer comprises a complete family of industrial products used to build a network architecture: hubs, switches, transceivers and cables. Wiring rules pertaining to the ConneXium offer are described on pages 5/48 to 5/53.

(1) SFTP cables (Shielded and Foiled Twisted Pair) are available in 2 versions:v UL 1581 vertical tray, NFC 32070 level C1, IEC 332-1.v Reaction to fire compliant with NFC 32 070 # class C2 and IEC 332-1, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) and UL 1581 VW1.

(2) The mutimode fiber is Low Smoke Zero Halogen as per HD.624-7, with reaction to fire complying with NFC 32 070 # class C2 and IEC 332-1.

The Ethernet 802.3 Link Layer is based on a collision detection mechanism (CSMA CD). Each station (DTE, Data Terminal Equipment) sends its data when necessary and verifies if the frame has been correctly propagated. If a collision with a frame sent by another station is detected, the station repeats the message after a timeout, which increases the network load and thus the probability that another collision will occur.

The transceivers or hubs (repeaters) are used to regenerate the signal once the physical limits of the medium have been reached. They also propagate collisions, if there are any.

Because of the transmission time needed to send data from one end of the network to the other, a maximum network length exists, beyond which collisions might not be detected by the sender. For this reason, and for each technology, a network size limit has been set. This is described as the "maximum network diameter" within a same collision domain.

Presentation

CharacteristicsGeneral characteristics for industrial Ethernet standardsStandard Date rate

(Mbps)Medium Type of connector Useable bandwidth

(on automation network)

Advantages

10BASE5 10 Thick coaxial cable (yellow)

15-way SUB-D (AUI) 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Cost, Ethway compatibility

10BASE-T 10 Twisted shielded pair (SFTP) (1)

RJ45 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Cost

10BASE-FL 10 Fibre optic (generally 62.5/125 multimode 1300 µm (2)

ST or MT-RJ 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Immunity, confidentiality

100BASE-TX 100 Shielded twisted pair (SFTP)

RJ45 40 %, i.e. 40 Kbit/s Data rate (x 50)

100BASE-FX 100 Fibre optics SC or MT-RJ 40 %, i.e. 40 Kbit/s Immunity

Installation principles

Presentation:page 5/48

Installation rules:pages 5/48 to 5/53

5/49

5

5.1

Installation rules Modicon Premium automation platform 5


Various architectures may exist, depending on each standard:

b Line or bus topology, using transceivers.b Star network topology, using hubs.b Tree network topology, using hubs.

Transceivers are also used for transmitting signals between 2 dissimilar media such as fiber optic and twisted pair cables.In addition, the hubs (or concentrators) are also used to transmit signals among several media (ports). The transceivers and hubs are “plug and play” devices.

Note: in the information that follows, the terms "hubs" and "repeaters" are used interchangeably.

Depending on the Ethernet standard employed, the network size can vary. To define the correct architecture, the 2 constraints of maximum segment length and maximum network diameter must be respected. The Schneider ConneXium performances make it possible, in some situations, to surpass the limits of the 802.3 standard.

Architectures in a same collision domain

10BASE5 10BASE-T, 10BASE-F, 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX

10BASE-T, 10BASE-F, 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX

DTE

DTEDTE

Line or bus topology

Transceiver

DTE DTE

DTE DTE

Star topology

Hub

DTE DTE

Tree topology

Hub

Rule 1: to respect the "maximum network diameter" within a same collision domain

Ethernet standard

Maximum segment length (physical limit)

Maximum network diameter (limited by collisions)

Type According to standard 802.3

With ConneXium products

According to standard 802.3

With ConneXium products

10BASE5 500 m(50 m for a drop cable)

1,800 m(2,800 m with fiber optic segment)

10BASE-T 100 m 500 m 1,000 m

10BASE-FL or mixed (FL and T)

2,000 m 3,100 m 2,500 m 3,100 m

100BASE-TX 100 m 200 m

100BASE-FX in Half Duplex

412 m 228 m or 412 m between 2 DTE devices

100BASE-FX in Full Duplex

2,000 m 3,000 m 228 m or 412 m between 2 DTE devices



5/50

5

5.1

Installation rules (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5


Between 2 DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) devices, a maximum of 2 repeaters or 1 repeater with 2 half-repeaters (half-repeaters ensure transmission between a copper and a fiber optic medium):b Drop cable, 50 m length max.,b One segment, 500 m length max.,b Between 2 fiber optic half-repeaters, 1000 m length max.

Examples:b All copper, 1,800 m length max.

b Mixed copper/fiber optic, 2,800 m length max.

Between 2 DTE devices, a maximum of 5 segments and 4 hubs (or repeaters).

b Topology of 5 segments and 4 hubs (or repeaters): each 10BASE-FL segment must have a length of < 500 m.b Topology of 4 segments and 3 hubs (or repeaters): the 10BASE-FL inter-repeater segments must have a length of < 1,000 m, and the 10BASE-FL segments between hub and DTE devices must have a length of < 400 m.Examples:In the following 2 topologies, distances are usually given for the 10BASE-T standard, with distances for the 10BASE-F standard within parentheses.

Rule 2: for each technology, respect the following rules within the same collision domain10BASE5

DTE DTE

Segment Segment Segment

Hub/repeater Hub/repeater

500 m 500 m 500 m

50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m

DTE DTE

Segment Segment Segment

Hub/repeater Half-repeater Half-repeater

500 m 500 m 500 m

1,000 m

50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m

10BASE-T/10BASE-F

Maximum 500 m in 10BASE-T, 2,500 m in 10BASE-F.

Maximum 400 m in 100BASE-TX, 2,800 m in 100BASE-FX

DTE DTE



100 m (500 m)

100 m (500 m)

100 m (500 m)

100 m (500 m)

100 m (500 m)

DTE DTE

Hub/repeater


100 m (400 m)100 m (400 m)

100 m(1,000 m)

100 m(1,000 m)



5/51

5

5.1



This Ethernet standard defines 2 classes of hubs (or repeaters):

b Class 1 hubs: Maximum of 1 hub in a same collision domain.b Class 2 hubs (for ConneXium repeaters): Maximum of 2 hubs in a same collision domain.

Examples:

In the following 4 topologies, distances are usually given for the 100BASE-TX standard, with distances for the 100BASE-FX standard within parentheses.

100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX

200 m max. in 100BASE-TX, 300 m in mixed 320 m max. in 100BASE-FX

205 m max. in 100BASE-TX, 216 m in mixed

228 m max. in 100BASE-FX

DTE DTE

Class 1 hub/repeater

100 m 100 m(200 m)

DTE DTE

Class 1 hub/repeater

160 m 160 m

DTE DTE 5 m100 m 100 m

(111 m)

Class 2 hub/repeater Class 2 hub/repeater

DTE DTE

Class 2 hub/repeater Class 2 hub/repeater

100 m 100 m 28 m



5/52

5

5.1



Switched devices enable the limits of the above-described architectures to be increased. Switches are used for communicating between 2 or more collision domains. Communication for the upper layers is guaranteed among the different ports and collisions at the link layer level are not propagated (filtering).

Switches are “plug and play” devices that can be remotely administered via SNMP or HTTP. They essentially contribute 2 functions:

b Extension of the architecture to surpass the "maximum network diameter".b Improvement of performance by a better allocation of bandwidth due to reduction in collisions and network load. In addition, switches in the ConneXium range support multicast filtering via the standard GARP/GMRP protocol, which optimizes performances of the Global Data service. With these products, multicast frames are transmitted only on switch ports where stations subscribing to the Global Data service are connected. ConneXium switches also support the Faulty Device Replacement (FDR) service, as well as the Schneider Electric Transparent Ready private MIB for managing devices via the SNMP network management protocol.

b Switches are DTE devices that can be connected to hubs or directly connected to devices. Rules 1 and 2, mentioned previously, thus apply.b When 2 switches are connected, the line can be in Full Duplex, which removes the risk of collisions and allows the effective data rate to be doubled. The rules related to the collision domain thus do not apply, and only those imposed by the physical limits should be observed.For example, 2 switches may be connected on their 100BASE-FX ports via a fiber optic cable 3,000 m in length.

Examples:

Maximum distances:b 100BASE-TX: 100 m between 2 switches. b 100BASE-FX: 2,000 m between 2 switches, 3,000 m with ConneXium switches and up to 40 km using monomode optical fiber (outside supply).

Architectures with several collision domains

Rule 3: to be respected when switches are used

Switch used to isolate several collision domains (reduction of the network load in order to improve performance).

Switches used to extend the architecture to provide a link between 2 buildings, for example.

DTE

DTEDTE

DTE DTE

DTE DTE

DTE DTE

Collision domain 1 Collision domain 2

Collision domain 3

Switch

DTE

DTEDTE

DTE DTE

DTE DTE

DTE DTE

DTE

DTEDTE

DTE DTE

DTE DTE

DTE DTE

Switch 1 Switch 2

Site 1 Site 2



5/53

5

5.1



In general, routers are used at the Enterprise's network level, in order to link different units or sites. They are sometimes associated with security functions such as firewalls for filtering remote access.

A router must be configured to enable it to recognize where messages must be routed. Routing mechanisms are based on the IP address. Stations are grouped on the same subnet according to their IP addresses and their subnet mask.

Every message addressed to a remote network will be transmitted to the router, which ensures routing to the correct destination.

All of our Ethernet modules can be configured with a default gateway address and a subnet mask, complying with the IP standard.

On the factory floor level, a switch is less expensive than a router, performs better, and is easier to install ("plug and play").

The architectures previously described can be created to have greater availability by using hubs or specific switches, linked to redundant copper or fiber optic rings. If the ring is broken, communication is seamlessly restored in less than 500 ms.These products are available with the possibility to create a redundant power supply.

Associated with the Warm or Hot Standby offers, they guarantee maximum availability of the automation installations.

The various possible redundant topologies are:

1 10 Mbps copper or fiber optic redundant ring topology, with redundant hubs.

2 100 Mbps fiber optic ring redundant topology with redundant switches: maximum commutation time from the "normal" line to the "emergency" line of 500 ms for a redundant ring with 50 switches.

3 100 Mbps redundant fiber optic multiple ring topology with redundant switches: maximum commutation time from the "normal" line to the "emergency" line of 500 ms.

Routers

Redundancy

1 2 3

DTEDTE

DTEDTE DTE DTE

10 Mbps copper or fiber optic redundant ring

Redundant hubs

DTE

DTEDTE

DTE DTE

DTE

DTEDTE

DTE DTE

DTE DTE

100 Mbps fiber optic ring

Redundant switches

1,100 Mbps fiber optic ring

Fiber optic ring 2 Fiber optic ring 3



5/54

5

5.1


ConneXium industrial Ethernet

As part of its Transparent Ready family of products, Schneider Electric offers a range of industrially hardened network hubs, switches, transceivers, bridges, and cables. These Ethernet-standard communication components enable you to integrate Ethernet solutions from the device level to the control network, and beyond to the corporate intranet. Each ConneXium Industrial Ethernet product is designed with compliance to Ethernet standards, and with third-party compatibility in mind.

b ConneXium Hubs connect devices and provide segments to shared communication among PLCs. TF Hubs are low-cost solutions which enable communications with devices, such as Momentum I/O, to Ethernet networks.

b ConneXium Switches segment the application in different zones, groups, or cells/machines. The proper placement of switches can increase network performance by relieving network congestion. TF switches implement SNMP protocol, allowing standard network management tools to monitor and diagnose the network, and thus are a key architectural component for real-time and deterministic network communication.

b ConneXium Transceivers provide connections to fiber optic networks in areas of high electromagnetic interference. The use of multiple transceivers enables long distances between process areas.

b ConneXium Bridges enable Modbus to Ethernet and Modbus Plus to Ethernet communications, with multiple ports allowing flexibility among network components.

b ConneXium Cables connect each automation device to the attached hub, switch, transceiver, or bridge. Cables are available in fiber optic and twisted pair options, with a wide variety of connectors and cable lengths.

All Ethernet cabling system components are built to rigorous industrial standards, and are designed to perform in harsh environments. ConneXium Switches and Hubs support a high level of resilience. Their scalable redundant features - from single to double ring structure - make it easy to build the kind of fault-tolerant network that fits the specific requirements of your environment.

Presentation

Optical loop

Remote location

Hub

Hub

Switch

Optical redundant network 200 Mbit/s full duplex

Switch Switch Hub

Fiber optic

Transceiver

Momentum I/O

Transceiver

Hub Hub

Premium

QuantumTSX Micro

Momentum I/O

Quantum

Magelis

Characteristics:pages 5/55 to 5/58

References:page 5/59

5/55

5

5.1



Characteristics of hubsMechanical characteristicsModels 499 NEH 104 10 499 NEH 141 00 499 NOH 105 10

Operating temperature ° C (F) 0...60 (32...140)

Relative humidity 10...95 % (non-condensing)

Dimensions (W x H x D) mm (in)

40 x 125 x 80 (1.58 x 4.92 x 3.15)

47 x 135 x 111 (1.85 x 5.31 x 4.37)

80 x 140 x 80 (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.15)

Weight g (Lb) 520 (1.2) 240 (0.529) 900 (2)

Enclosure IP 30 IP 20 IP 30

Agency approvals and compliance cUL 1950 ; FM 3810 ; FM 3611 Class 1, Div. 2; e ; Germanischer Lloyd ; IEC 61131 2

Electrical characteristicsModels 499 NEH 104 10 499 NEH 141 00 499 NOH 105 10

Technology Ethernet 10 Mbit/s Ethernet 100 Mbit/s, class 2 Ethernet 10 Mbit/s

Interfaces 4 10BASE-T ports withRJ45 shielded connectors

4 100BASE-TX ports withRJ45 shielded connectors

- 3 10BASE-T ports with RJ45 shielded connectors- 2 10BASE-FL ports with BFOC connectors

Connection type Twisted pair cable – Twisted pair cables or redundant fiber optic ring

Operating voltage VDC 18...32, safety low voltage

Terminal block 1 x 5-pin, pluggable

Redundancy Power supply Power supply and optical ring

Power consumption at 24 VDC mA 80 typical, 130 maximum

210 typical, 270 maximum

160 typical, 350 maximum

Maximum range m (ft) Twisted pair line length, max 100 (max 330) Fiber optic: max 3100 (max 10.000)Twisted pair: max 100 (max 330)

Number of hubs cascaded 4 max 2 max 4 max

in a ring – 11 max

Fault indicator Power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact 1 A max. under c 24 V)

LED indicators P1, P2 power, DA/STAT, data collision, segmentation, and link status per port


5/56

5

5.1



Characteristics of switchesMechanical characteristicsModels 499 NES 181 00 499 NES 171 00 499 NOS 171 00 499 NES 251 00

Operating temperature ° C (F) 0…60 (32...140) 0...50 (32...122) 0…60 (32...140) (- 20…85 on storage)

Relative humidity 10…95 % (non-condensing)

Dimensions W x H x D mm (in)

47 x 135 x 111 110 x 131 x 111 43 x 143,8 x 75,2 (mounting on panel or DIN rail )

Weight g (Lb) 230 850 190

Enclosure IP 20

Agency approvals and compliance cUl 1950, cUL 308 ; cUL 1604 ; FM 3810 Classe 1, Div.2 ; Germanischer Lloyd ; IEC 61131 2, e

UL 508, CSA 1010, 89/336/EEC, 73/23 EEC (EN 61131 2)

Electrical characteristicsModels 499 NES 181 00 499 NES 171 00 499 NOS 171 00 499 NES 251 00

Technology Ethernet 10 Mbit/s and Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

Interfaces - 8 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports with shielded RJ45 connectors

- 5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports with shielded RJ45 connectors- 2 100BASE-TX ports with RJ45 connectors

- 5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports with shielded RJ45 connectors2 100BASE-FX ports with SC connectors

- 5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports with shielded RJ45 connectors

Connection type Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cables and redundant fiber optic ring

Twisted pair cable

Operating voltage VDC 18...32, safety low voltage 19,2…30, safety low voltage

Terminal block 1 x 5 contacts 1 x 3 contacts

Power consumption at 24 VDC mA 125 typical290 max

800 max 100 (120 to 19,2 V)

Redundancy - Power supply - Power supply- Optical and/or copper ring structure- Fast media redundancy < 0.3 s- Redundant manager

–

Maximum range m (ft) 100 Twisted pair line length, max 100 (max 330)

Fiber optic: 3100 maxiTwisted pair: 100 maxi

100

Number of hubs cascaded – 2 max

in a ring – Maximum 50 @ 100 Mbit/s –

Fault indicator Power supply failure, permanent fault in switch; faulty link status of TP port; at least one port has auto-partitioned (volt-free contact 1 A max. under c 24 V), self-test error, ring monitoring not possible

–

LED indicators P1, P2 power, redundancy manager, data exchange/port Power: OK power supply, LINK/Active: Ethernet link, 100MB: self commutable data rate

References: page 5/59

5/57

5

5.1



Characteristics of transceiversMechanical characteristicsModels 499 NTR 100 10 499 NTR 101 00

Operating temperature ° C (F) 0...60 (32...140)

Relative humidity 10...95 % (non-condensing)

Dimensions (W x H x D) mm (in)

40 x 134 x 80 (1.58 x 5.28 x 3.15)

47 x 135 x 111(1.9 x 5.3 x 4.4)

Enclosure IP 30 IP 20

Agency approvals and compliance cUL 1950 ; FM 3810 Class 1, Div. 2 ; e ; Germanischer Lloyd ; IEC 61131 2

cUL 1950 ; cUL 508 ; cUL 1604 ; FM 3810 Class 1, Div. 2 ; e ; Germanischer Lloyd ; IEC 61131 2

Electrical characteristicsModels 499 NTR 100 10 499 NTR 101 00

Technology Ethernet 10 Mbit/s Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

Interfaces 1 10BASE-T port with shielded RJ45 connector1 10BASE-FL port with BFOC connector

1 100BASE-TX port with shielded RJ45 connector1 100BASE-FX ports with SC connector

Connection type Twisted pair cable and fiber optic Ethernet cable

Operating voltage VDC 18...32, safety low voltage

Terminal block 1 x 5-pin, pluggable

Power consumption at 24 VDC mA 80 typical100 maximum

160 typical190 maximum

Redundancy Power supply

Maximum range m (ft) 10BASE-T 100 (328)10BASE-FL 3100 (1070)

10BASE-TX 100 (328)10BASE-FX 3100 (1070)

Link budget dB 11.5 db for 50/125 and 62.5/125 µm fiber 8 db for 50/125 µm fiber, 11 db for 62.5/125 µm fiber

LED indicators P1, P2 power, redundancy manager, data exchange/port


5/58

5

5.1



Characteristiques of bridgesMechanical characteristicsType of bridges 174 CEV 200 30 174 CEV 300 20

Operating temperature °C 0…50 0…60

Relative humidity 10…95 % (non-condensing) 20…90% (non-condensing)

Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 122 x 229 x 248 35 x 95 x 60

Weight g 4263 500

Enclosure IP 20

Agency approvals and compliance UL, CSA, e

Electrical characteristicsType of modules 174 CEV 200 30 174 CEV 300 20

Networks link Modbus Plus to Ethernet Modbus to Ethernet

Technology Ethernet 10 Mbit/s

Interfaces - 1 10BASE-T port with shielded RJ45 connector; 10BASE2 (type BNC) ; 10BASE5 (type AUI)- 1 dual/simple pair cable Modbus Plus

- 1 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port with shielded RJ45 connector- 1 RS 232/RS 485 serial port with shielded RJ45 connector

Connection type 1 RJ45, AUI, BNC cable Twisted pair blinded cable

Operating power V 110/220 AC (- 15 %/10 %), 47…63 Hz 24 DC

Power consumption 1 A typical 125 mA max

Redundancy – Power supply

Max. length of segments m 10BASE-T: 10010BASE2: 10010BASE5: 100Modbus Plus: 450

10BASE-T: 100


5/59

5

5.1



References Industrial ConneXiumDescription Type of Ethernet network Available ports Reference Weight

kgHubs 10 Mbit/s 8 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 499 NES 181 00 1,450

4 10BASE-T ports 499 NEH 104 10 0,520

3 10BASE-T ports 2 10BASEFL ports

499 NOH 105 10 0,900

100 Mbit/s 4 100BASE-TX ports 499 NEH 141 00 0,520

Switches 10/100 Mbit/s 5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 499 NES 251 00 0,190

5 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports and 2 100BASE-TX ports

499 NES 171 00 1,450

5 100BASE-TX ports and 2 100BASE-FX ports

499 NOS 171 00 1,450

Tranceivers 10 Mbit/s 1 10BASE-T port and 1 10BASE-FL port

499 NTR 100 10 0,520

100 Mbit/s 1 100BASE-TX port and 1 100BASE-FX port

499 NTR 101 00 0,520

Description Type of connection Available ports Reference Weightkg

Bridges Modbus Plus/Ethernet (dual/simple pair Modbus)

1 10BASE-T (type RJ45) port or 10BASE2 (type BNC) or 10BASE5 (type AUI)

174 CEV 200 30 4,260

Modbus/Ethernet 1 10BASE-T/10BASE-TX port (type RJ45)

174 CEV 300 20 0,500

Accessoires de raccordementDescription Utilisation Ports Ethernet disponibles Reference Weight

kgMini transceiver For connecting a10BASE-5

interface device (2) to a 10BASE-T Ethernet network segment (twisted pair)

1 10BASE-5 (type AUI) port and 1 10BASE-T (type RJ 45) port

TSX ETH NTR1 –

Câbles de raccordementDescription Preformed at each end Length Reference Weight

kgShielded and foil twisted pair cord cable

2 connectors RJ45 type For connection to DTE terminal

2 m 490 NTW 000 02 (1)

–

5 m 490 NTW 000 05(1)

–

12 m 490 NTW 000 12(1)

–

40 m 490 NTW 000 40(1)

–

80 m 490 NTW 000 80(1)

–

Shielded and foil twisted pair crossed cord cable

2 connectors RJ45 type For connection between hubs, switches and transceivers

5 m 490 NTC 000 05(1)

–

15 m 490 NTC 000 15(1)

–

40 m 490 NTC 000 40(1)

–

80 m 490 NTC 000 80(1)

–

Fiber optic cable for terminal equipment to optical cross connecting bay

1 connector SC type and 1 connector MT/RJ

5 m 490 NOC 000 05 –

1 connector ST type (BFOC) and 1 connector MT/RJ

5 m 490 NOT 000 05 –

2 connectors MT/RJ type 5 m 490 NOR 000 05 –

(1) Category 5 of the EIA/TIA-568 international wiring-standard, class D of IEC 11801/EN50173 approved cables. Add the letter U to the end of the reference for CSA 22.1, NFPA 70 and UL approved cables.

(2) For example, a TSX Series 7 PLC equipped with a TSX ETH 107 Ethernet module.

499 NEH 104 10

499 NES 251 00

499 NES 171 00

499 NTR 100 10

174 CEV 300 10

490 NTW 000pp

490 NOC 000 0p


5/60

5

5.1

Wiring system Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by 10BASE5 interface (AUI)

TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules can take an AUI connector which enables direct connection to an Ethernet 10BASE5 segment with the accessories and cables described below.

1 TSX ETH CA pp0 trunk cable, triaxial cable (50 Ω coaxial with shielding) 1 male N type connector to be fitted to each end.TSX ETH CD 025 trunk cable, triaxial cable equipped with N type connectors, length 2.5 m. Corresponds to minimum length between 2 TSX ETH ACC 2 transceivers.

2 TSX ETY CB 0pp drop cable, 4 shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface (a straight connector and an elbow connector).

3 TSX ETY CC 0pp drop cable, 4 shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface (two straight connectors).

4 TSX ETH ACC 2 transceiver, AUI interface. Enables a device to be connected to the Ethway network (obligatory when connecting two modules in point-to-point).

5 TSX ETH ACC 3 male N type connector for trunk cable.6 TSX ETH ACC 4 female/female adaptor for extension of trunk cable.7 TSX ETH ACC 5 (50 Ω) line terminator (includes an isolated terminator and a non

isolated terminator which must be connected to the installation grounding network. One assembly per segment is required).

8 Hubs with 8 RJ45 ports /1 AUI port. TSX ETH 4102/5102 Ethernet modules have only one RJ45 connector. They can, however, be connected to an Ethernet 10BASE5 network (twisted pair) by using the hub accessory TSX ETH NEH 8 which has eight 10BASE-T ports (RJ45) and one 10BASE5 port (AUI) connected to a transceiver 2 TSX ETH ACC 2.

Wiring system

Connection by 10BASE5 interface (AUI)

2

5 6 41 57

2

55 5

1 57 5 555

3

4

8

TSX ETY 110/110WS

TSX ETY 110/110WS

TSX ETY 410/5101

Mixed 10BASE5 (AUI)/10BASE-T (RJ45) connection

Wiring system:page 5/60

5/61

5

5.1


Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by 10BASE5 interface (AUI)

AUI interface accessories for connecting to the Ethernet networkDescription Use No

(1)Order in multiples of

Unit reference Weightkg

Ethernet transceiver Access point to any network

4 1 TSX ETH ACC 2 0.765

Hub Can be used to connect 8 twisted pair (RJ45) Ethernet stations on a 10BASE5 (AUI) network

8 1 TSX ETH NEH 8 –

Connector for trunk cable

Must be fitted to both ends of cable segment on trunk cable

5 10 TSX ETH ACC 3 0.050

Female/female adaptor

Extension of 2 cable segments on trunk cable

6 10 TSX ETH ACC 4 0.050

Line terminator kit Impedance adaptor 7 1 TSX ETH ACC 5 0.070

Ethernet network connecting cablesDescription Connectors No

(1)Length Reference Weight

kgTrunk cables (radius curvature min. 500mm)

2 type N 1 2.5 m TSX ETH CD 025 0.840

To be equipped with 2 TSX ETH ACC 3 male N type connectors

1 23.4 m TSX ETH CA 020 1.650

117 m TSX ETH CA 100 5.600

210.6 m TSX ETH CA 200 8.300

Drop cables(radius curvature min. 65mm)

15-way, SUB-D1 straight, 1 elbow (module side)

2 5 m TSX ETY CB 005 0.510

10 m TSX ETY CB 010 0.980

20 m TSX ETY CB 020 1.820

15-way, SUB-D, 2 straight (for FTX 517 or PC compatible connection)

3 5 m TSX ETH CC 005 0.510

10 m TSX ETH CC 010 0.980

20 m TSX ETH CC 020 1.820

Description Use Reference(2)

Massekg

Ethernet 10BASE5 installation kit

Fitting TSX ETH ACC 3 on trunk cable TSX ETH ACC 10M 4.800

(1) See page 5/60 for key.(2) The letter M at the end of a reference indicates that the product is supplied with documentation

in English and in French.

TSX ETH ACC 2

TSX ETH NEH 8


5/62

5

5.2


CANopen machine bus

Originally used in the automotive industry, CAN is increasingly used in general industry. Several fieldbuses based on CAN lower layers and components are available. The CANopen machine bus conforms to the ISO 11898 international standard, promoted by the CAN In Automation association, which consists of users and manufacturers and offers an excellent assurance of open access and interoperability due to its standardised devices and communication profiles.

The CANopen bus is a multimaster bus which ensures reliable deterministic access to realtime data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based on broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, which ensures optimum use of the passband. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave parameters.

The bus uses a double shielded twisted pair, on which 127 devices maximum are connected by daisy chaining. The variable data rate between 20 Kbps and 1 Mbps depends on the length of the bus (between 30 and 5000 m). Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line terminator.

The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following characteristics:b Open bus system.b Data exchanges in real-time without overloading the protocol.b Modular design allowing modification of size.b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices.b Standardised configuration of networks.b Access to all device parameters.b Synchronisation and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled processes (short system response time).b Interoperability between numerous international manufacturers.

Presentation

FTB 1CN FTB 1CN

Tego PowerTeSys model U

ATV 38ATV 58/58F

From 1 to 127 slaves

Premium

TSX Micro

CANopen bus

Advantys STB

Lexium MHD

Twin Line TLC

Description:page 5/63

Characteristics:page 5/64


5/63

5

5.2

Connectable devices,description


CANopen machine bus

The TSX CPP 110 module performs the role of the master on the CANopen bus, and other Telemecanique devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are:b TeSys model U starter-controllers.b TeSys model d using the Tego Power installation assistance system.b Advantys STB distributed I/O.b Advantys FTB, IP 67 monobloc I/O splitter boxes.b Advantys FTM, IP 67 modular I/O splitter boxes.b Altivar 31, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.18…15 kW.b Altivar 58, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.37…75 kW.b Altivar 58F, variable speed drives with flux vector control for asynchronous motors 0.75…55 kW.b Twin Line TLC servodrives for brushless motors 3…16 A.b Lexium MHDA servodrives for brushless motors 1.5…70 A.

Are also compatible:b Any third-party device which conforms to the CANopen standard profile.b Any CAN device which uses CAN V2.0B identifiers on the ISO 11898 physical layer.The TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card supports the V4.02 CANopen standard with in particular the heartbeat network management.

The Modicon TSX Micro/Premium platforms connect to the CANopen bus by means of the TSX CPP 110 type III PCMCIA card inserted in the processor or coprocessor communication port slot.

The TSX CPP 110 machine bus CANopen set comprises:1 A PCMCIA card, type III with fixing screws.2 A tap junction equipped with one 9-way SUB-D connector for connecting the

CANopen bus.3 A connection cable length 0.5 m, interdependent of the PCMCIA card and the tap

junction.

Connectable devices

Advantys FTB

Twin Line TLCAltivar ATV 31

TeSys model U

Example of connectable devices on the CANopen bus

Description

TSX CPP 110

1

2

3




5/64

5

5.2


CANopen machine bus

The CANopen bus is configured using dedicated SyCon (1) software, which should be ordered separately, reference SYS SPU LFp CD28M. This software is used:b To describe all devices connected on the bus.b To generate the “.CO” file including the informations relating to the devices connected. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software.

If the configuration file is too large in relation to the TSX Micro/Premium processor capacity (see characteristics table), it is possible to load the master configuration directly by inserting the TSX CPP 110 card in a PCMCIA port (type III) on the PC on which SyCon software has been installed.

In PL7, it is possible to configure the CANopen bus card so that the PLC processor/TSX CPP 110 card exchanges are executed at the same rate as the master task or the fast task. The process data exchanged with the slaves can be accessed by %MW standard words, the number of which depends on the type of processor and the task in which the module has been declared. PL7 standard function blocks are used to define the device parameters.

Nota : In addition to supporting the CANopen protocol which uses V2.0A standard CAN identifiers on 11 bits, the card enables direct access to the CAN link layer via CAN V2.0B identifiers on 29 bits, used by the majority of CAN devices. In certain applications this enables simultaneous control of CANopen devices and dedicated CAN products.

(1) The SyCon field bus configurator software also makes it possible to describre the I/O configuration of Profibus DP bus for Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum platforms and the I/O configuration of INTERBUS bus for Modicon Quantum platform.

(1) This size can be exceeded if the configuration is loaded in the memory of CANopen PCMCIA card via the SyCon software.

Software setup

CharacteristicsType of bus CANopen

Structure Type Industrial bus

Physical interface ISO 11898Topology Devices linked by daisy-chainingAccess method CSMA/CA, multimaster, producer/consumer, prioity information

Transmission Data rate 20 Kbit/s…1 Mbit/s depending on the length of bus

Medium Double shielded twisted pair

Physical configuration

Number of devices 127 max.Length of bus according to data rate 1 Mbit/s 800 Kbit/s 500 Kbit/s 250 Kbit/s 125 Kbit/s 50 Kbit/s 20 Kbit/s

m 20 45 100 250 500 1000 2500

Segments Number 5 maxi (4 repeaters)No. of devices per segment

64 devices 32 devices 16 devices

Max. length of segment

m 170 190 210

Equivalent length of a repeater

m 15

Software configuration Micro TSX 3721 001/10122 001/101

Premium TSX P57 and Atrium T PCX 57103 M 2p3M/

2p23M3p3M/ 363M

453M4823M

Size of configuration data (1) Ko 0…8 0…12 16 32 64

Max. size of CANopen I/O data

Master task words 256 %MW 384 %MW 512 %MW 1024 %MW 3584 %MWFast task words 32 %MW 48 %MW 64 %MW 128 %MW 256 %MW




Example of SyCon configuration devices screen

5/65

5

5.2


CANopen machine bus

The SyCon software is the configurator for machine bus and field bus of Telemecanique. It supports the buses: b CANopen for TSX Micro et Premium platforms.b Profibus DP for Premium et Quantum platforms.b INTERBUS for Quantum platform.

The SyCon tool includes also the device description for Telemecanique I/O modules.

(1) Unauthorized on TSX P57 153M Premium processor.(1) A software kit of single type (1 station) including PL7 Micro et Sycon softwares is also

available, see page 6/18.

ReferencesCANopen machine bus set

TSX CPP 110

Description Services No. of module per PLC/PC

Use Reference Weightkg

CANopen master V4.02 PCMCIA card (type III)

- PDO cyclic exchanges - CMS message handling (SDO)- management of bus operating modes

1 on Micro TSX 37 21/221 on Premium TSX P57 (1)1 on Atrium TPCX

Supplied with a tap junction and cable length 0.5 m

TSX CPP 110 0.230

Sycon configuration softwares

Description Type Reference Weightkg

SyCon V2.8 configuration software licenses (2)

Single (1station) SYS SPU LFU CD28M –

Group (3 stations) SYS SPU LFG CD28M –Team (10 stations) SYS SPU LFT CD28M –

Site (up to 10 stations) SYS SPU LFF CD28M –

SyCon V2.8 configuration software update

Single (1station) SYS SPU LRU CD28M –

SyCon V2.8 configuration software upgrade for previous version

Group (3 stations) SYS SPU LUG CD28M –Team (10 stations) SYS SPU LUT CD28M –

Site (up to 10 stations) SYS SPU LUF CD28M –




5/66

5

5.2

Presentation,description


TSX SAY master modules for AS-Interface bus

TSX SAY 100/1000 master modules for the AS-Interface bus enable the Premium PLC to act as the AS-Interface bus master.

The bus comprises a master station (Premium PLC) and slave stations. The master that supports the AS-Interface profile successively interrogates the devices connected on the AS-Interfacenterface bus and stores the data (status of sensor/actuators, operational status of devices) in the PLC memory. Communication management on the AS-Interfacenterface bus is completely transparent with regard to the PLC application program. Two types of AS-Interfacenterface profile are supported according to the type of master Premium module:

b TSX SAY 100: master module with the AS-Interfacenterface M2 profile (AS-Interfacenterface V1) managing only discrete slave devices (maximum of 31 devices).b TSX SAY 1000: master module with the AS-Interface M2E profile (AS-Interface V2) managing discrete slave devices (a maximum of 62 devices organized in 2 banks, A/B, with 31 addresses each), analog devices (a maximum of 31 devices in bank A) and safety interfaces (a maximum of 31 devices in bank A).

The maximum number of TSX SAY 100/1000 modules per PLC station is either 2,4, or 8, depending on the type of processor installed (see page 5/67).An AS-Interface power supply must be used for powering the various devices on the bus. Ideally, this PSU should be situated nearest to the stations with the largest power demands.

TSX SAY 100/1000 AS-Interface bus master modules are standard format modules. Modules of this format are designed to slot into any position on the Premium PLC rack like any Input/Output module or application-specific module. The modules feature, on the front panel:

2 A display unit comprising 4 indicator lamps showing the module operating modes:v RUN indicator lamp (green): module operating,v ERR indicator lamp (red): module fault,v COM indicator lamp with TSX SAY 100 (blinking green): AS-Interface bus communication active,v A/B indicator lamp with TSX SAY 1000 (green): display of group of 32 slaves,v I/O indicator lamp (red): AS-Interface bus I/O fault.3 A display unit comprising 32 indicator lamps for diagnostics of the AS-Interface

bus and of each slave connected to the bus depending on the A/B push button selected. (1).

4 Two or three indicator lamps specific to the module: See diagnostics on page 5/67.

5 Two push buttons: See diagnostics on page 5/67.6 One 3-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface bus (female

screw connector supplied).

(1) For the TSX SAY 1000 module, depending on the selection made with the A/B push button, the first 31 slaves (standard address settings) or the last 31 slaves (extended address settings with AS-Interface V2) are displayed.

Presentation

T

Sensors

Motor starter TSX SUP A02 power supply

XBL keyboard

Intelligent sensors

XAL button box

Premium + TSX SAY 100/1000

AS-Interface bus

XVA column

Description1

3

4

5

2

TSX SAY 100

1

3

5

2

4

TSX SAY 1000

5/67

5

5.2

Diagnostics, references, connections


TSX SAY master modules for AS-Interface bus

The three indicator lamps 3 on the front panel of the module that correspond to the two push buttons 4 are usedfor diagnostics at module level:

The display unit on the front panel of the TSX SAY 100 master module allows local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the:

b Slave devices on the AS-Interface bus(Bus mode).b Status of each of the I/O channels of the selected slave (slave mode).

The two indicator lamps 3 on the front panel of the module that correspond to the two push buttons 4 are used for diagnostics at module level:

The display unit on the front panel of the TSX SAY 1000 master module allows simplified local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the slave devices on the AS-Interface bus. Detailed diagnostics for each of these slave devices can be carried out via the ASI-TERV2 adjustment console.

(1) The 3-way SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface cable is supplied with the module.

(2) These maximum values cannot be cumulated: see the characteristics on page 5/69.(3) The TSX SAY 1000 module supports analog devices that have between 1 and 4 input or

output channels.

DiagnosticsTSX SAY 100 module (AS-Interface V1)

Indicator lamps marked: Push buttons marked:AS-Interface: AS-Interface power supply fault

Display bus: display unit 2 in bus display mode

I/O display: display unit 2 in slave display mode

Z/R: used for local diagnostics of the AS-Interface bus

+/-: used for local diagnostics of the AS-Interface bus

TSX SAY 1000 module (AS-Interface V2)

Indicator lamps marked: Push buttons marked:PWR: AS-Interface power supply present

FAULT: AS-Interface bus fault A/B: selection of slave group on display unit 2

MODE: module Off line/On line

ReferencesDescription Number

per PLCProtocol and profile

Number of I/Os(2)

Reference Weightkg

AS-Interface bus master modules for Premium PLCs (1)

2 for 57-104 for 57-208 for 57-308 for 57-40

AS-Interface M2

Maximum of 31 discrete devices

TSX SAY 100 0.340

AS-Interface M2E

Maximum of 62 discrete devicesMaximum of 31 analog devices (3)31 safety devices

TSX SAY 1000 0.340

Connection accessoriesDescription Supply Length Reference Weight

kgAS-Interface bus ribbon cables(yellow)

For AS-Interface bus 20 m XZ-CB 10201 1.40050 m XZ-CB 10501 3.500100 m XZ-CB 11001 7.000

Connections

TSX SAY 100/SAY 1000 module

Brown wire

Blue wire

AS-Interface ribbon cable

TSX SAY 100 TSX SAY 1000

5/68

5

5.2

Software setup Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Master modules for AS-Interface bus

The AS-Interface bus is configured using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. The services offered are based on the principle of simplicity:b Management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master (this management is transparent to the user).b Topological I/O addressing: each AS-Interface slave declared on the bus is assigned a topological address on the bus. This is transparent to the user.b Each sensor/actuator for the AS-Interface bus interfaces is treated as an in-rack I/O by the TSX Micro/Premium PLC.

All devices on the AS-Interface bus are configured implicitly using the following sequence of screens:

b Declaration of the AS-Interface bus master module

v The TSX SAZ 10 module is always inserted and declared in position no. 4 on TSX 37 10/21/22 TSX Micro automation platforms.

v TSX SAY 100/1000 modules can be inserted into any position on TSX/PCX 57 Premium automation platforms (except positions reserved for processors and power supplies).

b Configuration of AS-Interface slave devices

Using the configuration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices corresponding to all interface I/Os on the AS-Interface bus. Depending on its type, the configuration for each device consists of defining, as appropriate:

v Schneider Electric AS-Interface devices. The user selects the AS-Interface device catalog reference from the various discrete, analog, or safety interfaces listed. This selection automatically determines the AS-Interface profile and the parameters associated with each interface.

v Third-party AS-Interface device. The user can use PL7 Micro/Junior software to manage a “customized” list of sensors/actuators of different brands. This list, specifying the AS-Interface profile and parameters, is compiled to meet the needs of the user.

After configuration, the I/Os connected on the AS-Interface bus are processed by the application program in the same way as an in-rack I/O of the PLC, using either the address (e.g. %I\4.0\16.2, input 2 of slave 16 of the AS-Interface bus), or the associated symbol (e.g. Start_conveyor).

PL7 Junior/Pro software has an integrated function block library containing the specific diagnostic DFBs for AS-Interface bus. Its check for the appearance of any error on the AS-Interface (bus or slaves).

Software setup

AS-Interface bus configuration

Programming

Declaration of the TSX SAZ 10 TSX Micro module

Configuration of slave devices for TSX SAY 100

Configuration of slave devices in TSX SAY 1000

5/69

5

5.2

Diagnostics, characteristics


Master modules for AS-Interface bus

Diagnostics performed using the centralized display unit of the TSX Micro platform or using the display unit of TSX SAY 100/1000 modules can be completed using a PC terminal on which PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software has been installed.

The terminal connected to the TSX Micro/Premium PLC is used to perform diagnostics of the operating state of the AS-Interface V1 TSX SAZ 10 and TSX SAY 100 master modules, the bus and the slave devices on the bus.

For the AS-Interface V2 TSX SAY 1000 master module, the diagnostics are identical to those of the AS-Interface V1 module, and in addition, take into account developments in the M2E standard.

Diagnostics are performed using a single screen divided into four sections providing information on:

1 Status of the TSX SAZ 10 or TSX SAY 100/1000 module (RUN, ERR, I/O).2 Status of the AS-Interface channel connected to the module.3 Faulty interface (or slave).4 Data relating to any selected interface (profile, parameters, forcing, etc).

In the event of an AS-Interface module or channel fault, a second screen can be accessed, which clearly shows the type of fault, which may be at internal or external level.

(1) If the interfaces are connected using extended addressing, the type of discrete I/Os is 4I/3O (instead of 4I/4O).

Diagnostics

3 4

1

2

Diagnostics of the TSX SAY 100 module using PL7

3 4

1

2

Diagnostics of the TSX SAY 1000 module using PL7

CharacteristicsType of module TSX SAZ 10 TSX SAY 100 TSX SAY 1000

AS-Interface profile M2(AS-Interface V1) M2E (AS-Interface V2)Type of addressing Standard Standard and extended

Product certification AS-Interface No. 12001, IEC 61131 2

AS-Interface No. 18801, IEC 61131 2

Pending

Ambient air temperature Operation 0…+60 °C.Storage -25…+70 °C.

Degree of protection IP 20

Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 68 2 6. Fc tests.Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 68 2 27. EA tests.Number of connectable interfaces (or slaves)

With standard addressing 31 slaves

With extended addressing – 31 slavesType of connectable interfaces With standard addressing Discrete I/Os (4I/4O) Discrete I/Os (4I/4O) (1)

Analog I/Os (a maximum of 4 channels)Safety interfaces

With extended addressing – Discrete I/Os (4I/3O)

Bus connection By terminal block inside module(polarity locating device)

By 3-way SUB-D connector (included with the module)

Module power supply Via power supply integrated into the host platform of the module

Display/diagnostics Via:v centralized display unit on TSX Micro PLC or via the display unit of TSX SAY 100/1000

modulesv use of the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software diagnostics functionv use of the ASI-TERV1 adjustment console (infrared link)

5/70 Schneider Electric

5

5.2

Presentation 5 Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies for AS-Interface

Consistent with the standard Phaseo line, the range of ASI ABL power supplies isdesigned to deliver a d.c. voltage, as required by networks operating under theAS-Interface protocol. Three versions are available to meet all needs encountered inindustrial applications, in enclosures, cells or floor-standing enclosures. Thesesingle-phase, electronic, switch mode power supplies guarantee the quality of theoutput current, in accordance with the electrical characteristics and conforming tostandard EN 50295.

b ASI ABLB300pOperating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this powersupply delivers a voltage of 30 V d.c. Available in 2.4and 4.8 A ratings, the parallel output terminal blocksallow the bus to be connected separately to the slavesand the master. Input and output LEDs allow fast andcontinuous diagnostics.

b ASI ABLD300pOperating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this powersupply delivers a voltage of 30 V d.c. Available in 2.4and 4.8 A ratings, it allows diagnosis and managementof earth faults on AS-Interface networks. In the eventof an earth fault, the Phaseo power supply trips out,thus stopping dialogue on the bus. Restarting is onlypossible after deliberate acknowledgement of thefault. Two I/O are provided, which may be used tomonitor status. The parallel output terminal blocks areused to connect the bus separately to the slaves andthe AS-Interface master. Input, output and fault LED’sallow fast and continuous diagnostics.

Warning: the earth (GND) (2) connection must be made. In the event of disconnection, the built-in detector becomes inoperative. To obtain earth connection diagnostics, it is recommended that an ASI ABLB300p power supply be used together with insulation relay RMO PAS 101.

b ASI ABLM3024Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this productdelivers two d.c. outputs which are totally independent inthe way they operate. Two output voltages - 30 V d.c./2.4 A (AS-Interfacesupply) and 24 V d.c./3 A - are available, so making itpossible to supply the control equipment without anadditional power supply. Input and output LEDs allow fastand continuous diagnostics. (1) Recommended connection.(2) Compulsory connection.

Power supplies for AS-Interface

AS-Interface master module

AS-Interface

(1)

PE N L

100-240V

24 V

AS-i : 2,4 A

ASI ABLB3002

AS-i + AS-i GNDAS-i + AS-i GND

PE N L

100-240V

24 V

AS-i : 2,4 A

ASI ABLD3002


Fault +Fault

ONOFF

TEST

RESET

+ 1 2

Reset Fault

Earth fault

Reset


AS-Interface

(2)

+

PE N L

24 30,5 V

100-240V

24 V

AS-i : 4,8 A

ASI ABLM3024

24 V - 3 A

AS-i + AS-i GND

AS-i

AS-i + AS-i GND

24 V d.c.control


AS-Interface

(1)



Dimensions:page 5/73

5/71Schneider Electric

5

5.2

Characteristics 5 Modicon Premium automation platform 5


Technical characteristicsType of power supply ASI ABLB3002 ASI ABLB3004 ASI ABLD3002 ASI ABLD3004 ASI ABLM3024Functions Supply to the AS-Interface system 24 V c

supplyProduct certifications UL 508, CSA 22-2 n° 950

Conforming to standards Safety EN 60950, TÜVEMC EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2, EN 55022 class BLow frequency harmonic currents

No

Input circuitLED indication Orange LEDInput voltage Rated values V a 100…240

Permissible values V a 85…264

Permissible frequencies Hz 47…63Efficiency at nominal load % > 83 > 80Current consumption 0.5 1 0.5 1

Current at switch-on A < 30Power factor > 0.65

Output circuitLED indication Green LEDNominal output voltage V c 30 (AS-Interface) c 24 Nominal output current A 2.4 4.8 2.4 4.8 2.4 3

Precision Adjustable output voltage V – 100 to 120 %

Line and load regulation 3 %Residual ripple - interference mV 300 - 50

Micro-breaks Holding time for I max and Ve min

ms 10

Protection Short-circuit Permanent/automatic restart after elimination of the faultOverload 1.1 InOvervoltage Tripping if U > 1.2 Un U > 1.5

UnUndervoltage Tripping if U < 0.95 Un U < 0.8

Un

Operating characteristicsConnections Input mm2 2 x 2.5 screw terminals + earth

Output mm2 2 x 2.5 screw terminals + earth, multiple outputEnvironment Storage temperature °C - 25 to + 70

Operating temperature °C 0 to + 60 (derating from 50)Maximum relative humidity 95 % (without condensation or dripping water)Degree of protection IP 20 (conforming to IEC 529)

Vibration EN 61131-2Operating position VerticalMTBF h > 100000 (conforming to Bell core, at 40 °C)

Dielectric strength Input/output 3000 V/50 Hz/1 mmInput/earth 3000 V/50 Hz/1 mmOutput/earth (and input/output) 500 V/50 Hz/1 mm

Input fuse incorporated Yes (not interchangeable)Emissions Conducted/radiated Class B (conforming to EN 55022)Immunity Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 (4 kV contact/8 kV air)

Electromagnetic EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m)Conducted interference EN 61000-4-4 level 3 (2 kV), EN 61000-4-6 (10 V)Mains interference EN 61000-4-11




5/72 Schneider Electric

5

5.2

Characteristics, selection 5



The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that anelectronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around theelectronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced.The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) which the powersupply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature.

(1) 30 ms min.(2) 15 ms.(3) 20 ms.(4) Warning: the earth fault detector will only operate if the earth (GND) terminal is connected.

Output characteristicsDerating

00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

20

40

60

80

100

120

140P/Pn (%)

Maximum operating temperature (°C)





SelectionUpstream protection of power supplies for use on the AS-Interface systemMains supply a 115 V single-phase a 230 V single-phaseType of protection

Thermal-magneticcircuit-breaker

Ggfuse

Thermal-magneticcircuit-breaker

Ggfuse

Single-pole GB2 CBpp2-pole GB2 DBpp C60N GB2 DBpp C60NASI ABLB3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) 2 A GB2 DB06 MG24516 (1) 2 A

ASI ABLB3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 (1) 4 A GB2 DB07 MG17453 (1) 2 AASI ABLD3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) 2 A GB2 DB06 MG24516 (1) 2 AASI ABLD3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 (1) 4 A GB2 DB07 MG17453 (1) 2 A

ASI ABLM3024 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) 2 A GB2 DB06 MG17453 (1) 2 A(1) UL certified circuit-breaker.

Function diagram

N L

24 V

AS-i : 2,4 A


+ 1 2

10

67

89

5

1

43

2

(1)

(1)

(3) (3) (3) (3)(2) (2) (2) (2)

ON/OFF DDT

AS-i + AS-i –

AS-i +

AS-i –

Reset

(1)Reset

Test

Fault

Fault –

Fault +AS-i

1

2

4

5

6789

Supply

Relay offRelay onInput at state 0 or contact openInput at state 1 or contact closed

LED offLED on

, and GND (4)

3or10

5/73Schneider Electric

5

5.2

References, dimensions, schemes 5



ASI ABL regulated switch mode power suppliesMains input voltage47…63 Hz

Outputvoltage

Nominal power

Nominal current

Auto-protectreset

Earth fault detection Reference Weight

V c V W A kg

100…240single-phasewide range

30 72 2.4 auto no ASI ABLB3002 0.800

145 4.8 auto no ASI ABLB3004 1.300

72 2.4 auto yes ASI ABLD3002 0.800

145 4.8 auto yes ASI ABLD3004 1.300

30 + 24 2 x 72 2.4 + 3 auto no ASI ABLM3024 1.300

DimensionsCommon side view ASI ABLB3002 ASI ABLM3024Mounting on 35 and 75 mm rails ASI ABLD3002 ASI ABLp3004

120 54

120

81

120

SchemesASI ABLB300p ASI ABLD300p ASI ABLM3024

AS

-i

AS

-i +

AS

-i

AS

-i +

LN

GN

D

GN

D

Filter

AS

-i

AS

-i +

AS

-i

GN

D

GN

D

AS

-i +

L 1 2N

ON/OFF

Set

+

Filter

Fault detector

AS

-i

AS

-i +

AS

-i

AS

-i +

LN+

24 V

GN

D

GN

D

Filter



Selection:page 5/72

5/74

5

5.3


Modbus Plus network

The Modbus Plus network is a high-performance industrial local network which can respond to Client/Server type extended architectures,combining a high data rate (1 Mbit/s), simple and economical transmission support and several message handling services.

The main data exchange functions between all devices connected to the network are:

b The message exchange function according to the Modbus protocol.

b The “global database” function (Shared Table service, periodic, controlled by the application: a station with the token can send 32 words to a maximum of 63 other stations connected on the network).

1 The Premium (or TSX Micro) client communicates with the Quantum server on the Modbus Plus network via function block (communication function).

2 The Quantum client communicates with the Premium server on the Modbus Plus network via MSTR function blocks.

3 A Premium (or TSX Micro) client connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway network can communicate in read/write mode with a Modbus Plus station (the Premium PLC therefore acts as a gateway).

4 A Premium (or TSX Micro) client connected to the Modbus Plus network can access a remote station via the Modbus Plus/Modbus gateway.

5 A Premium client connected to the Modbus Plus network can make exchanges with the Momentum distributed inputs/outputs via the Peer cop function.

Presentation

3

1

21

4

2

3 5

Premium

Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway

Premium

Premium Third-party deviceTSX Micro

ATV 58

Quantum

Modbus device

Modbus

Gateway

Modbus Plus Bridge

Modbus Plus

MomentumLexium MHDA

XBT-FQuantum

Momentum

5/75

5

5.3

Description, characteristics


Modbus Plus network

The type III TSX MBP 100 card is used to connect the Premium/TSX Micro PLCs and Atrium coprocessor to the Modbus Plus network. This card is installed in the slot reserved for processors or coprocessors:

1 A host slot on processors or coprocessors.

2 A protective cover.

3 A removable cover with fixing screw (access to 20-way miniature connector).

4 Two indicator lamps:v ERR: card or link fault,v COM: activity on the line.

Connectors to be ordered separately: v TSX MBP CE 0pp drop cables.

Description

1

1

4

2 3

CharacteristicsStructure Type Industrial bus

Physical interface RS 485

Method of access Token bus

Transmission Mode Synchronous HDLC

Data rate 1 Mbit/s

Medium Twisted pair

Configuration Number of devices 32 per segment, 64 maximum on all segments (1,800 m maximum)

Number of addresses 64 devices maximum per segment

Length of bus 450 m maximum per segment, 1,800 m maximum with 3 repeaters

Number of segments Cascaded: 5 maximum using Modbus Plus BP85 bridges

Services Global database - 4096 byte common database- cyclical exchange of 32 broadcast words

“Peer to peer” dialogue Read/write services (number of requests: 100 registers per transaction)

Peer Cop Cyclical exchange service (on Premium only): 500 words per station (broadcast or point-to-point)

5/76

5

5.3

Connections Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Modbus Plus network

1 TSX MBP 100: Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, for type III processor slot on TSX Micro or Premium platforms.

2 170 PNT 110 20: communication module for Momentum I/O base unit.3 490 NAA 271 0p: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair with shielding drain (flying

leads). In lengths of 30, 150, 300, 450 or 1,500 m.4 170 MCI 020/021 pp: drop cable equipped at each end with an RJ45 connector

(baseT interface). In lengths of 0.25, 0.75, 3 or 10 m.5 990 NAD 230 00: IP 20 local site tap, provides a tap link from the trunk cable for

connecting 1 device (connection of conductors requires wiring tool 043 509 383). Integrates the line terminal.

6 Local site taps provides a tap link from the trunk cable for 1 device (screw terminal connection). It also has an RJ45 connector for connecting a programming and maintenance terminals:- 990 NAD 230 20/21: IP 20 plastic tap,- 990 NAD 230 10: IP 65 zamac tap.

7 170 XTS 020 00: IP 20 tee, provides a tap link from the Modbus Plus cable (cable with connectors at each end of an RJ45 connector). It has a 9-way SUB-D female connector for connecting the device.

8 TSX MBP CE 030/060: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature connector and with flying leads on the 990 NAD 230 00/010 local site tap side. In lengths of 3 or 6 m.

9 Local site taps provides a tap link from the trunk cable for 1.10TSX MBP CE 002: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the

PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature connector and on the network side with a 9-way SUB-D female connector. Can be used as an extension for cable 990 NAD 211 10/30. In lengths of 0.2 m.

11AS MBKT 185: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) to be placed at each end of the segment. The AS MBKT 185 terminators are placed directly at the end of the cable (without a tap or tee).990 NAD 230 11: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) for IP 65 local site tap 990 NAD 230 10, to be placed at each end of the segment.

12170 XTS 021 00: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) for tee 170 XTS 020 00, to be placed at each end of the segment.

For wiring system:

b Quantum platform: please refer to our catalog.b Lexium drive for brushless motors: please refer to our catalog “Lexium movement command”.b Altivar drive for asynchronous motors: please refer to our catalog “Progressive starters and speed controllers”.

Wiring system

8 9

11 5 3 5 6 5

7 7712

10

4

21

1

5/77

5

5.3


Modbus Plus network

Reference Description Number per PLC Use Addr. Composition Reference Weight

kgModbus Plus PCMCIA card

1 with TSX Micro TSX 37 21/221 with Premium/Atrium

Type III slot on:- TSX 37 21/22 PLC- Premium processor TSX 57 10/20/30/40- Atrium T PCX 57 20/30 coprocessor- Magelis XBT F terminals

1 1 PCMCIA type III card

TSX MBP 100 0.110

Description Connection Addr. Reference (1)

Weightkg

Distributed I/O on Modbus Plus network

Advantys STB network interface module – STB NMP 2212 0.145Momentum communication module 2 170 PNT 110 20 0.110

Connection accessories (1)Description Use Mounting Addr. Reference Weight

kgModbus Plus taps

IP 20 tee, requires the wiring tool 043 509 283. Integrates the line terminal

– 5 990 NAD 230 00 0.230

IP 20 tap for tap link connection (screw terminal connection), supports 1 RJ45 connector on front panel

DIN rail 6 990 NAD 230 20 –

Mounting plate 6 990 NAD 230 21 –

IP 65 tap for tap link connection (tee), supports 1 RJ45 connector on front panel

Mounting plate 6 990 NAD 230 10 0.650

IP 20 tee with 2 RJ45 connectors for Modbus Plus cable and 1 9-way SUB-D connector for tap link devices

7 170 XTS 020 00 0.260

Line terminators (sold in lot of 2)

For tap (IP 20) 990 NAD 230 20/21 11 990 NAD 230 22 –

For tap (IP 65) 990 NAD 230 10 11 990 NAD 230 11 –For tee (IP 20) 170 XTS 020 00 12 170 XTS 021 00 –

Used directly at the end of the cable (without a tap or tee)

11 AS MBKT 185 –

Mounting kit for IP 65 tee

DIN rail mounting for 990 NAD 230 10 local site tap

– 990 NAD 230 12 –

Protector pack

Replacement port protectors to prevent ingress into the RJ45 quick connect programming port of 990 NAD 230 10 tap

Sold in lot of 4 990 NAD 230 23 –

Wiring tool Mounting trunk and tap wires in the local site tap.

– 043 509 383 –

Connection cables (1)Description Use Addr. Length Reference Weight

kgFrom ToModbus Plus trunk cables

Local site tap Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10 3 30 m 490 NAA 271 01 –150 m 490 NAA 271 02 –

300 m 490 NAA 271 03 –450 m 490 NAA 271 04 –1,500 m 490 NAA 271 06 –

Drop cables

IP 20 170 XTS 020 00 tee

IP 20 170 XTS 020 00 tee 4 0.25 m 170 MCI 020 10 –

1 m 170 MCI 020 36 –3 m 170 MCI 021 20 –10 m 170 MCI 020 80 –

PCMCIA cardTSX MBP 100 (miniature connector)

Drop cable with 9 way male SUB-D connector

10 0.2 m TSX MBP CE 002 –

Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10 8 3 m TSX MBP CE 030 0.340

6 m TSX MBP CE 060 0.530

Communication module for Momentum I/O base units

Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10 9 2.4 m 990 NAD 211 10 0.5306 m 990 NAD 211 30 0.530

(1) For other Modbus Plus network connecting cables and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

TSX MBP 100

170 PNT 110 20

TSX MBP CE 030/060

5/78

5

5.3

Presentation,description


Modbus Bus

The Modbus bus is used for master/slave architectures (it is necessary, however, to check that the Modbus services used by the application are implemented on the devices concerned).The bus comprises one master station and several slave stations. Only the master station can initiate the exchange (direct communication between slave stations is not possible). Two exchange mechanisms are possible:b Question/answer, where the requests from the master are addressed to a given slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave which has been interrogated.b Broadcasting, the master broadcasts a message to all the slave stations on the bus. These stations execute the order without transmitting a response.

The TSX Micro/Premium PLCs or Atrium coprocessors offer various Modbus bus connection possibilities.

1 Via integrated port on the TSX Micro processor.

The TER port (8-way mini DIN) has Modbus RTU master/slave (1) protocol.

2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 11601/21601 module for Premium PLCs. This module has an isolated Half-duplex RS 485 serial link channel (25-way SUB-D connector) with multiprotocol (including Modbus); (for the TSX SCY 11601 module, only the Modbus protocol is supported).

3 A slot on the TSX Micro/Premium processors, the Atrium coprocessor and the TSX SCY 21601 module(2) exists for the multiprotocol TSX SCP11p cards, including Modbus, featuring:


5 A removable cover with fixing screws (to access a 20-way miniature connector).

6 Two LEDs:v ERR lamp: card or link fault,v COM lamp: data transmission or reception.

Cable connector to be ordered separately: TSX SCP/SCY cable.

(1) Modbus RTU slave Protocol with TSX 37 05/08.(2) This slot is also designed for Fipway TSX FPP 20 or Jnet TSX JNP 112/114 PCMCIA network

cards.

Presentation

Magelis iPC

Modbus

TSX Micro/PremiumApril 5000

XBT

Quantum

ATV 58

Description

Built-in links to the TSX Micro processor or to the TSX SCY p1601 Premium module

3

2

6

54

6

5

4

1

3

Premium

TSX Micro

TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCY 11601

TSX SCP 11 multiprotocol PCMCIA cardsp

References:pages 5/80 and 5/81

5/79

5

5.3


Modbus Bus

CharacteristicsPhysical Interface TSX Micro terminal port

Non-isolated RS 485

PCMCIA card TSX SCY integrated port for integrated Premium RS 485

TSX 37 05/08 TSX 37 10/21/22

Isolated RS 485 (1)

20 mA CL Non-isolated RS 232D

TSXSCY 11601

TSX SCY 21601

Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial bus

Method of access Slave Master/slave Master/slave Type

Transmission Mode Asynchronous in baseband

Frame RTU RTU/ASCII

Data rate 1.2...14.2 Kbit/s 0.6..19.2 Kbit/s (for TSX SCP 111)1.2... 19.2 Kbit/s (for TSX SCP 112/114)

1.2...19.2 Kbit/s

Medium Double shielded twisted pair Double shielded twisted pair, doubled

Quintuple shielded twisted pair

Double shielded twisted pair

Configuration Number of devices 28 max. in RS 485Point-to-point in RS 422

16 max. 2 (point-to-point)

32

Max. number of link addresses

98 248 98 248 98

Length of bus 10 m max. non isolated link1,300 m max. on isolated link (2)

1,300 m excluding tap links

100 to 1,000 m according to rate

15 m max. 1,300 m excluding C

Tap links – 15 m max. – – 15 m

Services Requests Bits: 1,920 bits per requestWords: 120 words per request

Security One CRC 16 check parameter on each frame

Monitoring No flow control Diagnostic counters, event counters

Modbus functions available on Premium/TSX Micro PLCs or on Atrium coprocessor

Code Modbus slave Modbus master01 Read n output bits Read bits02 Read n input bits Read input bits (3)03 Read n output words Read words

04 Read n input words Read input words (3)05 Write 1 output bit Write 1 bit or n bits06 Write 1 output word Write 1 word or n words

07 Exceptional read status Exceptional read status08 Diagnostic Diagnostic0B Event counter Event counter

0C Event connection Event connection0F Write n output bits –10 Write n output words –

11 Identification Slave identification– – Other requests accessible via SEND_REQ

generic function blocks(1) Point-to-point RS 422 compatible connection.(2) For an isolated link, you must use the TSX P ACC 01 terminal port cable connector.(3) Requests not available on TSX 37 10/21/22 terminal port.

References:pages 5/79 and 5/80

5/80

5

5.3


Modbus Bus

Modbus bus connection elementsDescription Protocol Physical layer Reference Weight

kgTSX Micro PLC integrated link (TER port)

Modbus (RTU) Uni-Telway character mode

Non-isolated RS 485 Refer to our catalog “TSX Micro automation platform”

–

Communication module for Premium/Atrium

ModbusCharacter modeUni-Telway

- 1 RS 485 isolated integrated channel (channel 0), (1 to 97 slaves)- 1 slot for PCMCIA card (channel 1) (1)

TSX SCY 21601 0.360

Modbus 1 RS 485 isolated integrated channel (channel 0), 1.2...19.2 Kbit/s (1 to 247 slaves)

TSX SCY 11601 0.340

PCMCIA cardstype III for Premium processor, Atrium coprocessor, PLC TSX 37 21/22 or TSX SCY 21601 module

ModbusCharacter modeUni-Telway

RS 485 (RS 422 compatible)1.2...19.2. Kbit/s

TSX SCP 114 0.105

RS 232D (9 signals)0.6...19.2. Kbit/s

TSX SCP 111 0.105

20 mA CL1.2...19.2. Kbit/s

TSX SCP 112 0.105

Modbus connection accessoriesDescription Use Reference Weight

kgPassive junction box

Bus tap link and extension, line termination adaptation TSX SCA 50 0.520

2 channel passive subscriber socket (2 or 4 wire) (2)

Tap link of 2 devices with 2 wiresTap link of 1 master device and/or 1 slave device with 4 wiresFitted with 2 female 15-pin SUB-D connectors

TSX SCA 64 0.570

Active adapter RS 232C/RS 485

Connection of an RS 232C device as RS 485Isolation of signals and line termination adaptation

TSX SCA 72 0.520

TSX Micro PLC TER terminal port cable connector

Bus tap link cable (2 or 4-wire)Isolation of Modbus signalsLine termination adaptationSupplied with cable (length 1 m) fitted with a mini-DIN connector (TER port)

TSX P ACC 01 0.690

Line terminators (sold in lot of 2)

2/4-wire cablingCan be connected to the front panel of the TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket

TSX SCA 10 0.030

(1) PCMCIA type III slot for 1 TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 112/114 card.(2) 2 or 4 wire cabling, compatible with the TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket requires a max. 10 mm

external diameter Modbus cable.

TSX Micro

TSX SCP 11p

TSX SCY 11601

TSX SCA 50

TSX SCA 64

TSX SCY 21601


5/81

5

5.3

References (suite) Modicon Premium automation platform 5

Modbus Bus

Modbus connection cablesDescription Use Length Reference Weight

kgFrom ToRS 485 double shielded twisted pair trunk cables

Modbus Bus – 100 m TSX CSA 100 5.680

200 m TSX CSA 200 10.920

500 m TSX CSA 500 30.000

Cables for isolatedRS 422/485 tap link

TSX SCP 114 card TSX SCA 50 housing2 wires (1)

3 m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160

TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket, 2/4 wires

3 m TSX SCP CM 4530 0,180

Modbus standard device, 4 wires (1) (point-to-point)

3 m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160

Built-in channel (channel 0) Premium TSX SCY 11601, TSX SCY 21601 module

TSX SCA 50 housing, 2 wires (1)

3 m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.160

TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket, 2 wires

3 m TSX SCY CM 6530 0.160

RS 232D tap link cables

TSX SCP 111 card Communication device (Modem, converter, etc) (DCE) (2)

3 m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190

Terminal device with point-to-point (DTE) (2)

3 m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190

10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620

Cable for tap link 20 mA CL

TSX SCP 112 card Multidrop Modbus (1) 3 m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160

Other connecting cables

– – – See page 5/110 –

(1) End of cable fitted with free wires.(2) End of cable fitted with a male 25-pin SUB-D connector.


5/82

5

5.4

Communication architecture


Level 3

Level 2

Level 1

Ethernet TCP/IP (Uni-TE, Modbus)

TSX Micro

XAL control station

Intelligent sensor

AS-Interface bus

ATV 58

Ethernet TCP/IP (Uni-TE, Modbus)

ATV 28

Modbus busUni-Telway bus

TSX Micro TSX Micro

Nano

Nano

Nano

Nano

Monitor Pro

TSX ETZ

Magelis

TSX ETZ

Modem

Modem

TSX Micro

Fipway/Modbus Plus

Ethernet

Premium

5/83

5

5.4

5

(1) PC industriel Magelis iPC in configuration “Thin Client” : PC having only Windows and an Internet browser.

T

T

Premium + Web serveur

Quantum + Web serveur

Motor starter

Quantum

XAL control station

XBL keypadIntelligent sensors

Premium I/O extension rack

Bridge

Sensors

Magelis iPC (1)

Ethernet TCP/IP (Modbus)

Ethernet

Premium

AS-interface busPremium I/O extension rack

Digital HP

I/O Scanning

Motor starter

Premium

Momentum

TSX Micro

ATV 58

Premium

Bus X

Magelis iPC

Quantum

AS-interface bus

Modbus Plus

Service Global Data

T XBT F Magelis

5/84

5

5.4

X-Way and the OSI model Modicon Premium automation platform 5

X-way communication

The communication architecture of the programmable TSX Micro/Premium PLCs, like that of TSX 17 or TSX model 40 PLCs, is compliant with the OSI model.

The physical layer enables the physical transmission of data signals between 2 systems via a medium. In order for a network to operate correctly, and to ensure full security of personnel in compliance with IEC 1131 2, it is necessary to implement the wiring recommendations described in the reference manual TSX DR NET F “X-Way communication” (or in the TSX CD DMTE 13E CD-ROM “Technical documentation”).

The application layer concerns application programs, data exchange and cooperation conventions. This layer provides the following services: b Industrial Uni-TE message, available on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX PLCs.b Distributed COM database available on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX PLCs, or Shared Table service available on TSX Micro/Premium PLCs.b Periodical data exchange on Fipio bus, see page 5/94.b Application-to-application communication.b Telegram.

(1) Ethway not available on TSX Micro PLC.(2) 1 K bytes with requests executed as a background task.(3) 128 bytes on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX model 40 terminal port, 32 bytes on

TSX 17 20/47 20/25.(4) COM service not available with Ethernet TCP/IP.

The Uni-TE protocol is the industrial message handling system supported by the X-Way communication architecture. It operates on the question/answer or request/confirmation principle. A device which supports the Uni-TE protocol can be a:b Client: this device initiates communication. It asks a question (reads), transmits data (writes) or sends an instruction (Run, Stop, etc.).b Server: this device executes the service requested by the client and sends a confirmation after execution.

X-Way and the OSI model

Telegram

Common words/shared table

Application-to-application communications

Uni-TE

X-Way addressing system

Uni-Telway

RS 48519.2 Kbps

Uni-Telway

WorldFip

WorldFip1 Mbps

Fipio/Fipway

ISO 8802 3Ethernet

ISO 8802 310 Mbps

Ethway

Uni-TEModbus (1)

TCP

IP

ISO 8802 3Ethernet

ISO 8802 310/100 Mbps

Ethernet TCP

7 Application

6 Presentation

5 Session

4 Transport

3 Network

2 Link

1 Physical

Size of requests Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP (1)

Fipway Fipio Uni-Telway

Uni-TE service 256 bytes (2) 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (3)

COM service 256 word database (4)

128 word database

– –

Application-to-application

256 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (3)

Telegram – 16 bytes – –

Uni-TE services

5/85

5

5.4

X-Way and the OSI model (continued)


X-way communication

The services provided depend on the type of device (PLC, numerical controller, programming terminal, supervision station, etc.). Depending on its function, each device can be Client and/or Server. A Client PLC can access other devices on the architecture via its application program: It can read/write objects on another PLC or numerical controller, select programs on a numerical controller, etc.

When connected to any station in the network or directly connected to the Fipway/ Ethernet TCP/IP network, a programming terminal can communicate with any other station in the network (as if the terminal were physically connected to the PLC with which it is dialoguing).Network transparency also applies between stations connected to different segments of the same multinetwork architecture.

The COM service is made up of a set of dedicated words called common words. Each Fipway/Ethway network station may or may not access the database (in read only or read/write mode).All PLC stations exchanging common words (32 stations on Fipway, 64 stations on Ethway) are allocated, in a dedicated database (128 words for Fipway, 256 words for Ethway), a write zone (set at 4 words for the Fipway network, and variable from 4 to 64 words for the Ethway network) per TSX Micro/Premium station.COM words are updated automatically during each scan of the general sequential program (master task) without the intervention of the application program.

The Shared Table service can be used to exchange a table of internal words divided into as many zones as there are TSX Micro/Premium PLCs which comprise the Fipway network. The exchange principle is based on the broadcasting, by each PLC, of a word memory zone (broadcast zone) to the other PLCs on the network.Each network station is allocated an exchange table comprising 128 internal words for the 32 PLCs that share the service, with a broadcast zone assigned to each PLC, variable from 1 to 32 internal words.

This consists of using the user application program to send word tables between 2 devices, which may be TSX Micro/Premium and TSX PLCs.This service is particularly suitable for:b Sending alarm messages from a PLC to a supervision station.b Exchanging data tables between two PLCs controlled by the application programs of the transmission and destination device.b Sending broadcast messages to all stations and devices.

The telegram service available on Fipway is a special case of application-to- application messages. It enables short messages to be sent and received on a priority basis (maximum 16 characters).A telegram from a TSX Micro/Premium PLC is sent immediately without waiting for the end of the cycle. The telegram is received by the TSX Micro/Premium PLC in:b The event-triggered task (processed as soon as the message arrives in the network card).b The fast task or master task (when scanning the reception function).b A PLC can only process one telegram at a time.

The X-Way communication architecture is designed to cover multinetwork applications capable of dealing with problems of: b Concentration, the architecture is particularly suitable for feedback of supervision data to a higher level.b Redundancy, each PLC monitors the correct operation of both networks to which it is connected. If one of the networks should fail, all traffic could be transferred to the valid network.b Inter-network communication. These architectures comprise several network segments which are interconnected by “bridge PLC” stations. Transparent communication is then offered between the entire architecture.

Network transparency

COM service and Shared Table service (exclusive services one from another)

Application-to-application communication

Telegram

Use in a multinetwork

5/86

5

5.4


Fipway network

The Fipway network is an open local area network for communication between the various TSX Micro, Premium and TSX Series 7 PLCs using the X-Way services. Communication conforms to the FIP standard with access via a bus arbitrator.

TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Premium PLCs can be connected to a Fipway network using a Fipway PCMCIA card which is inserted in each processor or into the TSX SCY 21601 (Premium) communication module. Supported X-Way services are:b Uni-TE services.b Distributed database (COM) or Shared Table.b Telegram (service only available when the PCMCIA card is inserted in the processor).b Application-to-application communication.

For characteristics, Fipway network wiring and connection accessories, see pages 5/100 to 5/103.

Presentation

Premium

TSX 17 20TSX Micro

TSX

Bus XPremium

Magelis iPCEthernet TCP/IP

Fipway



Performances:page 5/89

5/87

5

5.4


Fipway network

The Fipio industrial fieldbus is standard of communication between various control system components. It conforms to the WorldFip standard.

(1) The COM and Shared table service are mutualy exclusive.(2) Service reserved for TSX Micro and Premium PLCs.(3) Service only available when Fipway PCMCIA card is installed in the processor.

Characteristics

Type of bus/network Fipway networkStructure Type Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WordFip standard

Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections

Maximum length m 5 000

Access method Producer/consummer principalManagement by fixed arbitrator

Transmission Mode Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 46 604

Data rate Mbit/s 1

Medium 150 Ω shielded twisted pair, 62.5/125 ou 50/125 fibre optic using electrical/fibre optic repeaters

Configuration Number of devices

Per segment 32 stations

Maxi 64 stations

Segments Number Unlimited

Length m 1 000 maximum per electrical segment 3 000 maximum per optical segment

Services COM (1) Distributed database: 128 mots maximum0 or 4 % NWi words for TSX Micro and Premium station with addresses 0 to 31

Shared table(1) Shared table of internal words: 128 words maximum1 to 32 % MWi words per TSX Micro and Premium station with addresses 0 to 3 (2)

Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: 128 bytes maximum, can be used by all devices connected to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server device system functions)

Application-to-application Point-to-point messages: 128 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all TSX Micro (1)/Premium/TSX Serie 7

Telegram Point-to-point priority messages: 16 bytes maximum between 2 Premium (3) or TSX Series 7 stations with addresses 0 to 15

Security Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming to standard NF C 46 603




5/88

5

5.4

Performances,description


Fipway network

The operating principle of a Fipway network gives ensured, constant network cycle times whatever the traffic and number of stations (2 to 64). This enables the Fipway network to be updated (addition or removal of stations) without changing the performance.

Maximum transmission timeb Telegram (TLG): priority application messages are transmitted in less than 10 ms (one telegram per station).b Common words (COM): the database of common words is updated every 40 ms.b Shared Table: the exchange table is updated every 40 ms.Uni-TE message handling system: Uni-TE or standard application-to-application messages are normally transmitted in less than 80 ms (40 ms for stations with addresses below 32). Where there is a large amount of traffic, some messages can wait for several cycles before being transmitted. The network characteristics enable a maximum of 210 messages of 128 bytes per second to be transmitted.

The performance can be improved by inhibiting the Telegram service in the network. With such network characteristics, the response time at application level depends almost exclusively on the processing capacity of the devices which are connected. For example, the remote loading of a 50 K word program takes less than two minutes on a network with normal load.CT1 = Cycle time of device 1.NCT = Cycle time of Fipway network.CT2 = Cycle time of device 2.

The response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application in relation to the devices connected.The processing time of a device can vary from one to two cycle times as a function of asynchronous operation.

Performances

Event Report

CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1Device 1

Fipway network NCT NCT

CT2 CT2Device 2

Action

Connectable devices

TSX 7 PLCs Magelis iPC industrial PC Magelis operator dialogue terminals

Connection via Fipio/Fipway integrated link or via theTSX FPM 100 module of TSX/PMX model 40 PLCs. Connection via the TSX FPG 10 module of TSX 17 20 TSX Micro PLCs.

Equipped with TSX FPC 10M for PC compatible (ISA bus). They access all devices in the X-Way architecture. The various X-Way drivers are available on CD-ROM, see page 6/19.

Connection via the TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card.




5/89

5

5.4


Fipway network

TSX Micro/Premium PLCs have a slot on the processor for a type III PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with the TSX FPP 20 fipway network connection card, which is also inserted into the TSX SCY 21601 communication module slot. The TSX FPP 20 card comprises:1 Protective cover2 Removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature connector3 Two indicator lamps:v ERR lamp: card fault, link fault,v COM lamp: data transmission or reception.Connector to be ordered separately:TSX FP CG 010/030, 1 or 3 m cable for connection to the TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4 T-junction box (on 9-way SUB-D connector).

Description

ReferencesDescription Number per

Premium PLC

Use Compo-sition

Reference Weightkg

Fipway card 1 with 37 201 with 57 101 with 57 203 with 57 304 with 57 40

Type lll slot on,- TSX Micro/ Premium processor- TPCX 57 10/30 coprocessor- TSX SCY 21601 module

1 type lll PCMCIA card

TSX FPP 20 0.110

Communication module

See page 5/87 For Premium PLC- 1 isolated 2 wire RS 485 integrated channel (Half-duplex)- 1 slot for type lll PCMCIA card

2 channels TSX SCY 21601 0.360

Set of X-Way drivers for PC compatible

Includes all X-Way drivers 1 CD-Rom See page 6/19 –

Connection cables and accessories (1)Description Use

From ToLength Reference Weight

kgCables for PCMCIA

TSX FPP 20 card (miniature connector)

TSX FP ACC 3/4 box (SUB-D 9-way connector)

1 m TSX FP CG 010 0.210

3 m TSX FP CG 030 0.410

(1) For other Fipway network accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/102 and 5/103.

1

3

4

2

TSX FPP 20

TSX SCY 21601

TSX FP CG 010/030




5/90

5

5.4

Presentation, connectable devices

The Fipio fieldbus is a standard means of communication between different control system components. It enables 127 devices to be connected at the connection point integrated in the processor. This fieldbus conforms to the WorldFip standard based on producer/consumer mechanisms. It is designed for remote location of l/O up to 15 km away and enables a third-party Schneider Alliances device to be installed.The bus arbitradiscr. (manager) can be a Premium PLC TSX P 57 153/253/2823/353/453/4823 or Atrium T PCX 57 353 coprocessor.Characteristics see page 5/95.Fipio bus accessories and connecting cables, see pages 5/100 to 5/103.

Schneider Electric devices which can be connected on the Fipio bus include:b Micro/Premium Agent function (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card).b CCX 17 operator panel (version ≥ 2.4 ) (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card).b Magelis XBT-F graphic screen terminal (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card) PCMCIA TSX FPP 20 card.b Le PC industriel Magelis IPC (via carte PCMCIA TSX FPC 10M).b Advantys STB distributed I/O (with STB NFP 2212 network interface module).b Momentum distributed discrete, analogue or application-specific l/O (with 170 FNT 110 01 communication module version u 1.0).b TBX distributed discrete (1) or analogue l/O (IP 20) with TBX LEP 030 communication module version ≥ 1.2.b TBX distributed discrete dust and damp proof l/O (IP 65) (2) or TSX EpF (IP 67).b ATV 38/58/58F variable speed drive (via VW3-A58301/311 card) and ATV 68 (via VW3-A68301 card).b TBX SAP 10 Fipio/AS-Interface gateway (2).b Schneider Alliances partner products (see below).

Schneider Alliances is an industrial and commercial programme of cooperation between Schneider Electric and its partners, offering automation products (hardware and software), system integration and other services to complement the Schneider Electric offer.The programme was established to improve the connection of devices from other control system suppliers on the Fipio bus. Connection of a wide variety of different brands of sensors and actuadiscr.s offers the end user a choice of global, high-performance and low-cost control system solutions.

(1) WorldFip mode is only supported by TBX discrete I/O modules version ≥ 1.4. (TBX LEP 020).(2) WorldFip mode is only supported by modules version ≥ 2.0.

Presentation

AS-iATV

MomentumTBX

Magelis XBT,CCX17

Fipio

Magelis IPCProduits Tiers

AS-igatewayMicro (Agent)

Dust and damp proof TBX

Premium (Agent)

Premium (Bus manager)

Connectable devices

Schneider Alliances: Fipio bus openness




Fipio bus manager function

5/91

5

5.4

1

TSX P 57p823M

1

2

3

Schneider Electric has integrated specific WorldFip mechanisms into its PLCs and software in order to make them accessible to any automation system engineer without any particular expertise in this area. Schneider Electric products and partner products connected on Fipio then automatically reap the following benefits: simplified description of architectures and configuration of equipment, and also simple control system development and programming, operation and maintenance.

Within the Schneider Alliances programme, Schneider Electric has developed a range of products and services destined to facilitate the connection and integration of products and partner equipment on Fipio. Please consult our specialist catalogue and the Schneider Alliances documentation.

TSX P57 p53 M (1) processors and the T PCX P57 353 coprocessor have on the front panel:

1 A 9-way SUB-D connecdiscr. for connection to the bus via the TSX FP ACC 2/12 connector.

PL7 Junior/Pro software offer configuration screens which enable the declaration and immediate and intuitive configuration of the remote devices connected on the Fipio bus.

1 Each circle represents one connection point.

2 Clicking on a circle accesses the catalogue of devices which can be connected.

3 Once confirmed, the Fipio bus configuration will appear.

Processors fitted with the integrated Fipio link can manage 128 connection points on the bus (addresses 0 to 127). See page 5/92 for the table detailing limitations according to processor and type of device.

The diagnostic functions of the Fipio bus, integrated in the PL7 Junior/Pro software, very quickly identify a fault on:

b The bus medium.b Remote devices.

1 A graphic representation of the architecture displays the defective devices in red.

2 More detailed diagnostics can be accessed by double-clicking.

3 In addition, special screens display an overview of all the faults appearing on the bus or on any device. On request, these faults can be recorded for later analysis.

(1) The TSX P57 153M processor is a single format module.

Schneider Alliances: Fipio bus openness (continued)

Description

T PCX P57 353M

Software setupConfiguration

Diagnostics





Description, software setup

2

1

3

5/92

5

5.4

The Fipio bus enables a maximum of 128 devices to be connected. This limit can, in certain cases, be restricted depending on the type of bus manager processor and on the devices which are connected on the bus. The maximum number of devices which can be connected depends on:b The maximum size of memory space available for Fipio data which is 95744 bytes for TSX P57 153/253/353 processors and the T PCX 57 353 coprocessor and 214528 bytes for the TSX P 57-453 processors.b The total number of bytes consumed by each device (see table below).

(1) Address 63 is reserved for the programming and diagnostic terminal.(2) Do not mix discrete and analogue base units on the same Fipio connection point.(3) The number of analogue channels for TBX base units of the same type (AES, ASS or AMS)

is limited to 1008.(4) The number of channels for TBX base units of the same type (DES, DMS or DSS) is limited

to 2048.

Maximum configuration

Product family Reference Base size (bytes)

Extension size (bytes)

Maximum number of connection pointsTSX P57153M 253/2663/353M 453/4823M

Maxi number of Fipio devices (1) 63 127 127

ATV 38/58 With VW3-A58301 card 1808 52 52 62ATV 38/58/58F With VW3-A58311 card 1280 62 62 62ATV 68 With VW3-A68301 card 1280 62 62 62Lexium MHDA With AM0 FIP 001V000 card 1424 62 62 62CCX 17 T CCX 1720 F/FPS, T CCX 17p0 L/

LPS1952 4 4 4

Magelis XBT-F With TSX FPP 10 card 1424 62 62 62Magelis IPC, compatible PC With TSX FPP 20 (address 63) – 1 1 1Inductel, read/write stations XGK-S130421, XGP-S1304202

With VW3-A58301 card1808 52 52 62

Momentum 170 ADI ppp/ADO ppp,170 ADM 350 10/11,170 ARM 370 10/390 10/30,170 ADM 690 51,170 ARN 120 90,170 ARM 370 30/390 10

832 62 98 98

170 AAI 030 00/520 40,170 AAO 120 00/921 00, 170 AEC 920 00,170 AMM 090 00

1808 52 52 98

170 AAI 140 00 2304 40 40 92TBX (2) TBX AES 200/ASS 400(3) 1332 62 70 126

272 (2/4 chan. extens.)

59 59 126

TBX AMS 620 1584 59 59 126272(2 chan. extens.)(4 chan. extens.)

5050

5050

100 (3)84 (3)

528(8 chan.extens.)

44 44 63 (3)

TBX CEP 1622/CSP 1622/1625 1152 31 31 31TBX DES 16pp/DMS16pp/DSS16pp 1152 62 81 126

144 (extension) 62 64 (4) 64 (4)TBX DSS 1235 1152 144 (extension) 62 72 85 (4)TBX DMS 1025 1152 144 (extension) 62 72 102 (4)

TBX EEP/ESP 08C22/1622 (IP 65) 1152 62 64 126TBX SAP 10 1808 52 52 117

I/O IP 67 TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 16D2 832 62 98 98TSX ESF 08T22/EMF 16DT2 1808 52 52 98

Micro/Premium Agent With TSX FPP 10 card 1424 62 62 62FipConnect profile FRD C2 832 62 113 126

FRD C2P 1744 54 54 122FSD C8 896 62 105 126FSD C8P 1808 52 52 117FSD M8 1040 62 90 126FSD M8P 1952 48 48 109FED C32 1280 62 73 126FED C32P 2304 40 40 92FED M32 1424 62 66 126FED M32P 2448 38 38 87

Not applicable






Maximum configuration

5/93

5

5.4

T PCX 57 353M

TSX P57 153M

TSX P57 253/353/453M

TSX FP ACC 12

When using the bus manager function, the application services supported by the Premium PLCs are:b Remote l/ORemote l/O modules are addressed by the PL7 application program as “In rack” l/O, with which they can of course coexist. This service enables the exchange of l/O status variables and output command variables. These exchanges are carried out in a cyclical and deterministic manner and without intervention from the application program.The manager also manages remote devices (configuration) in an aperiodic manner, without intervention from the application program.b Uni-TE service X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for MMI, diagnostics and control functions (requests of 128 bytes maximum).b Application-to-application serviceThis service consists of sending tables between 2 devices under the control of their respective application programs (requests of 128 bytes maximum).b Terminal transparencyTerminals connected on a higher level X-way network or on the manager PLC terminal port communicate with the devices on the bus. This is also the case when the terminal is connected at the priority address 63.

Application services

Processors and coprocessor (1)Type and max.no. of racks (2)

Memory capacity I/O Capacity (3)

Bus network module capacity

EthernetTCP/IP

Reference (4) WeightkgIntegrated in

processor PCMCIA extension

TSX 57 10 4 racks

32 Kwords 64 Kwords maximum

512 discr.24 analog. 8 app-spec. channels

1 integ.Fipio 1 network 2 AS-i bus0 third-party bus

– TSX P57 153M 0.420

TSX 57 20 16 racks


1024 discr. 80 analog. 24 app-spec channels

1 integ.Fipio 1 network 4 AS-i bus1 third-party bus

– TSX P57 253M 0.560

1integrated port

TSX P57 2823M 0.650

TSX 57 30 16 racks



1 integ.Fipio 3 network8 AS-i bus 2 third-party bus

– TSX P57 353M 0.560

TSX 57 40 16 racks

96/176 Kwords (5)

512 Kwords maximum


1 integ.Fipio 4 network8 AS-i bus 2 third-party bus

– TSX P57 453M 0.560

1 integrated port

TSX P57 4823M 0.650

PCX 57 30 16 racks

80/96 Kwords (5)

160 Kwords maximum


1 integ.Fipio 3 network 8 AS-i bus 2 third-party bus

– T PCX 57 353M 0.320

Accessories and connecting cables (6) Description Use

From ToMaterial Reference Weight

kgFemale connectors (9-way SUB-D)

Processors and coprocessors with Fipio integrated link

– Polycarbo-nate black (IP 20)

TSX FP ACC 12 0.040

Zamac TSX FP ACC 2 0.080

(1) PCMCIA card extension memory, see page 1/25.(2) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12 EX

rack (12 slots) is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.(3) Cumulative maximum values: the I/O on Fipio are not counted.(4) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide (processors and discrete I/O):

English, French, German, Spanish and Italian.(5) The second value corresponds to the capacity of the integrated RAM when the application

program is supported by the extension memory.(6) For other accessories and Fipio bus connecting cables, see pages 5/100 to 5/103.

TSX P57 2623/4823M





Application services, references

5/94

5

5.4


Fipio bus Agent function

TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) or Premium PLCs, fitted with a TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card on their integrated communication channel, are agents on the Fipio bus. The bus manager is a TSX P 57 153/253/2823/353/453/4823, Atrium coprocessor T PCX 57 203/353.

The Fipio bus enables I/O to be remotely located close to the devices to be controlled (Momentum, Altivar, etc). The Agent function enables offline processing, by locating a TSX Micro PLC close to the machine.

In addition to the standard Fipio services (see pages 5/84 to 5/85), TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Premium PLCs allow exchanges of input and output variables with the bus manager PLC. These exchanges are performed cyclically, automatically and without the involvement of the application program at the same rate as the task for which the agent PLC has been configured.

For characteristics, Fipio bus wiring system and connection accessories, see pages 5/100 to 5/103.

The application services supported by TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Premium Agent function PLCs are:

b Uni-TE service, X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for operator dialogue, diagnostics and control functions (requests of up to 128 bytes).

b Application-to-application communication service, which consists of the transmission of tables between 2 devices controlled by their respective application programs (messages of up to 128 bytes).

b New periodic data exchange service for exchanging a 64 word table between the bus manager PLC and the Premium Agent PLC. Sofware setup see page 5/96.

Presentation

T

Premium(Bus manager)

Momentum TSX Micro (Agent)CCX 17

Fipio bus

Intelligent sensors

Bus AS-InterfaceMotor starter

XAL keyboard

Lexium

ATV 58

Premium (Agent)

Application services




5/95

5

5.4



The Fipio industrial fieldbus is standard of communication between various control system components. It conforms to the WorldFip standard.

(1) TSX 37 21/22 only.

Characteristics

Type of bus/network Fipio busStructure Type Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WordFip standard

Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections

Maximum length m 15 000

Access method Producer/consummer principalManagement by fixed arbitrator

Transmission Mode Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 46 604

Data rate Mbit/s 1

Medium 150 Ω shielded twisted pair, 62.5/125 ou 50/125 fibre optic using electrical/fibre optic repeaters

Configuration Number of devices

Per segment 32 connexion points per segment

Maxi 128 on all segments

Segments Number Unlimited

Length m 1 000 maxi per electric segment 3 000 maxi per optical segment

Services Input/output exchanges Periodic and deterministic exchanges of variables between bus manager PLC and Agent PLC (64 %MWi consecutive words: 32 %MWi for transmmission and 32 %MWi for reception)

Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: 128 bytes maximum, can be used by all devices connected to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server device system functions)

Application-to-application Point-to-point messages: 128 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all TSX Micro(1)/Premium/TSX Serie 7

Security Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming to standard NF C 46 603




5/96

5

5.4

Software setup,description



Each TSX Micro/Premium PLC Fipio Agent uses 64 %MWi consecutive internal words to exchange periodic data. The first 32 words are reserved for sending data to the manager, and the remaining 32 are reserved for receiving data from the manager.

PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro application-specific screens allow the configuration of the Fipio Agent PCMCIA card. This consists of:

b Indicating the connection point number (1 to 127).

b Indicating the address at the beginning of the 64 %MW word table reserved for sending data to and receiving data from the manager.

TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22)/Premium PLCs have a slot in the processor for a type III PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with a TSX FPP 10 Fipio bus connection card.

The TSX FPP 10 card comprises:


2 A removable cover with fixing screws giving access to the 20 way miniature connector.

3 Two indicator lamps: v ERR lamp: card fault, link fault,v COM lamp: transmission or reception of data.

Connector to be ordered separately:4 TSX FP CG 010/030, 1 or 3 m cable for connecting the TSX FP ACC 4 tap junction

(on 9-way SUB-D connector).

Software setup

Description

2

3

1 4




5/97

5

5.4

References Modicon Premium automation platformFipio bus Agent function

ReferencesFipio bus connection componentDescription Composition Use Reference Weight

kgFipio Agent function card

1 type III PCMCIA Version V1.8

On TSX Micro processors(TSX 37 21/22),Premium/ Atrium processors

TSX FPP 10 0.110

Fipio bus connection accessories (1)Description Use Reference Weight

kgInsulated bus cable connector(in black polycarbonate, IP 20)

Trunk cable tap link, supports 2 x 9-way female SUB-D connectors(for TSX FP CG 010/030 PCMCIA cardcable), for connection of TBX dust and damp proof module c 24 V supply

TSX FP ACC 3 0.090

Dust and damp proof bus cable connector

Trunk cable tap link TSX FP ACC 4 0.660

Fipio bus connection cables (1)Description Use


kgCables for PCMCIA card

TSX FPP 10 card (miniatureconnector)

TSX FP ACC 4 cable connector(9-way SUB-D connector)

1 m TSX FP CG 010 0.210

3 m TSX FP CG 030 0.410

(1) For other Fipio bus accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/102 and 5/103.

TSX FPP 10

TSX FP ACC 3

TSX FP ACC 4

TSX FP CG 010/030




5/98

5

5.4

Presentation Modicon Premium platform automation 5

Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver

The OZD FIP G3 optic transceivers are particularly adapted for use with applications which are subject to harsh electrical environments or which are distributed over large areas:b Public buildings.b Large-scale industrial sites.b Water treatment and distribution.b Transport and highway tunnel infrastructures, etc.

The OZD FIP G3 optic transceiver enables conversion of a FIP electric interface to 2 FIP optic interfaces and vice versa. As a result, it allows redundant ring topologies to exist; these improve installation availability even when a line is broken at a point in the medium.

In these situations, the length of the bus or the Fipio/Fipway ring can reach 20 Km, with a maximum of 32 Fipio or 20 Fipway transceivers. See characteristics on page 5/99. These characteristics may be increased using mixed topologies such as 2 serial optic rings or 2 serial optic buses; please consult our regional office.

1 OZD FIF GG3: Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver.2 TSX FP CAp00: 150 Ω shielded twisted pair trunk cable (diameter 8 mm) for use

in standard environments and inside buildings.3 TSX FP CG 0p0: tap-off connection cable for TSX FPP 10/20 PCMCIA module

card for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs.4 TSX FP ACC 3/4: T-junction box. It also has two 9-way female SUB-D connectors

for connecting any device which connects to the bus by a PCMCIA card.5 TSX FP ACC 2/12: 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection

using daisy chaining or tap link connection.6 TSX FP ACC 7: line terminator to be placed at each segment end.

TSX LES 65: terminal block for TSX Series 7 PLC, which performs the address coding.

Presentation

Wiring system

3

4

55

6

26 6

2

2

3

2

6 6

6

4

36

4

1

1

1

62

6

4

1

6

1

PremiumCCX 17

Optic ring

Magelis iPC + TSX FPC 10M

TSX Micro or Premium + TSX FPP 10

MomentumThird party



5/99

5

5.4

Fipio bus operating mode and performance on fiber opticsAfter configuration in Fipio mode, the processor scans the various application devices according to the software configuration:b Image variables of the input values and of the output command values of a configured device are scanned as quickly as possible on the bus, whilst respecting the existing relationships between periods of different tasks which use these devices.b Appearance or disappearance of a configured device is detected on the bus within a maximum time of 200 ms.b Exchanges occur at the rate defined by the programmer, from 10 to 20 Uni-TE messages per second.The network cycle time is double that of the electrical bus when OZD FIP G3 transceivers are used.

Fipway bus operating mode and performance on fiber opticsThe operating principle is identical to that on an electrical network, in that the number of stations is limited to 32 and the transmission time is as follows:b For the Common words and Shared Table services, updating of the entire database is carried out every 40 ms maximum.For Uni-TE message handling, the network characteristics are used to transmit a maximum of 230 messages of 128 bytes per second.

Performances


OZD FIP G3

Characteristics (with OZD FIP G3 optic transceivers) (1)

Type of bus/network Fipio bus Fipway networkStructure Type Open industrial support conforming to Fip standard

Topology In redundant rings or in a line with simple redundant linksAccess method Producer/consumer principle

Management by a fixed arbitratorProducer/consumer principleManagement by an automatically elected arbitrator

Transmission Mode Multimode (860 nanometres)

Data rate 1 Mbit/sMedium (2) Fiber optic 50/125 - 17 dBm or 62.5/125 - 15 dBmInter-repeater distance 2,500 m for 50/125 and 2,800 m for 62.5/125

Configuration No. of connection points 32 optic transceivers 20 optic transceiversMaximum no. of devices 16 Fipio devices can be connected to the same

fiber optic transceiver16 stations can be connected to the same fiber optic transceiver but the maximum number of stations is 32

No. of segments The loop (or fiber optic line) is similar to a non cascadable segmentLength Maximum circumference of the ring (or length of the line): 20 kmMaximum optic distance between 2 OZD FIP G3 transceivers

1,500 m, with the following on the ring or the line: 32 optic transceivers2,000 m, with the following on the ring or the line: < 32 optic transceivers3,000 m, with the following on the ring or the line: 2 optic transceivers

Tap links From the OZD FIP G3 fiber optic transceiver, the maximum length of the electrical tap link is 100 mServices Same as page 5/100 except for the Telegram service, which is not available with OZD FIP G3

fiber optic transceiver.

References Description Max. number of

transceiversConnectable devicesFipio bus

Fipway network

Reference Weightkg

Optic transceiver Fipio/Fipway (3)

32 with Fipio20 with Fipway

- TSX Micro/Premium- TBX remote I/Os with TBX LEP 30- Remote Momentum I/O- CCX 17 panels (version 2.4)- Magelis iPC industrial PCs- Lexium drives, etc.

TSX Micro,Premium (with TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card)

OZD FIP G3 0.500

TSX Micro/Premium PLC connection components (4)Description Use Composition Reference Weight

kg

Fipway card TSX 37 21/22 Micro PLC, Premium processor, Atrium coprocessor

1 type III PCMCIA card

TSX FPP OZD 200 0.110

Fipio card agent function TSX 37 21/22 Micro PLC, Premium processor, Atrium coprocessor

1 type III PCMCIA card

TSX FPP 10 0.110

(1) These characteristics can be increased using mixed topologies; please consult our regional office.

(2) Devices connected on electrical tap links are compatible with the WorldFip physical layer.(3) For TSX FP ACC 8M fiber optic electrical repeater, see page 5/102.(4) For accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/102 and 5/103.

Presentation (continued), characteristics, references

Modicon Premium platform automation 5

Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver

TSX FPP 20/10

5/100

5

5.4


Fipio bus and Fipway network

Fipio bus and Fipway network wiring system

Connection to Fipway network and Fipio bus Connection to Fipway bus Connection to Fipio bus(1) Dust and damp proof I/O modules on Fipio bus for IP 65 modules: TBX EEP/ESP modules and connections, see pages 3/28 to 3/31, IP 67 modules:

TSX EEF/ESF/EMF modules and connections, see pages 3/34 to 3/43.

14

7

1

8 8

7

11

66

11

9 10 109

11

15

13

1

1314

14 12

14

14

24 V

24 V

24 V

3 3

4

4

5

4

5

3

1 2

1 2

Premium bus managerMomentumLexium, ATV 38/58/68FipConnect third-party products

TSX 17 20TSX Micro AgentPremium AgentMagelis XBT F Magelis iPCCompatible PC

CCX 17FipConnect third-party products

or or

Daisy chaining

Fiber optic link

TSX Serie 7 model 40 with PCMCIA

TSX Series 7 model 40 Integrated link

TSX Series 7 model 40 Integrated link

Proof I/O IP 65 or IP 67 (1)

or

or

or

Dai

sy c

hain

ing

TSX SAP 10TBX (IP 20)

TSX 17 20

Premium (bus manager) MomentumLexium, ATV 38/58/68FipConnect third product

TSX SAP 10TBX (IP 20)

Daisy chaining

or 2 or 2


Raccordements:pages 5/102 and 5/103

Connectable devicesDevices to be connected on Fipio Boxes Connectors

TSX FP ACC4 8

TSX FP ACC14 6

TSX FP ACC3 7

TBX FP ACC10

TSX EF ACC99

TSX FP ACC 2 9

TSX FP ACC12 9

TBX BLP01 10

TBX BLP10

TBX BAS10

Premium Fipio Agent D DPremium bus manager D D C/D C/DTSX Micro Fipio Agent D DLexium D D C/D C/DATV 58E D D C/DATV 58H/P/F, ATV 68/68F D D C/DCCX 17 D DIndustrial Magelis iPC PCs D DXBT F Magelis terminals D DPC compatible D DMomentum D D C/D C/DTBX IP 20 D D C/DTBX IP 65 with telealimentation C/D (2) C/D C/D (3)TBX IP 65 without telealimentation D (1) D D (3)

IP 67 I/O C/DTBX SAP 10 AS-i gateway D D C/DDevices to be connected on Fipway Boxes Connectors

TSX FP ACC4 8

TSX FP ACC14 6

TSX FP ACC3 7

TBX FP ACC10

TSX EF ACC99

TSX FP ACC2 9

TSX FP ACC12 9

TBX BLP01

TBX BLP10

TBX BAS10

Premium D DTSX Micro D DTSX Series 7 model 40 (integrated link) D D C/DTSX Series 7 model 40 (PCMCIA) D DTSX 17 20 D D C/D C/DXBT F Magelis terminals D DMagelis iPC industrial PC D DPC compatible D DLUF P1 Modbus gateway D D C/D C/D

recommended connection C: connection by daisy chaining

possible connection D: connection by tap link(1) Possible if only one TBX IP 65 module is used.(2) The connection by daisy chaining with the TBX FP ACC 10 connection box is only possible with the first TBX module on Fipio bus.(3) The TBX BAS connector is only used for TBX IP 65 output modules.

5/101

5

5.4

Connections (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 5


1 TSX FP CAp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω (8 mm diameter) for normal environments and use inside buildings.

2 TSX FP CFp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω and 1 x 1.5 mm2 pair for remote supply (9.5 mm diameter) for harsh environments and use outside buildings.

3 TSX FP CCp00: tap link cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω ( 8 mm diameter) for normal environments and use inside buildings.

4 TSX FP CG0p0: tap link connecting cable for PCMCIA TSX FPP 10/20 communication card for TSX Micro/Premium/TSX Series 7 PLCs, FT 2100 terminals and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the TSX FP ACC3/ACC4 junction box.

5 TSX FP CE030: tap link connecting cable for TSX FPC 10 or FCP FPC 10 PC communication card (ISA bus) for FTX 517, CCX 77/87 terminals and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4 junction box.

6 TSX FP ACC14: Polycarbonate IP 20 junction box: provides tap link from the trunk cable to connect 1 device via TSX FP CCp00 tap link cable or several devices in a daisy chain.

7 TSX FP ACC3: IP 20 box for connecting 2 PC or PCMCIA cards (TSX FPP 10, TSX FPC 10, TSX FPP 20/200, FCP FPP 10) on a 9-way SUB-D connector.

8 TSX FP ACC4: IP 65 junction box. It also has a 9-way female SUB-D connector for any device which is connected to the bus via a PCMCIA card (in this case, the box is IP 20).TSX EF ACC99: IP 65 junction box for IP 67 I/O modules, see page 3/41.

9 TSX FP ACC2 and TSX FP ACC12: 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection (TSX FP ACC 2 connector for TSX 17 20 micro-PLC for example). Used for daisy chain or tap link connection (90° output high or low, 45° output high or low).

10 TBX BLP01: connector for TBX I/O modules (IP 20).

11 TSX LES65: connecting cable for TSX/PMX model 40 PLCs. Used for address coding.

12 TSX FP ACC6: electrical repeater: used to increase the number of stations (max 64) and the length of the network by creating an additional segment of up to 1000 m (a maximum of 4 repeaters in cascade giving a network length of 5000 m).TSX EF Cppp: dust and damp proof connectors for IP 67 I/O modules, see page 3/41.

13 TSX FP ACC8M: fibre optic/electrical repeater: used to connect electrical segments via a fibre optic link (particularly suitable for zones with a high level of interference) or to connect a fibre optic device.

14 TSX FP ACC7: Line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment.

15 TSX FP JF020: fibre optic jumper (length 2 m). For fibre optic connection of the TSX FP ACC 8M repeater to a patch panel. The maximum length of the fibre optic cable (62.5/125) between 2 repeaters is 3000 m.TSX EF ACC7: line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment requiring IP 67 protection, see page 3/41.TSX FP ACC9: network wiring test tool. This is used for testing the continuity of segments, the connections of the various devices and the installation of line terminators.

Cables

Connection boxes

Connectors

Other elements

5/102

5

5.4



Fipway network/Fipio bus connection accessories (1)Description Use Rep. Reference Weight

kgFemale connector for TSX FPG10p module (TSX 17 micro-PLCs)

Connection by daisy chainingZamac material

9 TSX FP ACC2 0.080

Female isolating connector for devices with 9-way SUB-D connectors

Connection by daisy chainingor tap link black polycarbonate material IP 20

10 TSX FP ACC12 0.040

Insulated bus connection box (black polycarbonate, IP 20)

Trunk cable tap link (for connecting the c 24 V power supply of TBX dust and damp proof modules)

6 TSX FP ACC14 0.120

Trunk cable tap link supports 2 x 9-way SUB-D female connectors (for PCMCIA card cable TSX FP CG 010/030)For connecting c 24 V power supply of TBX dust and damp proof modules

7 TSX FP ACC3 0.090

Dust and damp proof bus connection box (Zamac material, IP 65)

Trunk cable tap link, supports1 x 9-way female SUB-D connector (for PCMCIA card cable TSX FP CG 010/030)

8 TSX FP ACC4 0.660

Trunk cable tap link via 2 M23 connectors Remote c 24 V power distribution via 7/8” connector PC compatible terminal connection via 9-way female SUB-D connector

TSX EF ACC99 0.715

Line terminators(sold in lots of 2)

2 impedance adaptors 14 TSX EF ACC7 0.020

Electrical repeater (IP 65)

Increases the length of the network or bus by allowing the connection of 2 segments of up to 1000 m each

12 TSX FP ACC6 0.520

Electrical/fibre optic repeater (IP 65)

Used to connect (via patch panel) an electrical segment (1000 m max.) and a fibre optic segment (3000 m max.)

13 TSX FP ACC8M 0.620

FIP wiring test tool Used to test each cable segment of the network TSX FP ACC9 0.050

Fipio/Fipway communication cardsPCMCIA cards Type III cards See pages 5/89 and 5/97

ISA bus PC card Fipio/Fipway connection card for PC compatibleCard with short format on ISA busWindows 95/98 and Windows NT4 compatible

TSX FPC10M 0.140

(1) The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus or Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories being used.

TSX FP ACC 12

TSX FP ACC14

TSX FP ACC3

TSX FP ACC4

TSX EF ACC99

5/103

5

5.4

References (continued), Dimensions



Fipway network/Fipio bus connecting cables (1)Description Type Conditions of use Rep. Length Reference Weight

kgTrunk cables 8 mm

1 shielded twisted pair 150 Ω

In normal environment (2) and inside building

1 100 m TSX FP CA100 5.680200 m TSX FP CA200 10.920

500 m TSX FP CA500 30.000

9.5 mm, 1 shielded twisted pair 150 Ω

In harsh environment (3) outside building or in garland (4)

100 m TSX FP CR100 7.680200 m TSX FP CR200 14.920500 m TSX FP CR500 30.000

9.5 mm, 1 shielded twisted pair 150 Ω and 1 x 1.5 mm2 pair for remote supply

I/O IP 67, In normal environment (2) and inside building

– 100 m TSX FP CP100 7.680

500 m TSX FP CP500 30.000

Tap link cables 8 mm, 2 shielded twisted pairs 150 Ω

In normal environment(2) and inside building

3 100 m TSX FP CC100 5.680

200 m TSX FP CC200 10.920500 m TSX FP CC500 30.000

Cable for PCs card 2 shielded twisted pairs

From TSX FPC10M card to TSX FP ACC3/4 box

5 3 m TSX FP CE030 0.410

Fibre optic jumper Double fibre optic 62.5/125

For electrical/fibre optic repeater

15 2 m TSX FP JF020 0.550

(1) The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus/Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories being used.

(2) Normal environment:v without special environmental restrictions,v operating temperature between + 5 °C and + 60 °C,v fixed installations.

(3) Harsh environment: v resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder chips,v up to 100% humidity,v saline environment,v extreme variations in temperature,v operating temperature between - 10 °C and + 70 °C,v mobile installations.

(4) Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 472, part 603/H:v for use on cable drag chain with minimum bend radius of 75 mm,v for use on gantry crane (strikethrough: portal support), subject to compliance with conditions for use such as acceleration, speed, length etc: contact our regional branch office for further information.v not authorized for use on robots, or multi-axis applications.

DimensionsTSX FP ACC4 TSX FP ACC6 TSX FP ACC8M TSX FP ACC14

80

50

20

==

65 80

20

20

= =

RUN DEF ø ¡

175

160

2020

==

50 8325

= =

RUN DEF ø ¡

220

205= =

20

==

50 7925

27 11668

104

5/104

5

5.4

Presentation, characteristics


Uni-Telway bus

The Uni-Telway bus is a standard means of communication between control system components (PLCs, MMI terminals, supervisors, variable speed drives, numerical controllers, weighing equipment, etc.).

It is suitable for architectures designed to manage control and monitoring devices via a PLC, or architectures used for MMI (supervision, etc.).

The Uni-Telway bus requires a master station which manages the allocation of bus access rights to the various connected stations (known as slave stations).

Presentation

CCX 17

TSX Micro

ATV 58

Premium

Uni

-Tel

way

Connections:page 5/106


CharacteristicsPhysical interface RS 485 non isolated

terminal port (TER/AUX)

Premium RS 485 isolated module integrated port (1)

Isolated RS 485/RS 422 PCMCIA card

20 mA CL PCMCIA card

Non-isolated RS 232D PCMCIA card

Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial bus

Link Multidrop Point-to-point

Method of access Master/Slave principle

Transmission Mode Asynchronous transmission in baseband

Data rate 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s 0.3…19.2 Kbit/s

Medium Shielded double twisted pair

Configuration Number of devices 5 max. 28 max. 16 max. 2

Number of connection addresses

8 max. 96 max.(1 device can occupy several datalink addresses)

Length of bus 10 m max., 1,000 m with TSX P ACC 01

1,000 m max. excluding tap links 1300 m max., excluding tap links

15 m (unlimited via modem)

Tap links – 20 m 20 m 15 m –

Service Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation (question/response), of up to 240 bytes (2) initiated by any connected device

Unsolicited point-to-point data, without confirmation, of up to 240 bytes(2) initiated by any connected device

Broadcast messages of up to 240 bytes (2) initiated by the master device

Other functions Transparent communication, via the master, with any device in an X-Way architecture

Diagnostics, debugging, adjustment and programming of PLCs

Security Check character on each frame, acknowledgement and, if required, repetition of messages ensure security of transmission

Monitoring Bus status table, transmission error counters and device status can be accessed by program in each device

Status of the bus and devices connected from the master PLC accessible using PL7 software.

(1) TSX SCY 21601 single format module.(2) Limited to 128 bytes with TSX Micro/Premium PLC terminal port.

5/105

5

5.4

Characteristics (continued), description


Uni-Telway bus

The Uni-Telway bus cycle time depends on: b The number of devices polled (datalink addresses). b The data rate.b The turnaround time of each device.b The number, length and type of messages.

BCT = Bus Cycle Time, is the interval between two polls from the same device.

The curves opposite give the Uni-Telway cycle time as a function of the number of slaves operating at 9.6 Kbit/s or 19.2Kbit/s, with a typical turnaround time of 5 ms per device (excluding messages).

The following table shows the time to be added (in ms) to obtain the true BCT value as a function of the traffic (N = Number of usable characters):

In a distributed control system architecture the application-to-application response time depends not only on the communication system, but also on:

b The processing times of the message source and destination devices.b The degree of asynchronism between the bus and processor cycle times.

This response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application according to the devices which are connected.

The processing time of a device may vary from one to two cycle times depending on the degrees of asynchronism.

TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide various ways of connecting to the Uni-Telway bus.

1 By integrated TSX Micro/Premium processor or Atrium coprocessor portThe AUX port (2) (8-way mini-DIN) has one non-isolated RS 485 serial link channel (maximum distance 10 m).

2 By TSX SCY 21601 integrated port for Premium PLC or Atrium coprocessorThis module has one Half-duplex isolated RS 485 serial link channel, which is multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway.

3 Via multiprotocol PCMCIA card A slot on the TSX 37 21/22/Premium PLC processors, the Atrium coprocessor and the TSX SCY 21601 module (3) accepts the following multiprotocol cards:

v TSX SCP114 PCMCIA cardIsolated RS 485/RS 422 link. This type of card corresponds to the Uni-Telway standard.

v TSX SCP 111 PCMCIA card Non isolated RS 232D link. This type of card can be used for direct point-to-point links or via Modem.

v TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card 20 mA current loop link. This type of card is used for a multidrop link (2 to 16 devices) and requires a c 24V external power supply.

(1) N = Number of usable characters corresponding to the messages to be exchanged.(2) TER port for TSX 37 05/08/10 PLC.(3) This slot can also accept the TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card for Fipway networks, or the

TSX JNP 112/114 PCMCIA card for JNet networks.

Performances

Time (ms)Exchanges at 9.6 Kbit/s at 19.2 Kbit/sMaster to slave 24 + 1.2 N (1) 17 + 0.6 N (1)

Slave to Master 19 + 1.2 N (1) 12 + 0.6 N (1)

Slave to slave 44 + 2.3 N (1) 29 + 1.15 N (1)

1 4 8 12 16 20 24 27

100

200

300

400

1

2

BCT(ms)

1 = 9.6 Kbit/s2 = 19.2 Kbit/s

Event Report

CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1

CT2 CT2

Action

Device 1

Device 2

BCT BCTUni-Telway bus

BCT = Uni-Telway bus cycle timeCT1 = Device 1 bus cycle timeCT2 = Device 2 bus cycle time

DescriptionTSX Micro/Premium PLCs

TSX Micro



1 2

3

TSX SCY 21601Premium

5/106

5

5.4


Uni-Telway bus

1 TSX CSA ppp: bus cable, double shielded twisted pair. The shielding must be connected to the earth of each device.

2 TSX SCA 50: passive T-junction box, matches the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line.

3 TSX SCA 62: passive 2-channel Uni-Telway subscriber socket, is used for coding the address of two connected devices, and matching the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line.

4 TSX SCA 60/61: passive terminal block, used for intermediate devices that have a 15-way female SUB D connector:

v TSX SCA 60 used for intermediate devices,v TSX SCA 61 used for end devices.5 TSX P ACC 01: connection box, used for connecting a TSX Micro/Premium

PLC to the Uni-Telway bus via the PLC terminal port. The connecting cable (length 1 m) is integrated in the connection box. It isolates the signals (for distances >10 m) and is used to match the end of line impedance. It is also used to set the operation of the terminal port (Uni-Telway Master/Slave or character mode).

6 TSX LES 64/74: cable connectors for extensions to the Uni-Telway bus, used to connect TSX model 40 PLC processors that have an integral Uni-Telway port as standard. They are used for coding the address of the connected device.

7 TSX SCP 114 : PCMCIA card for connecting TSX Micro (1)/Premium PLCs to the Uni-Telway bus.

8 TSX SCP CU 4030: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card (on TSX P57 p0M processor or TSX SCY 21601 module) and the TSX SCA 50 junction box.

9 TSX SCY CU 6530: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCY 21601 module integrated channel and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.

10XBT-Z908: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the CCX 17 and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.

11TSX PCX 1031: universal connecting cable between a PC compatible (COM port, 9-way SUB D connector) and the TER or AUX port for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs or the TSX P ACC 01 connection box (8-way mini-DIN connector).

12TSX CSC 015: connecting cable between the TSX 17 micro-PLC (via a TSX 17 ACC 5 adapter or a TSX SCG 1161 module) and TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.

TSX DG UTW E: this manual describes the operating principles and the architectures of the Uni-Telway bus. It is required for setting up and installing the Uni-Telway bus.TSX DR NET E: this manual describes the X-Way architectures, services and address mechanisms. It includes the coding of Uni-TE requests as well as precautions for connecting earths for the networks. It also includes the principles of asynchronous serial transmission.(1) With TSX 37 21/22 PLCs.

Uni-Telway bus wiring system

4

10

2 22

TER AUX

6

7

211

9

3

1

38

5

12

FT 2100TSX 17 20

Adaptor

TSX Micro (TER terminal port)

ATV 38/58

Device

Characteristics:pages 5/104 and 5/105

Description: page 5/105


5/107

5

5.4


Uni-Telway bus

Elements for connection to Uni-Telway busDescription

Protocol Physical layer PLC Addr. Reference (1)

Weightkg

Integrated link on processor

Uni-TelwayCharacter mode

Non isolated RS 485 TSX Micro – Please consult our catalog Modicon TSX Micro automation platform

Premium – See page 1/19

Atrium – See page 1/23

Communication module Uni-TelwayModbus/JbusCharacter mode

1 isolated 2-wire RS 485 integrated channel (channel 0),1 PCMCIA card slot (channel 1) (2)

Premium Atrium

– TSX SCY 21601 0.360

Type III PCMCIA cards for Premium processors, Atrium coprocessors, TSX 37 21/22 PLCs, or TSX SCY 21601 modules

Uni-TelwayModbus/JbusCharacter mode

RS 232 D (9 signals) 0.3…19.2 Kbit/s

7 TSX SCP 111 0.105

RS 485 (RS 422 compatible)1.2…19.2 Kbit/s

7 TSX SCP 114 0.105

20 mA CL1.2…19.2 Kbit/s

7 TSX SCP 112 0.105

Set of X-Way drivers for PC compatibles

Includes all the X-Way driversSee page 6/15

1 CD-Rom – See page 6/15 –

Uni-Telway bus connection accessoriesDescription Use Addr. Reference Weight

kgTerminal port connection box

Isolation of Uni-Telway signals for bus length > 10 m, end of line adaptation, bus cable tap links. Supplied with cable (1 m length) equipped with a mini-DIN connector (TER or AUX ports)

5 TSX P ACC 01 0.690

Passive T-junction box Tap link and extension of bus cable, 2 TSX SCA 50 0.520

Passive 2-channel subscriber socket

2-channel tap link (15-way female SUB-D connector) and extension of bus cable, address coding and end of line adaptation

3 TSX SCA 62 0.570

Active adaptation box RS 232C/RS 485

Connection of an RS 232C device active adapter unit (using Uni-Telway protocol), adaptation and isolation of signals, end of line adaptation (no address coding)

– TSX SCA 72 0.520

Uni-Telway bus connecting cables (3)Description Use Addr. Length Reference

(1)Weight

kgFrom ToDouble shielded twisted pair RS 485 cables

Uni-Telway bus – 1 100 m TSX CSA 100 5.680

200 m TSX CSA 200 10.920

500 m TSX CSA 500 30.000

Cables for isolated RS 485 tap link

TSX SCP 114 card TSX SCA 50 T-jun. box

8 3 m TSX SCP CU 4030 0.160

TSX SCA 62 sub. sock.

– 3 m TSX SCP CU 4530 0.180

TSX SCY 21601 module integrated channel (channel 0)

TSX SCA 50 T-jun. box

– 3 m TSX SCP CU 6030 0.180

TSX SCA 62 sub. sock.

9 3 m TSX SCP CU 6530 0.200

RS 232 terminal port/peripheral device connecting cable

TSX Micro/ Premium or Atrium port or TSX P ACC 01 box (TER or AUX)

RS 232D port for 9-way SUB D type PC compatible

11 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170

USB port of PC – 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –

(1) Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.(2) Type III PCMCIA type III slot for TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 112/114p card(3) For information on other connection cables, please see pages 5/108.

Characteristics:pages 5/104 and 5/105

Description: page 5/105


TSX SCY 21601

TSX SCP 11p

TSX P ACC 01

TSX SCA 50

TSX SCA 62

TSX SCA 72

TSX PCX 1031

5/108

5

5.4

Presentation, description,characteristics


Asynchronous serial links

TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide, via their processor, coprocessor or TSX SCY 21601 communication module, several possible ways for exchanging data in character mode with devices equipped with an asynchronous serial link interface:b RS 485 integrated port.b Type III PCMCIA card with RS 232D, RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) or 20 mA current loop link.Protocols supported are character mode (ASCII), Uni-Telway and Modbus. Other protocols are also available, or can be developed on request, on a RS 485 or RS 232D link, which enables TSX Micro/Premium PLCs to communicate on third-party architectures. These products are offered within the framework of the Schneider Alliances partnership programme. The list of modules available can be obtained from your Regional Sales Office, or from our Internet site www.schneideralliances.com.

1 Via integrated port on the processor or coprocessorThe AUX (1) port (8-way mini-DIN connector) has one non-isolated RS 485 serial link channel (maximum distance 10 m).2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 21601 moduleThis module for Premium PLCs has one isolated RS 485 serial link channel (25-way SUB-D connector). Half duplex multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway.

3 A slot on the processor, coprocessor and on the TSX SCY 21601 module takes cards which comprise:

4 A removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature connector.

5 Two indicator lamps:v ERR lamp: card or link fault,v COM lamp: data transmission or reception.Connector cable to be ordered separately: TSX SCP Cp ppp cable.(1) TER port for TSX Micro TSX 37 05/08/10 PLC.

Presentation

1

3

2

3

1

3

TSX Micro

Premium TSX SCY 21601

5

4

DescriptionIntegrated links

TSX SCP 11p multiprotocol PCMCIA cards

Characteristics Type Non isolated

RS 485 terminal port

Isolated RS 485TSX SCY 21601 integrated port (1)

PCMCIA cardsRS 232D

PCMCIA cards RS 485 RS 422Compatible

PCMCIA cards 20 mA current loop (3)

Physical layer Data rate 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s (2)

1.2…19.2 Kbit/s 0.3…19.2 Kbit/s 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s

Transmission Size 120 characters 4096 characters max.Data 7 or 8 bitsStop bit 1 or 2 bits

Parity bit Even, odd or noneStop on silence

Services Reception echo

Repeat 1st char. echoAuto LFBack space

BeepFlow mgmt by Xon-Xoff

byRTS/CTS

RTS/CTS delayStop on receptionEnd of message

PSR management

Parameters which can be accessed in configuration mode.(1) Half-duplex link in RS 485, Full-duplex in RS 422.(2) With the TSX P57 3p3/453 processor, data rate up to 115 Kbit/s during program uploading.(3) Point-to-point or multidrop link.


5/109

5

5.4

References Modicon Premium automation platformAsynchronous serial links

ReferencesAsynchronous serial link elements (character mode) Description Protocol Physical layer PLC Reference

(1)Weight

kgIntegrated link on processor

Character modeUni-Telway

RS 485 non-isolated

TSX Micro Consult our catalog "Modicon TSX Micro automation platform”

–

Premium See page 1/19 –

Atrium See page 1/23 –

Communication module Character modeUni-TelwayModbus/Jbus

- 1 isolated RS 485 integrated chan. (channel 0),- 1 type III PCMCIA card slot (channel 1) (2)

PremiumAtrium

TSX SCY 21601 –

Type III PCMCIA cards for TSX 37 21/22, PLC,TSX/PCX Premium processor or TSX SCY 21601 module

Character modeUni-TelwayModbus/Jbus

RS 232 D (9 signaux)0,3…19,2 K bits/s

TSX SCP 111 –

RS 485 (compatible RS 422)1,2…19,2 K bits/s

TSX SCP 114 –

BC 20 mA 1,2…19,2 K bits/s

TSX SCP 112 –

Asynchronous serial link connection accessoriesDescription Use Length Reference Weight

kgTerminal port connection box

Isolation of RS 485 signals, end of line adaptation, supplied with cable for connection to PLC

1 m TSX P ACC 01 0.690

Connecting cables for asynchronous serial linksDescription Use


kgCables for isolated RS 485 connection

TSX SCP 114 card RS 485/RS 422 device (3)

3 m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160

Integrated channel (channel 0) module TSX SCY 21601

RS 485/RS 422 device (4) via TSX SCA 50 box

3 m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180

Universal cable for terminal port/RS 232 device

TSX Micro/Premium/Atrium port (TER or AUX) or TSX P ACC 01 box

RS 232D of a terminal device (DTE) (5)

2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170

USB port of PC 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –

Cables for RS 232D connection

TSX SCP 111 card Communication device: modem, converter, (DCE) (4)

3 m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190

Point-to-point terminal device (DTE) (4)

3 m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190

10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620

Cable for BC 20 mA connection

TSX SCP 112 card Current loop device (3)

3 m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160

(1) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.(2) PCMCIA type III slot can receive one TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or

TSX JNP 112/114 card.(3) End of cable fitted with flying leads.(4) End of cable fitted with a 25-way male SUB-D connector.(5) End of cable fitted with a 9-way male SUB-D connector. For use, to order separatly one

TSX CTC 10 adaptator (9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way male SUB-D connectors).

Premium

TSX Micro

TSX SCY 21601

TSX SCP 11p

TSX P ACC 01

TSX PCX 1031




5/110

5

5.4


Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports

TSX Micro/PremiumPLC

Device to be connected

Physical link Protocol Length Reference Weightkg

TSX SCP 111PCMCIA card

DTE terminal 2 RS 232D Character mode 3 m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190

10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620

DCE terminal (Modem...) 2

RS 232D Character mode Uni-Telway

3 m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190


TSX SCA 50T-junction box 3

RS 485 (2-wire isolated)

Character mode Uni-Telway

3 m TSX SCP CU 4030 0.160

RS 422/485 (2-wire isolated)

Character mode Modbus

3 m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160

TSX SCA 622-channel subscriber socket 4


Uni-Telway 3 m TSX SCP CU 4530 0.160

TSX SCA 642-channel subscriber socket 4

RS 422/485 (2/4 wire)

Modbus 3 m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180

DTE Terminal 3 RS 422/485 (4-wire)

Modbus 3 m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160


Active or passive terminal 3

20 mA current loop

Character mode Uni-TelwayModbus

3 m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160

TER/AUX ports TSX P ACC 01junction box

RS 485 Uni-Telway 1 m Included with TSX P ACC 01

TSX P ACC 01junction box 5

RS 485 Uni-Telway 2 m T FTX CB1 020 0.100

5 m T FTX CB1 050 0.190

DTE terminal (PC, printer) 6

RS 232 Character mode 2,5 m TSX PCX 1031 (1) 0.170

7 RS 232 Character mode 2,5 m TSX PCX 3030 –

1 25-way male miniature connector.2 25-way male SUB-D connector.3 Flying leads.

4 15-way male SUB-D connector.5 8-way female mini-DIN connector.6 9-way female SUB-D connector.7 USB type connector.

(1) Separate parts see page 5/111.

1

5/111

5

5.4


Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports

TSX Micro/Premium PLC

Device to be connected

Physical link Protocol Length Reference Weightkg

TER/AUX ports (contin.) DTE terminal (slave PC ) 2

RS 232RS 485

Uni-Telway 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170

3 RS 232RS 485

Uni-Telway 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –

DTE terminal (printer, slave PC without RTS)

2

RS 232 Character modeUni-Telway

2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 (1) 0.170

3 RS 232 Character modeUni-Telway

2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –

DCE terminal (Modem M/Sl. USA/Europe) 4

RS 232 Character modeUni-Telway

3 m TSX PCX 1130 (2) 0.140

CCX 17, panel, XBT terminal 5

RS 485 Uni-Telway 2.5 m XBT Z968 0.180

5 m XTB Z9681 0.340

TSX SCY 21601 communication module integrated port 5

TSX SCA 50 T-junction box 6


Uni-Telway 3 m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180

Modbus/Jbus 3 m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180

TSX SCA 62 2-channel subscriber socket 7


Uni-Telway 3 m TSX SCY CU 6530 0.200

RS 485 terminal 6


Character mode 3 m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180

Separate partsDescription Description Reference Weight

kgSUB-D adapter 9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way female SUB-D connectors TSX CTC 07 0.060

9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way male SUB-D connector TSX CTC 10 0.060

1 8-way female mini-DIN connector.2 9-way female SUB-D connector. 3 USB type connector.

4 9-way male SUB-D connector.5 25-way male SUB-D connector6 Flying leads.7 15-way male SUB-D connector

(1) To be ordered separatly: TSX CTC 07 and TSX CTC 10 adapters, see above separate parts.(2) Point to point, supplied wih 1 SUB-D adapter: TSX CTC 09 9-way female/25-way male SUB-D connector.

1

5/112

5

5.4

The Jnet network enables an automatic exchange of data between several Series 1000, SMC 50/600 and Premium PLCs, using the shared table service (exchange by each PLC of a memory zone, internal words, broadcast zone, to other PLCs on the network), see page 5/85.

The Jnet network services exchange data between Series 1000, SMC 50/600 and Premium PLCs. The principle is based on broadcasting of a local zone by each PLC (word memory zone), which is automatically copied to other PLCs on the network ; no explicit programming for exchanges is required.

Premium PLCs are connected to the Jnet network using type III PCMCIA communication cards:b TSX JNP 112 card for which the physical layer is a 20 mA current loop serial link.b TSX JNP 114 card for which the physical layer is a RS 485 serial link.

These PCMCIA cards are installed in the host slot 1 on the TSX SCY 21601 module of communication.

TSX JNP cards comprise:2 A protective cover.3 A removable cover avec vis de fixation (accès au connecteur miniature 20

contacts.4 Two indicator lamps:v ERR: card or link fault,v COM: activity on the line.

Connectors to be ordered separately: v TSX SCP CM 4030/CM 4530/CX 2030 cable.

Presentation

Jnet

Premium April 5000 April 2000 April 3000 April 7000 SMC 50/600

Description

1

2 3

4

CharacteristicsStructure Type Inter-PLC network

Topology Bus with passive tap linksMethod of access Circulation by token

Physical interface RS 485 2 wire, 20 mA CL

Transmission Mode Half duplex on 2 wiresFormat 8 bits, no parity, 1 stopData rate 92.2 Kbps

Medium Shielded twisted pair

Configuration Number of devices 32 (16 if the network includes SMC PLCs)Length of bus 1300 m maximum without tap linksTap links 15 m maximum

Services Data exchanged Distributed database:

- 128 16-bit words for a network with 32 stations (Series 1000/Premium),- 64 16-bit words for a network including SMC PLCs.

Monitoring Network nominal duty control indicator lamp



Jnet network

Presentation, description, characteristics

5/113

5

5.4

TSX SCA 50

TSX JNP 112/114

TSX SCA 64

Installation procedures and access to the Jnet module configuration screen are identical to those for any PCMCIA type communication module, using PL7 Junior/Pro software.

Configuration of a Jnet PCMCIA card is accessed using the screen below:

Stations communicate between themselves automatically once they are configured and connected to the same Jnet network.

A debug screen is also linked to the module. It gives the following information:

b Status of each station (RUN/STOP/ABSENT).b Transmission error counter.

Software configuration

ReferencesConnection elements to Jnet networkDescription Number per

PLCUse Physical layer Reference

(1)Weight

kgJnet type III PCMCIA

3 maximum Type III slot on TSX SCY 21601module

20 mA CL19.2 Kbps

TSX JNP 112 0.110

RS 485 19.2 Kbps

TSX JNP 114 0.110

Connection accessoriesDescription Use Power supply Reference

(1)Weight

kg2-channel subscriber socket (2 or 4-wire) (2)

Tap link of 2 x 2-wire devices Tap link of 1 Master device and/or 1 x 4-wire Slave device Fitted with 2 x 15-way female SUB-D connectors

– TSX SCA 64 0.570

Line terminators (sold in lots of 2)

Connection to the front panel of TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket 2/4-wire cabling

– TSX SCA 10 0.030

T-junction box Connection to RS 485 viatap link (Tee)

Passive TSX SCA 50 0.520

Connection cablesDescription Use


kgCables for isolated RS 422/485 tap link

TSX JNP 114 card

TSX SCA 50 box 2-wire (3)

3 m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160

TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket 2/4-wire

3 m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180

Cable for 20 mA CL tap link

TSX JNP 112 card

Multidrop Modbus (3)

3 m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160

(1) Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.(2) 2 or 4-wire cabling, compatible with TSX SCA 64 subscriber sockets requires the use of a

Modbus cable with an external diameter of 10 mm maximum.(3) Cable end fitted with flying leads.





Jnet network

Software configuration, references

5/114

5

5.5


INTERBUS bus

The INTErBUS bus is a serial link type fieldbus for sensors and actuators which conforms to the requirements of an industrial environment.

The topology of the INTERBUS bus is designed as a ring system with master/slave central access procedure.

It is subdivided into three parts:

b The remote bus 1 (bus devices use RS 485 point-to-point connection).

b The installation remote bus 2 (remote bus tap link via a bus terminal module). Its technology is particularly suitable for IP 65 dust and damp proof systems.

b The local bus with TTL technology is particularly suitable for buses within a control cabinet.

Each bus subscriber comprises a transmitter and a receiver.The INTErBUS system is like a data ring and has the structure of a shift register distributed on the bus. With its registers, each module constitutes a component of this shift register ring. The INTErBUS master circulates the data in series on this ring.

Presentation

1 2

E/S IP 65

Installation remote bus module

ATV 58 c 24 V

Installation remote bus module

Bus terminal module

c 24 V E/S IP 65

Premium/Atrium

Quantum

Momentum




5/115

5

5.5

Description,connectable devices


INTERBUS bus

Premium PLCs are connected to the INTERBUS bus via the TSX IBY 100 INTERBUS bus module. The TSX IBX 100 communication coprocessor can be used to connect a Atrium T PCX coprocessor integrated in a PC compatible to the InterBus bus.

The front panel on the TSX IBY 100/IBX 100 module comprises:

1 A display block with 6 indicator lamps (on the card for the TSX IBX 100).

2 A 9-way female RS 232 SUB-D connector: CMD Tool software support (configuration software).

3 A 9-way female RS 485 SUB-D connector: InterBus link (this connector integrates an additional power supply for the fibre optic link).

The TSX IBY 100 module or the TSX IBX 100 card acts as the master on the INTERBUS bus, other Schneider Electric devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are:

b ATV 38/58 variable speed drives for asynchronus motors.

b Telefast IP 20 I/O interfaces.

b Momentum IP 20 I/O.

b Distributed discrete dust and damp proof I/O (IP 65).

b Inductel inductive identification systems (XGP/XGK-S read/write stations).

b AS-Interface/INTERBUS gateway.

b Any third-party device conforming to InterBus standard profiles.

Description1

2

3

1

2

3

Connectable devices




5/116

5

5.5

Characteristics,software configuration


INTERBUS bus

The INTERBUS bus can be configured in 3 modes:

b Auto mode: This mode does not require the use of any special configuration software (I/O images are copied to %IW, %QW implicitly). It facilitates the wiring check.

b Mode PL7 V IBY mode: This mode is used to define and load the configuration to the module (explicit assignment of %IW, %QW). The CMD Tool software (1) is required in order to generate the configuration text file.

b CMD V IBY mode: Reserved for configurations > 8 K words, and requires the use of the CMD Tool software.

PMS message handling (usable on PCP devices) is managed via standard OFs (Read-var, Write-var, etc).

The catalogue file which enables Schneider Electric devices to be integrated in the CMD Tool software is available on our Web site:

b Address: www.schneiderautomation.comb File for downloading: Schneider device catalog for CMD.

(1) Contact your Phœnix Contact vendor.

Characteristics of the bus supported by TSX IBY 100 modules or TSX IBX 100 coprocessorsType of bus Remote bus Installation rmote

busLocal bus INTERBUS loop


Physical interface RS 485 RS 485 with c 24 V in cable

TTL Combined interface (vertically mounted signal and c 24 V power supply)

Method of access Master/slave

Transmission Mode NRZ

Data rate 500 K bit/s

Medium - Twisted pair- Fibre optic- Wave guide rail- Infra-red- Rotating collector

Special cable for:Sensor and I/O module 24V power supplyData transmission

Special cable 2 x 1.5 mm2

Physical configuration Length of segment 400 m maxi – – 200 m max. in the loopMaximum length of cable between:

- Module and the 1st bus terminal module: 400 m- 2 bus term.modules: 400 m

- Bus terminal module and 1st module: 50 m- 2 modules: 50 m

- Bus terminal module and 1st module: 1.5 m- 2 modules: 1.5 m

- Bus terminal module and 1st interface: 20 m- 2 modules: 10 m

Module and last station on the remote bus: 12.8 km

The bus terminal module and last module: 50 m

Bus terminal module and last module: 10 m

Bus terminal module and last module: 100 m

Number of tap links 16 maxi – – 1 loop per bus terminal module

Number of bus terminal modules 254 maxi – – –

Number of slaves 512 maxi Total current of connected modules: 4.5 A max.

8 63

Number of I/O 3872 I/3872 O max. (4096 I/O in total)

– – –

INTERBUS services Implicit exchange of process date: 242 %IW and 242 %QW

Pre-processingLogical addressingSegmentation





5/117

5

5.5


INTERBUS bus

ReferencesINTERBUS bus modulesDescription No. of modules

per PLC/PCCommunica-tion profil

Services Reference (1) Weightkg

INTERBUS module for Premium PLC

1 with TSX 57 20 2 with TSX 57 302 with TSX 57 40

Master/slave0.5 M bpsGeneration 4

- cyclical variable exchanges- PMS messaging- bus operating modes management

TSX IBY 100 0.320

INTERBUS coprocessor for PCX coprocessor

1 with T PCX 57 203M2 with T PCX 57 353M

Master/slave 0.5 M bpsGeneration 4

cyclical variable exchanges- PMS messaging- bus operating modes management

TSX IBX 100 0.280

Converter softwareDescription Use Reference (1) Weight

kgSymbol converter software

Used to convert CMD symbols into PL7 symbols TLX LIBS CNVE –

Bus connection elementsDescription Use Length Reference (1) Weight

kgMomentum communica-tion module

Momentum I/O base units on INTERBUS bus

– 170 INT 110 00 –

Remote bus cables

– 100 m TSX IBS CA 100 –

400 m TSX IBS CA 400 –

Installation remote bus cables

Preformed cables for linking 2 communication modules

0.110 m 170 MCI 007 00 –

1 m 170 MCI 100 00 –

Connecting cable

TSX IBp to PC connection (with CMD Tool software)

6 m 990 NAA 263 20 –

15 m 990 NAA 263 50 –

9-way SUB-D connectors (sold in lots of 2)

Remote bus cables – 170 XTS 009 00 0.045

(1)Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.

TSX IBY 100

TSX IBX 100

170 INT 110 00




5/118

5

5.5

The Profibus DP bus is a high-speed fieldbus which conforms to industrial communication requirements.The Profibus DP is a linear bus with a centralised access procedure of the master/slave type. Only master stations, also known as active stations, have access rights to the bus. The slave or passive stations can only respond to prompts. Dialogue between masters is also possible from some stations by means of a token bus protocol. The physical connection is a single shielded twisted pair, but fibre optic interfaces are available to create tree, star, or ring structures. Compared to the ISO model, only layers 1, 2 are implemented, since access from the user interface is made directly to the link layer via simple mapping of variables.

The Profibus DP bus is configured usind dedicating SyCon software, which should be ordered separatly, reference SYS SPU LFp CD28M.This sofware is used to generate the file including the informations relating to the devices connected. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the PL7 Junior/Pro programming software.

Premium PLCs (TSX/PCX 57) are connected to the Profibus DP bus by a TSX PBY 100 module. This module can be installed in any slot in the Premium PLC rack. It comprises:

1 Host module for the PCMCIA card.2 Profibus DP PCMCIA card with its integral connecting cable, 0.6 m long.3 T-junction box enabling the tap link of the main bus 490 NAE 911 00.

The TSX PBY 110 module performs the role of the master on the Profibus DP bus. The Telemecanique devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are:b TeSys model U starter-controllers, via Modbus gateway.b Advantys STB and Momentum distributed I/O.b Advantys FTB/FTM, IP 67 monobloc and modular I/O spliter boxes.b Altivar 31/58/58F/68, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors.b Twin Line TLC and Lexium MHDA servodrives for brushless motors.b Altistart ATS 48 soft starters.b …And any third-party device which conforms to the Profibus DP standard profile.

Presentation

MomentumThird part

ATVThird partWith PL7 and DP software

Premium

X-Way

PLC with PL7 and DP software

Repeaters (3 maxi)

Configuration

Description

1 2 3

Connectable devices

Presentation,description,connectable devices


Profibus DP bus

5/119

5

5.5

Characteristics,references


Profibus DP bus

Characteristics of the bus supported by the moduleType of bus Profibus DP


Physical interface RS 485

Method of access Master

Transmission Mode NRZ

Medium Shielded twisted pair, fibre optic, infra-red

Physical configuration Data rate v to 9.6 K bit/s with the length of 1200 m (4800 m with 3 repeaters) v from 12 M bit/s with the length of 100 m (400 m with 3 repeaters)

Number of slaves 126

Number of inputs/outputs 3872 inputs/3872 outputs (242 %IW words, 242 %QW words)

Services (VO) Subset of Class 1 master function

Read/write DP slave I/O dataTransfer slave diagnostic dataSet slave parameters (on power-up)Check slave configurations (on power-up)

Subset of Class 2 master function

Manage monitoring requests: Global_CONTROL et Get_Master_Diagmaster/master dialogue is not supported

TSX PBY 100

490 NAD 911 03

ReferencesDescription Communication

profileServices Reference Weight

kgProfibus DP module kit for Premium PLC and Atrium coprocessor

Master/slave12 Mbit/s

Class 1 and Class 2 V0 master functions, see characteristics Profibus FMS message handling not supported

TSX PBY 100 0.870

SyCon V2.8 configuration software

– Generates an ASCII configuration file for the module to be imported into the PL7 application

See page 5/65 –

Elements for connection to Profibus DP busDescription Use Reference Weight

kgDistributed I/O on Profibus DP Advantys STB

network interface module

STB NDP 2112 0.140

Momentum communication module

170 DTN 110 00 –

Connectors for communication module Line terminator 490 NAD 911 03 –

Intermediate connection

490 NAD 911 04 –

Intermediate connection and terminal port

490 NAD 911 05 –

Description Length Reference Weightkg

Profibus DP connecting cables 100 m TSX PBS CA 100 –

400 m TSX PBS CA 400 –

6/0

6

6/1

6

Contents 6 - PL7 software 6

6 - Programming softwareSelection guide programming softwares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2

b PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4

b Integrated diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/20

b PL7 SMC application converter software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/22

b PL7 DIF application comparison software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/24

b SDKC language C function development software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/26

b PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/28

b OFS data server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30

6/2

6


Programming softwares

Applications Application development and installation

Type of PLC TSX Micro TSX Micro/Premium/Atrium

ServicesProgramming YesDebugging YesAdjustment Yes

Instruction list YesLadder language YesGrafcet language Yes Yes (with macro-steps for Premium)Structured text language Yes YesDFBs function blocks No Use (for Premium/Atrium) Creation/use for Premium/

Atrium Fonctional view No No Yes (Premium/Atrium)Import/export od function modules No No Yes (Premium/Atrium)Diagnostic DFBs No No Yes (Premium/Atrium)Runtime screens Creation/use

Functions Development debugging of applications with:b A broswer accessing all the application componentsb Dedicated editorsb Two types of application structure: single task or multitaskb Master and fast tasks divided into sectionsb Possibility of selecting the desired language in each sectionb Debugging simplified by automatic creation of animation tables

For Premium:b Use of Grafcet macro-stepsb Application split into function modulesb Use of function blocks: DFBs reusable in any

application in order to improve application legibility and development

b Creation of runtime screens (synoptics, text, values) which are displayed depending on the state of the process in order to simplify operation and control of an installation

b Diagnostic “viewer”

Name of software PL7 Micro PL7 Junior PL7 Pro

Type of software TLX CD PL7M P 44M TLX CD PL7J P 44M TLX CD PL7P P 44M

Pages 6/18

6/3

6

6

Application conversion Development of functions in C language

Comparison of PL7 Premium applications

Availability of Premium applications

Development of a multi-PLC data server

Premium/Atrium Nano/TSX Micro/ Premium/Atrium Quantum/Momentum/ TSX Series 7/April

Conversion of SMC PLC applications for TSX Micro/Premium PLC applications:b Selection of sequences to

translate into Ladder language.

b Conversion of symbol database.

b Reassignment of I/Ob Conversion report.

PL7 Junior/Pro software required.

Enhances the library of PL7 functions by developing functions in C language:b Creation of functions

families.b Development of functions

in C langage.b Debugging of functions

(step by step, breakpoints, …)

b Generation of disks for installation on over PL7 stations.

b Use of new functions in applications.

Automatic comparison of 2 Premium applications with identification of all the differences.

PL7 Pro software required.

Continuity of operation in a Premium PLC redundant architecture automate Premium.Possible to have shared I/O on a Fipio bus or redundant I/OTypical “Normal/Backup” changeover time: 1 to 2 s

Development of a multi-PLC data server accessible by “Client” applications:b Access to server in local

or remote mode.b Access to variables in the

form of symbols in one or more PLCs.

b Management of Uni-TE and Modbus protocols.

b Programming in Visual Basic or C++.

b Simulates access to variables for debugging.

PL7 SMC PL7 SDKC PL7 DIF Warm Standby OFS

TLX LC SMC PL7 40M TLX L SDKC PL7 41M TLX CD PL7 DIF 41 TLX CD WSBY P 40F TLX CD OFS 30M

6/23 6/27 6/25 4/70 6/33

Other software:v PL7 FUZ, software for fuzzy logic processing for TSX Micro/Premium platforms: TLX L PL7 FUZ 34 M, see page 6/29.v SyCon, CANopen machine bus configuraor (TSX Micro/Premium) and INTERBUS fieldbus (Quantum) and Profibus DP (Premium/Quantum):

SYS SPU LFp CD28M, see page 5/65.

6/4

6

Offer,new developments


PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software

To meet the evolving hardware and software needs of our customers, Schneider Electric introduces PL7 version 4.4 programming software for the Modicon TSX Micro and Modicon Premium platforms.

Modicon TSX Micro automation enhancements

CANopen connectivityMicro TSX 37 21 and 37 22 PLC communications are enriched with the addition of a CANopen machine bus, made possible through the use of a PCMCIA card equipped with a cable (length 0.5m) and a tap junction (with 9-way SUB-D connector). This TSX CPP 110 kit allows a direct link to the bus and ensures the role of the master on the CANopen bus. The PCMCIA card is inserted into the reserved communication card slot that is available on the TSX 37 21 and TSX 37 22 CPU.

Extension memory sizeIn order to extend the memory of existing applications or to create more complex applications, the memory capacity of TSX 37 21/22 PLCs can be extended from 64 Kwords to 128 Kwords (program and constants). The CPU bases are capable of receiving 3 different memory cards:b 128 Kwords application RAM memory TSX MRP 0128P.b 128 Kwords application Flash EPROM memory TSX MRF 0128P. b 128 Kwords application and 128 Kwords data storage RAM memory TSX MRP 2128P.

SyCon configuration software for CANopen machine busA version of PL7 Micro programming software (1-station) is available with SyCon configuration software for the CANopen machine bus (reference TLX CD PL7M PC44M).

Modicon Premium automation enhancements

CANopen connectivityb The Premium TSX P57 103M low-end processor has CANopen machine bus connectivity via the use of the new TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card (see “CANopen connectivity” for TSX Micro platform, above). This new card is compatible with all Premium processors and Atrium coprocessors (except TSX P57 153M processor with embedded Fipio bus link).

New application-specific modules:b TSX CSY 164 SERCOS motion control module. PL7 version 4.4 Junior/Pro software makes it possible for this module to individually declare the 16 channels as real axes, imaginary axes or remote axes. This new 16-channel module is in addition to the current TSX CSY 84 module with 8 real axes.b TSX WMY 100 FactoryCast HMI Ethernet module. This new Ethernet TCP/IP module with embedded Web server offers additional HMI web services compared to current modules (TSX ETH 110WS/4103/5103). New features include acquisition of PLC data in the HMI database of the module, Email with automatic messaging on events, math and logic functions, and connection to relational databases.

PL7 Micro Junior/Pro software version 4.4 software enhancements

PL7 version 4.4 enables new TSX Micro/Premium modules to take advantage of additional functionalities:b PL7 software registrations by the Internet, electronic mail, fax or phone (obligatory registration before 22nd day).b Change in the Fipio catalogue for Momentum distributed I/O.b Transfer of PL7 user rights between PCs via floppy disk or network.b Enriched export files of the data application (FEF) for better compatibility with Unity software after migration.

PL7 Micro Junior/Pro software packages are offered according to two alternatives depending on the type of PLCs/PC cable: connection on the RS 232C port, or the USB port of a PC.

TSX CPP 110

TSX CSY 164 TSX WMY 100


Setup, language:pages 6/6 to 6/11

Functions:pages 6/12 to 6/15


Reference:pages 6/18 to 6/19

6/5

6



PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software packages are designed for Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP (1) operating systems and therefore benefit from all the facilities relating to these:

More user-friendly and productive ergonomics thanks to:

b Access to contextual menus by right-clicking with the mouse for fast access to the services available for the selected object.b Contextual help: direct access to help correspondingto the selected object.b Tool tips: explanatory messages appear when skimming over the toolbar buttons.

Furthermore, some important functions make the software easier and safer to use:

The multi-instance function enables several applications to be worked on simultaneously.

This function enables: b Several different applications present on the PC to be opened in offline mode in order to check or copy data.b Debugging of two (or more) applications on two PLCs present on the same network in on-line mode. This is particularly useful when debugging inter-PLC communication functions.

Use of the various PL7 software functions can be limited and controlled by managing the access rights. There are 5 user profiles (differentiated by passwords) which characterize the functions available to users on the programming terminal. The profiles range from read-only access to an application (lowest profile) to full programming (profile with the most rights).

PL7 Pro software can be launched in OLE Automation server mode from a third-party client application. In this case, certain PL7 program functions can be executed following commands sent by an OLE client application. This instance of the program then no longer reacts to commands from the operator keyboard. Server mode can be launched in offline mode (COM) if both programs are on the same machine, or in remote mode (DCOM), if the programs are installed on different machines.

The commands available are as follows: b Manage an execution context (open/close an application, modification of the address and driver of the connected PLC; PLC status).b Control the PLC (connection/disconnection, send a RUN/STOP/INIT command, program uploading/downloading).b Read data (application or symbol export only in source format, read symbol/comment associated with an address, read application identity).

(1) However, compatibility with the Windows 95 operating system is no longer provided and USB port is not compatible with Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0.

Presentation

Ergonomics of the software

Multi-instance

Management of access rights

Application serverTerminal PC

ClientTerminal PC

Serveur

ApplicatifsClient

PL7

Premium

TSX Micro

OLE

Aut

om

atio

n

Fipway

OLE

Aut

om

atio

n





6/6

6

Setup Modicon Premium automation platform 6


Access to all programming and debug tools is gained via the application browser.This gives a global view of the program and enables all the application components to be accessed quickly via contextual menus.

1 Configuration editor.2 Program editor.3 DFB user function block editor.4 Variable editor.5 Animation table editor.6 Documentation editor.7 Operating screen editor.

In order to make programs more comprehensible, the FAST and MAST tasks are split into sections. Each section 1 has a name, a comment and is programmed in one of the four languages available in PL7.A section programmed in Grafcet language can contain a main chart 2 and macro-steps 3. Version u V4.0 of PL7 allows comments to be added to each macro-step. To protect intellectual property or avoid any unwarranted modification, each section can be write-protected or read/write-protected.

PL7 Pro software can be used to structure an application for a Premium platform into functional modules that are broken down into sections (program code), animation tables and operating screens. Independently of the multitask structure of the PLC, the designer can define a multilevel tree structure of the automation application.At each level, it is possible to attach program sections written in Ladder language (LD), Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Grafcet (SFC), and animation tables.

Two types of view are available at all times:

b A representation showing a tree structure of modules can provide a breakdown according to consistent functions in relation to the process to control.b The classic representation of the application browser provides a view of the execution order of the program sections for each PLC.

The operation services associated with the functional view are available in one or the other view. In particular, a single command can be used to force whether or not a functional module is executed.In this case, every section attached to the functional module is automatically forced.

All or part of the tree structure can be exported into functional modules.In this case, all program sections of the different module levels are exported.During an import, an assistant can be used to reassign the data associated with the module in stages.

Application creation and debug toolsApplication browser (conventional view)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Concept of sections and Grafcet enhancement

1

2

3

Function views of an application

Exporting/importing functional modules





6/7

6

Setup (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 6


The configuration editor intuitively and graphically enables the declaration and configuration of the various components of the TSX Micro/Premium PLC application: b Processor, coprocessor.b Tasks.b Application-specific I/O modules.b Memory.b ...By clicking on an unconfigured position, the display of a dialog box shows the available I/O modules, classed according to family. Once the various modules are positioned, selecting them accesses parameter entry for each module.

The configuration editor can also be used to set the software parameters of the application: choice of the number of constants, number of internal words and the number of each type of function block.The configuration editor provides access to parameter entry for the function blocks. The copy/paste function for these parameters is available from version u V4.0 of the PL7 software onwards.

When programming in Grafcet language, the configuration editor can define Grafcet objects (steps, macro-steps, etc.) and execution parameters (number of steps and active transitions).

A number of tools are provided as standard for setting up the various applications: discrete I/O, analog I/O, counting, motion control (1), man-machine interface (MMI), communication, weighing (1), Warm Standby redundancy (2). The parameter screens for the application-specific functions are accessed from the I/O configuration screen by clicking on the position in which the module has been defined.The screens enable the main operating characteristics of the chosen application to be defined, for example:

b Filter values for discrete I/O.b Voltage or current range for analog I/O.b Threshold values for counting.b Path of axes for position control.b Calibration change during weighing.b Transmission speed for communication.

(1) PL7 Junior/Pro function available on a Premium platform.(2) PL7 Junior/Pro function available on a Premium platform based on a TSX P57 353/453

processor (version with integrated Fipio link).

Configuration editorHardware configuration


Configuration of Grafcet objects

Setup of application-specific functions





6/8

6

Software structure Modicon Premium automation platform 6


PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers two types of structure: b Single task: this is the simplified structure offered by default, where a single master task consisting of a main program, comprising several sections and subroutines, is executed.b Multitask: this structure, which is better suited to high-performance real-time applications, consists of a master task, a fast task and event-triggered tasks, which have the highest priority. Master and fast tasks are divided into sections.

PL7 program tasks comprise several parts called sections and subroutines. Each section can be programmed in the appropriate language for the processing to be carried out.Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program modules can easily be generated or added.

Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from other subroutines in the same task.

There are two types of cyclic execution: b Normal cyclic execution. This is the default option.b Periodic execution. This type of execution, as well as the period, are selected by the user during configuration.

At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches the execution of a new scan. The execution time of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value is defined by the user.

In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing: b The scan to stop immediately (STOP).b A display on the front panel of the PLC.b The alarm relay of the main rack power supply to be set to 0.

A new scan is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the scan must be less than the time of the period defined (1 to 255 ms). In the event of overrun, the latter is stored in a system bit (%S19), which can be set to 0 by the user (by program or by the terminal).

A software watchdog which can be configured by the user monitors the scan time. In the event of overrun, an execution fault is signaled (see normal execution).

Software structure

Structured and modular programmingMast

Sas(LD)

PRE(LD)

Furnace_1(Grafcet)

CHART

POST(IL)

Cleaning(ST)

SR0 SR0Alarm_Cleaning(ST)

Alarm_Furnace(ST)

Safety_Mon(LD)

Fast

Alarm_Sas(LD)

Simple task software structure

Normal execution (cyclic)

RUN STOP

Program processing

Input acquisition(%I)

Internalprocessing

Update ofoutputs (%O)

Periodic execution

Launchof the period

Input acquisition(%I)

RUN STOPProgram

processing

Update ofoutputs (%O)

Internalprocessing

End of period





6/9

6

Software structure (continued) Modicon Premium automation platform 6


PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a Multitask software structure, consisting of: b A master task (divided into sections, one of which may contain Grafcet). b A fast task (divided into sections).b One or more event-triggered tasks (only one section per task).These tasks are independent and are executed in "parallel", with the PLC processor managing the execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast task cycle:b The current execution of lower priority tasks is stopped.b The event-triggered task or the fast task is executed.b The interrupted task takes over again when processing of the priority task is completed.

This structure can optimize use of the processing power, and can be used to structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as it is possible to write and debug each task independently of the others.

This compulsory task, which executes the main program, is periodic or cyclic (see single task structures). It is activated systematically. It is intended for sequential processing. Each section can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language. One section is dedicated to Grafcet language; when this language is chosen, 3 processing operations are proposed: b Preliminary processing (PRE) is programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language and processes initializations on power return, operating mode modifications, input logic.b Sequential processing (CHART) includes the graphic transcription and management of Grafcet charts. It provides access to processing of the actions and transition conditions.b Post-processing (POST). This is programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language and is used to process all the instructions from the 2 preceding processing operations and the indirect safety functions specific to the outputs.

This task, which is higher priority than the master task, is periodic in order to leave time for execution of the lower priority task. Processing operations in this task must be as short as possible so as not to adversely affect the master task. It is useful when fast periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored.Each section of this task can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language.

Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to a period. Their execution is triggered by an event occurring in an application-specific module (eg.: overrun of a counter threshold, change in state of a discrete input). These tasks have higher priority than all other tasks, and they are therefore suitable for processing operations requiring very short response times to the occurrence of an event.They can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language.Number of EVTi control events: b TSX Micro PLCs: 8 events with TSX 37 10 and 16 events with TSX 37 21/22.b Premium PLCs: 32 events with TSX 57 10 and 64 events with TSX 57 20/30/40 and PCX 57 20/30.TSX Micro TSX 37 21/22 and Premium PLCs have 2 priority levels (EVT0 event has priority over other EVTi events).

Multitask software structure

SR0

Master taskFast task

Event triggered tasks

SR0

Priority + ... –

Alarm_Sas(LD)

Safety_Mon(LD)

Alarm_Furnace(ST)

Alarm_Cleaning(ST)

Sas(LD)

Furnace_1(LD)

Drying(LD)

PRE(LD)

CHARTPOST(IL)

Master task

Fast task

Event triggered tasks





6/10

6

Ladder language,structured text language



Programs written in Ladder language consist of a series of rungs which are executed sequentially by the PLC. Each rung may be: b Identified by a label.b Completed by a comment of up to 222 characters. A rung consists of 7 lines on TSX Micro and 16 lines on Premium, with 11 columns, allowing a maximum of 10 contacts and one coil per line.

The Ladder language editor offers several tools for constructing rungs in a user- friendly way: b A palette of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols of the language via the mouse or the keyboard: contacts, Boolean logic, coils, operation blocks, predefined function blocks…

b A rung can be drawn without having to fill in each element.b The language objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format. b The symbol and address of each object can be displayed simultaneously.b A rung is constructed simply by selecting the symbol from the graphic palette and placing it in the correct position in the grid on-screen.b An automatic link line function optimizes the number of user actions.The Ladder language editor is used to call up immediately the functions which assist data entry: b Access to function libraries.b Access to the variables editor.b Cut, copy, paste.

Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language which is particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations, message handling, etc.

Structured Text language enables direct transcription of a flowchart analysis and is organized into statements. Each statement consists of a label (1000 labels max), comments (256 characters max) and instructions.There are four methods for controlling statements:b Conditional action IF.b Conditional iterative action WHILE (action repeated while a condition is true).b Conditional iterative action REPEAT (action repeated until a condition is true).b Repetitive action FOR (action repeated a certain number of times).

The editor enables statements to be entered one after another.The editor provides help with entering:b Modifications, insertion, etc.b Cut, copy, paste.Objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format.

Different colors are used for the objects, language key words and program comments to make it easier to read.

Ladder language (LD)Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered task)

Program editor: Ladder language

Structured Text language (ST)

Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered task)

Program editor: Structured Text language





6/11

6

Grafcet language,Instruction List language



Grafcet language is used to describe, in a simple and graphic manner, the sequential part of control systems. It corresponds to the SFC "sequential function chart" language described in standard IEC 1131-3.

Grafcet SFC language is only used in one section of the master task. This is structured in three processing operations, see page 6/8.Programs written in Grafcet SFC language consist of:b Macro-steps (1) which are the only representation of a set of steps and a transition.b Steps, with which the actions to be executed are associated.b Transitions, with which the conditions are associated (transition conditions).b Directed links, connecting the steps and transitions.See characteristics page 6/16.The actions (continual, pulsed on activation or deactivation) and transition conditions can be programmed in the desired language: Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List.

The editor offers 8 pages, each consisting of 11 columns and 14 lines, giving 154 cells per page.A palette of graphic objects is used for direct access to each graphic symbol (macro-steps, steps, transitions, sequence selection, simultaneous activation/ deactivation and connectors).Programming of the transition conditions and actions is performed simply by clicking on the required chart element.On a Grafcet page, comments of up to 64 characters can be entered in any cell.Functions which assist entry: cut, copy, paste, etc. are available to the user.

Instruction List language is a language representing, in the form of text, the equivalent of a Ladder diagram. It is used for writing Boolean equations and making use of the functions available in the language.

A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions from the following different families: b Bit instructions, for example read input n° 3: LD %I1.3.b Instructions on function blocks, for example start timer n° 0: IN %TM0.b Numerical instructions on single, double and floating point integers, for example, perform an addition: [%MW10:= %MW50 + 100].b Instructions on word tables, character strings, for example, perform an assignment: [%MW10:10:=%KW50:10].b Program instructions, for example, call subroutine n° 10: SR10.Each instruction is composed of an instruction code and a bit or word type operand.

As in Ladder language, instructions are organized into sequences of instructions (equivalent to a rung). Each sequence of instructions can be identified by a label %Li, with i being from 0 to 999 and accompanied by a comment of 222 characters maximum.Each sequence of instructions is composed of one or more test instructions. The result of these instructions is applied to one or more action instructions.Objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format.The editor provides help with entering data.

(1) With Premium PLCs only.

Grafcet language (SFC) TSX Micro PLC Premium PLC

b 96 steps maximum (2) on 8 pages for TSX 37-10 and 128 steps for TSX 37-21/22

b 1024 transitions maximum (2)

b 11 elements maximum per divergence/convergence

b maximum of 250 steps (2) on 8 pages

b 64 macro-steps of 250 steps.

b A "generic" comment can be associated with each macro-step

b 1024 transitions maximum (2)

b 11 elements maximum per divergence/ convergence

b 1024 steps maximum in the application

Structure of the section in the master task

Program editor: Grafcet SFC language

Instruction List language (IL)

Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered tasks)

Program editor: Instruction List language





6/12

6



PL7 Pro software offers the user the possibility (for Premium PLCs) of creating their own function blocks which meet the particular needs of their applications. Once they have been created in the library, these function blocks can be used with PL7 Junior/Pro software.These user function blocks enable an application to be structured. They are used as soon as a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or to freeze a standard type of programming. They can be exported to all other PL7 applications.Using a DFB function block in one or more applications enables: b Simplification of program entry and design.b Improved program readability.b Easier debugging (all variables handled by the DFB function block are identified on its interface).b Use of DFB-specific internal variables (independent of the application).A DFB derived function block is set up in three phases:b Design of the DFB which has a name, parameters (I/O), variables and code in Structured Text or ladder language.b Creation of a DFB instance in the variables editor or when calling the function in the program editor.b Using this instance in the program in the same way as a standard function block.

The variables editor is used to: b Symbolize the various application objects (bits, words, function blocks, I/O, …).b Define the parameters of the predefined function blocks (timers, counters, registers etc.).b Enter the values of the constants and select the display base (decimal, binary, hexadecimal, floating point, message).b Define the DFB user function block parameters.Each symbol (32 characters max, accented characters are permitted) can be accompanied by a comment (508 characters max).Editing services are available in the editor: b Find/replace an object in a part of the program or in a set of function modules (PL7 Pro).b Find a character string in a list of symbols or comments.Version u V4.0 of PL7 offers enhanced functions due to: b Copy/paste function for one or more symbol(s) and comments.b Display in plain language of the overlap of different types of variable on a single memory address (for example, single and double format internal words, %MW0/%MD0).b Highlighting of objects used by the application program.b Opening the application variable database to third-party tools by importing/exporting text files (.txt). This new function makes it possible to create/modify application databases using a third-party software (for example TSX Microsoft Excel) that has extended edit functions.

Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by entering them or automatically initialized from the selected phrase or rung.Variables can then be: b Modified.b Forced to 0 or 1 for bit objects.For each numerical variable, it is possible to select the display base (decimal, binary, hexadecimal, floating point, ASCII message).Version u V4.0 of PL7 offers new options for animation tables: b Display of the comment associated with variables.b Assignment of a single value to a number of variables.b Change of display format for a number of variables.b Display of the list of forced bits.

FunctionsUser DFB function blocks

Variables editor

Animation table





6/13

6



The documentation editor is built around the Documentation Browser which displays the contents of the documentation file in a tree structure.It can be used to print all or part of the application documentation file on any graphic printer which can be accessed in Windows and uses True Type technology, in A4 or US letter print formats.

The documentation editor is used to define: b A title page, including the name of the designer and project.b General information pages.b A footer.

The documentation editor automatically generates:

b The contents.b The application documentation file: hardware and software configuration, program with its comments (including those relating to the macro-steps and subroutines).b The list of variables sorted by address or symbol.b The cross-references, sorted by address or symbol.

The runtime screen tool is integrated in PL7 Pro software (creation and use of screens). It is intended in particular, for debugging when starting up installations and for diagnostics on faults or malfunctions.

It comprises data (explanatory texts, dynamic values, synoptics, etc.) and enables a simple and fast action (modification and dynamic monitoring of PLC variables).

The editor enables the design of these screens using the following tools: b Screen: creation of runtime screens, which can be classed according to family.b Message: creation of messages used.b Objects: creation of a graphic objects library.

When the station is connected to the PLC, the user can display screens dynamically depending on the state of the process.Screen sequencing is possible, depending on the attributed priority, via either the keyboard or PLC request.

In online mode, runtime screens enable direct access to the PL7 program from synoptics by simply clicking on the selected object.

It is also possible to activate the animation table functions or cross references once one or more variables have been selected on the screen. Version u V4.0 of PL7 software also enables character string type objects to be displayed.

Synoptics can be displayed on the full screen for ease of viewing.

Documentation editor

Runtime screens





6/14

6



PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions: b Setting stop points.b Step by step program execution.b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST) and event-triggered (EVTi) tasks.

Parts of the program are animated directly when the TSX Micro/Premium PLC is in RUN (rung, Structured Text statement or sequence of instructions in Instruction List language) by activating the PL7 animation function.Animation is used to display the status of program variables, whatever the language used.The animation can be frozen. Several windows can be displayed and animated simultaneously.

Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by entering them or automatically initialized from the selected program part.Variables can then be modified, forced to 0 or to 1 for bit objects.These tables can be stored in the application and therefore retrieved at a later date.

b Animation table: all public parameters and variables are displayed and animated in real time. It is possible to modify and force the desired objects.b As for the rest of the program, it is possible to use the following functions: breakpoint, step-by-step and program diagnostics.

In online mode, the browser gives a hierarchical view of the chart with CHART module and macro-step nesting. Animation is characterized by the presence or absence of indicator colors.The Grafcet debug bar: b Displays the state of the chart.b Modifies the state of the chart.b Gives information on the state of the Master task.

The debug screens for the application-specific functions are accessed from the I/O configuration screen by clicking on the position in which the module has been defined, when the terminal is in online mode.These screens are used for: b Displaying and modifying the state of the I/O.b Forcing the I/O.b Displaying and modifying the current values.b ...

The debug screens provide access to the general module or channel diagnostics.These screens identify: Internal module faults.b External faults from the application.b E.g.: range overrun fault for an analog module.With version u V4.0 of PL7 software, the Premium platform system diagnostics are extended. It is possible to monitor system bits and words as well as to display associated time-stamped messages automatically, without the need for additional programming. This monitoring applies to the system elements (processor, memory,tasks, …), in-rack I/O and remote I/O on the Fipio bus.

Debugging tools

Animation of program elements

Animation tables

Debugging the DFBs

Grafcet debugging

Debugging the application-specific functions

Diagnostics





6/15

6



For every variable, this function can be used to:b Search for program modules where this variable is used.b Obtain the list of statements, rungs or expressions.b Display and check activation conditions.A log is used to keep track of this navigation.Options relating to the variable, can be associated with the search (extract bit, table object, function block elements, network object, etc.).This function can be initialized from the program or runtime screens.

PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software includes application converters which make it possible to reuse in full or in part, applications already written in: b PL7 2, applications for TSX 17, TSX 27 or TSX 47 10/20/25 PLCs.b PL7 3 (1), applications for TSX/PMX 47...TSX/PMX 107 PLCs.b ORPHEE (1), applications for April Series 1000 PLCs.

The converters offer the following utilities: b Translation of language objects into the new PL7 syntax with retrieval of associated symbols and comments.b Possibility of manually reassigning objects.b Configuration check: the tool checks whether the configuration resources required by the program to be converted are compatible with the configuration of the destination application.b Conversion (1) with generation of source files (Ladder, Structured Text or Grafcet) in PL7 Junior/Pro format. b Conversion ensures that instructions which are translated are functionally identical to the original program. b A translation report gives a summary:v result of the conversion with the cause of non-translation where possible,v correspondence of variables in PL7 with original variables.

The communication drivers (Uni-Telway COM port ans USB port, PC side) are available in the PL7 software CD-Rom.Depending on needs, another drivers can be be installed from TLX CD DRV20M CD-Rom (to order separately). See following table.

(1) Function or functionality requiring PL7 Junior/Pro software.

Variable cross-references

Application converters

X-Way communication drivers

Type of drivers Windows XPWindows 2000

Windows NT Windows 98 Millenium

Windows 95 OS/2 DOS

Uni-Telway V1.6 IE17 V1.9 IE17 V1.6 IE17 V7.8 IE18 – V7.4 IE14TSX FPC10 V1.3 IE05 V1.3 IE08 V1.3 IE05 V2.4 IE14 V2.4 IE13 V2.2 IE11

TSX FPC20 V1.2 IE03 V1.3 IE08 V1.2 IE04 V1.2 IE04 V1.5 IE05 –TSX SCP 114 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 – –Ethway V1.1 IE02 V1.1 IE03 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE22 –

ISAway V1.2 IE04 V1.5 IE06 V1.2 IE04 V1.2 IE09 – –PCIway V1.0 IE06 – – – – –XIP V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 – –

Modbus V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 – –USB for mini-DIN terminal port

Inclus PL7 – – – – –

USB for USB terminal port V1.0 IE14 – – – – –





6/16

6



b 64/255 Timers: %TMi (0 ≤ i ≤ 254) 10 ms to 9999 msb 32/255 Up/Down counters: %Ci (0 ≤ i ≤ 254) 0 to 9999 (word)b 64/255 Timers PL7-2: %Ti (0 ≤ i ≤ 254)b 8/255 Monostables: %MNi (0 ≤ i ≤ 254) 16 stepsb 4/255 LIFO or FIFO 16 bit registers: %Ri (0 ≤ i ≤ 254)b 8/255 Drums: %DRi (0 ≤ i ≤ 254) 16 stepsb The total number of timers %TMi and %Ti is limited to 64/255

b Instructions on word and double word tables.b Logical instructions on words and double words.b Arithmetic instructions on words and double words.b Instructions on floating point words.b Instructions on bit tables.b Character string instructions.b Binary conversion instructions.b Time management instructions.b Logarithmic and exponential instructions.b Trigonometric instructions.b Instructions on program.

(1) Function requiring PL7 Junior/Pro software.(2) If the maximum number of objects are not specified in this table, see page 1/17.(3) 1024 step bits and macro-step step bits.

Functions and instructionsPredefined function blocks (1)

Type of PL7 instructions

Addressable objects (2)Bit objects Word objects

b %I/Qx.i: I/O module inputs/outputsb %Mi: internal bitsb 256 on TSX Micro TSX 37,b 3692 on TSX P57 1p3M, b 8056 on TSX P57 2p3M/T PCX 57 203M b 16248 on TSX P57 3p3M/453M and

T PCX 57 353Mb %Si: 128 bit systemb %Xi: Grafcet step bitsb 96 on TSX Micro TSX 37-10,b 128 on TSX Micro TSX 37-21/22b 1024 (3) on Premiumb %XMj: 64 macro-step bits on Premium

PLCb %…i.j.: function block bitsb %…i.Xk: bits extracted from internal words,

systems, constants, from I/O, common networks

b %MWi, %MDi, %MFi: single length internal words, double length, floating

b %KWi, %KDi, %KFi: single length constant words, double length, floating

b %IWi.j/%QWi.j: module I/O wordsb %SWi: 128 system wordsb %NWi: common words on the networkb %MBi:L, %KBi:L: character stringb %…i.j: function block wordsb %…i[%MWi]: indexed objects (I/O bits,

constant internal words)

Indexed objects Structured objects

b %i[%MWj]: bits (inputs, outputs and internal)

b %Mpi[%mWj]: internal words, (single/double length and floating)

b %Kpi[%mWj]: constant words (single and double length and floating point)

b %MWi[MWj]: table of internal words

b %Mi:L: bits string (I/O, internal and Grafcet bits)

b %ppi:L: constant internal words (single or double length, floating and words system)

b %pBi:L: character string (internal words and constants)





6/17

6

Selection Modicon Premium automation platform 6


Multilingual software packages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian) for PC compatibles (1) equipped with Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows Millennium, Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating systems.For one station, these packages comprise:b A CD-ROM supporting the PL7 multilingual software, the PL7 demonstration applications and the terminal link Uni-Telway driver.b A cable reference TSX PCU 1031, PC compatible with TSX Micro/Premium PLC (length 2.5 m). Not supplied with software upgrade or update packages and PL7 software licenses.b Two CD-ROMs containing multilingual technical documentation.b A CD-ROM containing the TSX Micro/Premium platform operating systems.For packages for 3 stations, the above quantities are multiplied by three. For software licenses, TSX PCX 1031 cables must be ordered separately, according to the required number of users.All documentation reference (software setup manuals) reference TLX DOC PL7 43F should be ordered separately.

(1) Typical recommended configuration: Pentium processor, 266 MHz, 128 Mb of RAM memory, CD-ROM drive for installation of the PL7 program, VGA screen or above.

SelectionThe selection table shown below can be used to define the most suitable programming software in terms of services that are required and the TSX Micro/Premium automation platforms used.

Utilities/functions Programming software Languages PL7 Micro PL7 Junior PL7 Pro

Instruction List TSX Micro TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumLadder language TSX Micro TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumGrafcet TSX Micro TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumGrafcet macro-steps Premium PremiumStructured Text TSX Micro TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/Premium

DFB function blocksCreation PremiumOperation Premium PremiumDisplay Premium Premium

Functional viewsApplication Premium

Function modulesCreation PremiumOperation Premium

DFB function blocks for application diagnosticsCreation PremiumOperation PremiumDisplay PremiumDiagnostics viewer Premium

Runtime screensCreation TSX Micro/PremiumOperation TSX Micro/Premium

Application convertersPL7 2 TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumPL7 3 TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumOrphee TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/Premium

Software extensionsSMC (converter) TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumSDKC (C language dev) TSX Micro TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumPL7 DIF (comparison of PL7 applications) TSX Micro/PremiumPL7 FUZ (sofware for fuzzy logic processing) TSX Micro TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumOFS (data server) TSX Micro TSX Micro/Premium TSX Micro/PremiumWSBY (Warm Standby redundancy) PremiumSycon (fieldbus configurator) CANopen CANopen, Profibus DP

References





6/18

6



PL7 Micro software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder, Structured Text and Grafcet language. It can also be used to set up application-specific functions and perform maintenance and diagnostics of the developed applications. It includes the PL7 2 application converter.

PL7 Junior software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder, Structured Text and Grafcet languages. It can also be used to set up application-specific functions and perform maintenance and diagnostics of the developed applications. It includes the PL7 2, PL7 3 and ORPHEE application converters.

(1) p in reference, defines the type of connecting cable PC/PLC (length 2.5 m)v P: TSX PCX 1031 cable for RS 232C port of PC,v PU: TSX PCX 3030 cable for USB port of PC.

PL7 Micro software packages

Description For PLC Type of device and update

Reference(1)

Weightkg

PL7 Micro software packages

TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7M p44M –

Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7M p44M –

PL7 Micro and SyCon V2.8 software package

TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7M PC44M –

Mises à jour logiciels PL7 MicroSoftware updates for previous version of PL7 Micro

TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7M P 44M –

Group (3 stations) TLX RCD3 PL7M P 44M –

Software update for previous version of PL7 Micro supplied with SyCon V2.8

TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7M PC44M –

PL7 junior software packages

Description For PLCs Type Reference(1)

Weightkg

PL7 Junior software packages

TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX

Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7J p44M –

Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7J p44M –

Software updates for previous version of PL7 Junior


Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7J P44M –

Group (3 stations) TLX RCD3 PL7J P44M –

Software upgrade packages from previous version of PL7 TSX Micro


Single (1 station) TLX UCD PL7J P44M –

Group (3 stations) TLX UCD3 PL7J P44M –





6/19

6



Functions on PL7 Pro software are identical to those on PL7 Junior software. It also offers the user the possibility of creating his own function blocks (DFBs) and graphic runtime screens.

Ensembles logiciels PL7 Pro

Description For PLCs Type Reference(1)

Weightkg

PL7 Pro software package


Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7P p44M –

Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7P p44M –

Software updates for previous version of PL7 Pro


Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7P P44M –

Group (3 stations) TLX RCD3 PL7P P44M –

Software upgrade packages from previous versions of PL7 Junior


Single (1 station) TLX UCD PL7P P44M –

Group (3 stations) TLX UCD3 PL7P P44M –

PL7 Micro/Pro software licensesDescription For PLCs Type Reference Weight

kgPL7 TSX Micro Open Team software license

TSX Micro Team (10 stations) (2) TLX OT PL7M P44M –

PL7 Pro Open Team software license


Team (10 stations) (2) TLX OT PL7P P44M –

PL7 Pro Open Site software license


Site > 10 stations (2) TLX OS PL7P P44M –

PL7 Pro Servi software license


Client/server network architecture server device.Use of the PL7 Pro via client station (Thin client) on network and with access rights.

TLX S PL7P P44M –

Separated elementsDescription Use Reference Weight

kgX-Way drivers package for compatible PC

Includes all X-Way drivers (voir page 6/15)Includes multilingual user documentation.

TLX CD DRV20M –

Description Used from processor to PC port Length Reference Weightkg

Universal terminal port cable

Mini-DIN port TSX Micro/Premium

RS 232D (15-way SUB-D connector)

2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170

USB Port 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 0.150

Description Description Reference Weightkg

Set of manuals PL7 software (in english)

Hard copy including PL7 reference manuals, functions, communication, converters and diagnostics

TLX DOC PL7 44E 3.410

(1) p in reference, defines the type of connecting cable PC/PLC (length 2.5 m)v P: TSX PCX 1031 cable for RS 232C port of PC,v PU: TSX PCX 3030 cable for USB port of PC.

(2) Team user stations from the same geographical site.

TSX PCX 1031





6/20

6With version V4 of PL7 software, the Premium platform system diagnostics has been enhanced by the monitoring of system bits/words and I/O (in-rack and remote via the Fipio bus). All events automatically display time and date-stamped messages, without any additional programming, using one of the display units (see page 6/21).

The diagnostic functions integrated in PL7 Junior/Pro software can be used for 1st level diagnostics of the configuration elements, and are effective for every module up to channel level.

(1) Viewers function is included as standard PL7 Pro, Vijeo Look, Monitor Pro software and CCX 17, Magelis dialog terminals see page 6/21.

PresentationIntegrated diagnostics in Premium automation platforms

The diagnostic offer of Premium platform is built on threeelements:b System diagnostic. b Diagnostic DFBs function blocks (system and application).b Display system of fault messages named viewers. This viewer function is included as standard PL7 Pro, Vijeo Look, Monitor Pro softwares and CCX 17, Magelis dialog terminals.

FunctionsSystem diagnostics

Processor System bits and words

In-rack I/O modules

Remote I/O modules on Fipio

Higher level M.E.S

Cell level

Machine levelViewer

Display viewers System diagnostics

Application diagnostics

Ethernet

Monitor Pro

Magelis XBT/T XBT

CCX 17

Channel level

Module level

Viewer window (example with PL7 Pro software)

Configuration level

Presentation, functions


Integrated diagnostics

.

6/21

6

ED

COND ERROR

STATUSAREA_NROP_CTRL

Usrst_dia

Outputs

Inputs

12

*ACTIVE ALARMS: 011 *002 03/04/97 11:07:54_NEPO_ACKFault in left motor N° 3<ALT>+<P> V Status <XI > V Return

PL7 Pro software has an integrated function block library containing monitoring function blocks known as Diagnostic DFBs. The Diagnostic DFB library comprises:

System diagnostic manufacturer blocks:

b IO_DIA input/output fault. It can be used to monitor the state of the inputs/outputs. b ASI_DIA checks for the appearance of any errors on the AS-Interface bus (module or bus fault, slave missing, slave not configured or faulty).

Application diagnostic manufacturer blocks:

b EV_DIA checks that an event (state of a bit) takes the correct value at the expected time (no notion of time).b MV_DIA checks the requested movement (change in the state of a bit) due to occur in a preset time period.b ALRM_DIA monitors the state of a bit (at 1 or 0).b NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA can be used to monitor, control and diagnose the elements of the operating part created by wiring 2 preactuators and 2 sensors in conjunction.

Open diagnostic blocks:

These offer users the option of creating their own diagnostic function blocks to meet the specific requirements of their applications, thus complementing the manufacturer DFBs described above. They are created using 2 model blocks written in Ladder or Structured Text language. The following can be created simultaneously in one application:b a maximum of 26 types of system diagnostic DFBsb a maximum of 26 types of application diagnostic DFBs.

The diagnostic events processed by the Premium PLC using the diagnostic DFBs are stored in a buffer (memory space for data specific to the Premium PLC). The information contained in this PLC buffer is sent transparently for the user to the viewers and can be displayed automatically and used to handle errors and alarms. The viewer function is included as standard in:

b PL7 Pro programming softwareb CCX 17 version > V 2.5 operator panelsb Magelis XBT-F and TXBT-F graphic terminalsb Monitor Pro supervisor version V7.0.

The Premium platform has a multi-viewer option (link to a maximum of 15 viewers). A PC compatible station with the viewer function can be connected to several PLCs (link via X-Way communication to a maximum of 15 Premium platforms).

This buffer/viewer structure offers:

b A single point for managing faults per applicationb Time and date-stamping at source of the appearance of faultsb Memorisation of transient faultsb Independence from the viewer functions. The frame transmitted from the PLC buffer is identical for all viewers.

Composition of messages:

Each line displayed by the viewer represents a fault with, depending on the display capacity: state, type of DFB, geographical zone, dates and times of appearance/disappearance, associated message and status.

1 Viewer window on PL7 Pro screen.

2 Viewer screen on CCX 17 operator panel.

Application diagnostics

Viewers


Integrated diagnostics

Functions (continued)

6/22

6

Presentation,setup


PL7 SMC application converter software

The application converter software for SMC PLCs is a PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro software option. It enables parts of, or in certain cases, the entire existing SMC PLC application to be reused with Micro/Premium PLCs. The converter generates instructions in PL7 language which are functionally identical to the original instructions.

If the application has been archived using VPSOFT programming software (version 3.02 minimum) for SMC PLCs, it is possible to translate the program and comments and retrieve the entire database (variable symbols and comments). If this is not the case, the program only can still be converted once it has been transferred with VPSOFT software. Program conversion is possible for SMC 200/500, SMC 23/35 and SMC 50/600 PLC applications.

The SMC converter provides the following functions:b Selection of the application in the directory where SMC applications are stored.b Selection of the program to be converted: sequences to be converted.b Code and data analysis: associations are suggested for SMC variables with PL7 correspondence (bits, words, double words or reals).b Code and variable conversion in order to generate a PL7 equivalent.b Report which shows the user the conversion success rate, associations and causes of non-conversion when applicable.b Target configuration for displaying or entering a configuration required for arranging variables in PL7.It is possible to convert only the SMC database.

Once installed, the SMC converter is activated from PL7 (File/Convert command). Translated program modules are converted into an importable source format in a new PL7 application or in the current application.

A consistency check is performed with the current application configuration. It is also possible to modify the destination application while the converter is being used.

Presentation

Software setup

Functions:page 6/23

Reference:page 6/23

6/23

6

Functions,reference


PL7 SMC application converter software

The converter is extremely easy to use. All or part of the symbolised database can be retrieved. Its reassignment services operate on individual data or blocks of data addresses.

I/O reassignment:

The converter in particular enables discrete I/O variables from an SMC PLC to be directly reassigned by module to TSX Micro/Premium PLC modules. It is also possible to merge objects from several SMC modules into a single Premium module (when using-modules with 64 channels for example).

The SMC sequential program conversion can be carried out on the entire program or on a selected part of the program. The result of the conversion is a PL7 format source file which can be imported into any task written in Ladder language.

Once an analysis phase is completed, the software offers default correspondence and requests additional information when necessary.

A conversion report provides the following information: b Result of the conversion for each instruction with the cause of non-conversion if applicable.b List of variable correspondence before and after conversion, including I/O reassignment.

This software extension conforms to SMC PLC application conversion requirements using PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro setup software. It comprises:

b A set of 3"1/2 disks.b A multilingual user manual (English, French and Spanish).

FunctionsDatabase conversion

Program conversion

Reference

Logiciel convertisseur d'applications pour automates SMCDescription Function Target PLC

extensionReference Weight

kgPL7 SMC application converter software

Facilitates conversion of SMC 200/500 andSMC 25/35/50/600 applications to PL7 applications. Converts sequential information into Ladder language and data

PL7 Junior/ProMicro/Premium

TLX LC SMC PL7 40M 0.560

Rererence, setup:page 6/22

6/24

6

Presentation,setup


PL7 DIF application comparison software

PL7 DIF application comparison software for Premium platforms is an optional program which complements the PL7 Pro programming software. It is used to compare two PL7 applications generated by PL7 Pro and automatically provide an exhaustive list of all the differences between them.

The PL7 DIF program increases productivity in the main life phases of a control system based on a Premium platform:

b Application development and debugging.b Starting up installations and processes.b Operation and maintenance of installations and processes.

PL7 DIF software is an efficient tool for handling PL7 applications for:

b Control system design offices.b Operation and maintenance managers.b Installers and systems integrators.

The PL7 DIF software can be used in one of two modes:

b Interactive mode, when the comparison is launched by an operator command (double-click on thePL7Diff software icon).b “Batch” mode, when it is launched by a previously established call command.

These comparison commands locate all the differences between two applications in terms of:

b The hardware configuration.b The application access protection.b The software structure with the section validation conditions.b The application program regardless of the language(s) used.b The function modules.b The code for the DFB user function blocks.b All the variables.

The result of the comparison between the two applications can be:

b Displayed.b Printed.b Saved in .txt format in a differences list.

The end of the comparison operation is signalled by the appearance of the application browser with its three tabs.

1 Identification tab for accessing the characteristics of the two applications being compared. The differences are marked by the sign #.

2 Browser tab for accessing the application multilevel tree structure.

3 List tab for accessing:v Printing the comparison list,v Creating the comparison file.

Presentation

Software setup

Comparison

3

2

1


6/25

6

Setup (continued),references


PL7 DIF application comparison software

The representation of the application multilevel tree structure, which can be accessed via the browser tab after launching a comparison, is annotated by 4 symbols in which the information associated with application 1 appear in blue and those associated with application 2 appear in red:

In the example opposite, a difference on the rung causing changeover to manual mode is detected:

1 This line [7] displayed in blue belongs to application 1.2 This line [7] displayed in red belongs to application 2.

The source code extracts of both applications can be used to locate the differences precisely.

The list tab is the means of accessing the functions for printing a comparison list or creating a comparison file:

This software extension can be used to compare two PL7 applications generated by PL7 Pro and designed for TSX Micro/Premium platforms. It comprises one CD-Rom (three disks), containing the PL7 DIF software with its documentation (English and French). A software subscription is available for this extension (please consult your Regional Sales Office).

Setup (continued)

Display of results

This branch, found in this level of the tree structure, contains at least one difference

This block contains at least one difference

This section is only present in application 1

This section is only present in application 2

The programming language of this section differs between application 1 and application 2

12

Printing a comparison list/creating a comparison file

Access to the list form for printing a comparison list (or creating a comparison file)

Used to include the block selected in the tree structure in the comparison list (or the comparison file)

Used to exclude the block selected in the tree structure of the comparison list (or the comparison file)

Used to create the comparison list (or the comparison file) according to the selections above

Starts printing the comparison list (or saving the comparison file)

References

PL7 DIF application comparison software Function Target

extension PLC target

Type of device Reference Weightkg

Using for comparing applications generated by PL7 Pro version u V4

PL7 ProTSX Micro/Premium

1 station TLX CD PL7 DIF 41 –

3 stations TLX CD3 PL7 DIF 41 –


6/26

6

Presentation,setup


SDKC software

C language function development software, also called SDKC, is a PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro software option. It enables new functions to be developed (internal code written in C language) and extends and completes the standard set of functions offered by PL7 software. SDKC software also integrates a creation and management service for families of functions, so they can be integrated in the PL7 library.Finally, it can be used to generate the function which ensures the protection of PL7 applications by reading a signature in the PCMCIA card inserted in the PLC.

C language development software is a genuine tool for managing the entire function which has been created: b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in PL7, with automatic file organisation.b Powerful debug and test tools.b Management of compatibility and software version for the functions created.b Generation of disks for the subsequent installation of functions on other development stations.

The software enables different function families to be defined. These functions, also known as EF, are classed according to family, allowing the user to create a sequential library of functions written in C language. These functions, which will eventually form a part of the PL7 library, can be: b Used in all languages.b Displayed by the PL7 library tool.b Classed according to family/function.

The user has the following data at his disposal: b Date of creation and generation of the function.b The version number of the function family.

The various SDKC software editor tabs enable the user to create the function by: b Declaring the interface (name, type and comment) for each input, output or I/O parameter.b Writing the source code file in C language.b Declaring the constants as separate files.

A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such as real-time clock, PLC variables, system words, mathematical functions. In particular, it is possible to carry out numerical processing in floating point format, if the target PLC allows.

Presentation

Setup

Management of function families

Editing functions

Reference:page 6/27

6/27

6

Setup (continued),reference


SDKC software

The function created must be generated under the “debug” format to be tested. Once it has been inserted in an application and loaded to a PLC, the execution of a function can be checked using numerous debug tools.

A specific function debug menu in C language accesses the following services:

b Breakpoint insertion.b Step by step execution.b Display of code with breakpoints shown.b Display of data manipulations.

After developing, generating, then debugging the function, the last step consists of generating a function family installation disk.

This enables the function library on the user's programming terminal to be enhanced. Managing the versions allows the level of any functions installed on a station to be known at any time.

These functions can be used in all PL7 languages.

This software extension enables standard functions offered by PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro version > V4 software to be extended.

It comprises:b A set of 3"1/2 disks.b A bilingual user manual (English and French).

This software is supplied with a Microsoft Visual C++ software package registration card.

Setup (continued)

Debugging the functions

Functions library enhancement

Reference

PL7 SDKC procedure creation softwareDescription Function Target PLC


kgPL7 SDKC software extension

Procedure written in C language with access to floating point functions Debug in PLC

PL7 Micro/Junior/ProTSX Micro/Premium

TLX L SDKC PL7 41M 0.930


6/28

6

Presentation,setup


PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing

PL7 FUZ software is a PL7 TSX Micro/Junior/Pro software option enabling fuzzy logic processing in order to optimise the control of processes from Micro and Premium PLCs. This is a software function which can be integrated in any PL7 program. lt includes setup and debug tools.

This function is particularly suitable for controlling:b Systems which are difficult to model or non-linear systems, with wide variation of inputs or an insufficient sensor resolution.b Systems which are difficult to control and require experience and human intuition.

It enables:b Boolean logic limits to be exceeded (true or false state).b The representation of physical measurements by gradual concepts.b Benefit to be gained from the expertise of operators when controlling a proces.s

The fuzzy logic function is characterised by:b 5 physical measurements used as inputs (temperature, pressure, speed…).b 20 graphic related functions which allow the physical measurement inputs to be represented by predefined associated linguistic terms. A temperature will be represented for example by the terms: low, average, high according to the limits for the various terminals.b 25 linguistic rules which determine the state to be applied to the outputs (3 conditions and 2 conclusions per rule).b 4 numerical variables as outputs, results applying to the function input valuesb The possibility of debugging its control offline.

Once inserted in a program, the fuzzy function can either operate in continuous mode (function executed on each scan) or on request (a single iteration on each execution). The operating mode enables the function to be used in automatic mode (calculation of the outputs depending on the state of the inputs) or in manual mode (applications with predefined output values).

The fuzzy logic function software is set up in 2 steps:b Integration of the fuzzy function in the application program, in the same way as any other standard function.b Setting the fuzzy function parameters using the setup screen.

The fuzzy logic function is inserted in the program in all the available languages. The software checks the various function parameters: b The 5 input variables.b The 4 output variables (plus an error bit).b The internal variables necessary for the function to operate correctly.

The function setup screen is used to access parameters (I/O), membership functions, linguistic rules, as well as debug functions.

The membership functions are described intuitively using a suitable layout. A membership function is characterised by:b The selection of one of the parameters (I/O).b The choice of associated linguistic terms from a library of terms predefined or created by the user.b The type of function to apply for the inputs (trapeze, triangle, etc) as well as its characteristic values and the functions to apply for the outputs (singleton).

Presentation

Software setup

Integration in the program

Membership functions

Reference: page 6/29

6/29

6

Setup (continued),reference


PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing

Linguistic rules (25 maximum) enable experts' know-how to be transcribed using conditions/conclusions such as: If…Then… b The definition of a rule is made easier by selecting the input parameters (3 per rule).b By assigning one of the possible linguistic terms to each input.b By defining the outputs affected by this rule (2 per rule) as well as the associated linguistic terms.

The fuzzy function is easily debugged using the setup and debug screen, especially simplified by the possibility of simulating the operation offline.

Offline simulation

Once the parameter entry screens have been completed, it is possible to perform the fuzzy function operation offline. The debug screen offers the possibility of: b Forcing values for the various input variables.b Starting the simulation using the “Start” key.

The results achieved are: The values which will be applied to the outputs in normal operation.The percentages obtained under the various rules.

Debug in online mode

In online mode the debug screen enables: b Display of the state of the I/O.b Access to the involvement percentages obtained under the various rules.

It can also: b Force the inputs for testing precise operating points.b Change to manual mode to apply predetermined values on the outputs.b Change the operating mode: on request, or continuously by defining a period of activation.

This software extension enables standard functions offered by PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro software to be extended into the domain of fuzzy logic. It comprises:b A set of 3"1/2 disks.b A multilingual user manual (English, French and German).

Setup software (continued)

Linguistic rules

Simulation and debug

Reference

Software for fuzzy logic processingDescription Function Target PLC


kgPL7 FUZ software extension

Development and debugging of fuzzy logic applications. Defines the membership functions and fuzzy rules for the applications.

PL7 Micro/Junior/ProTSX Micro/Premium

TLX L PL7 FUZ 34M 0.560

Presentation: page 6/28

Setup: page 6/28

6/30

6


OFS data server software

OPC Factory Server (OFS) version 3.0 software uses the OLE for Process Control (OPC) standard, allowing "Client" software applications (supervisors, databases, spreadsheet programs) to access the following data:b Internal variables (words, bits) and inputs/outputs of Modicon Premium/Quantum PLCs.b Internal variables (words, bits) of Modicon TSX Micro PLCs, Modicon Momentum/Quantum PLCs (1), TSX Series 7 and April PLCs.

OFS software is a multi-PLC data Server that enables several communication protocols to be used by providing Client application programs with a set of services for accessing the control system variables.

This software is aimed at two types of user in particular:b “End” users who seek to develop applications on a PC and require access to PLC data. In this context, it is possible, for example, to create Client applications (supervisory control screens, Excel tables, etc.) with access to a number of PLCs connected to the PC supporting these applications.b “Suppliers” of control system or industrial data processing products (supervision, human-machine interfaces, etc.) seeking to develop, within their standard products, an OPC Client application capable of accessing data stored in PLCs via the OPC Server.

The OFS offer comprises:b A tool for configuring the OPC Server.b An OPC Server software application that receives requests from an OPC Client and retransmits them to the PLCs.b Low-level drivers for communication with Modicon PLCs.b An OPC Client enabling verification of Client/Server communication between the various connected elements.b A simulator enabling verification of operation of one or more Clients, without a connected PLC.b The electronic setup documentation.

(1) With Concept/ProWORX software.

Presentation

Setup:page 6/31

Functions:page 6/32


6/31

6

Setup Modicon Premium automation platform 6


OFS software can be integrated into control system architectures such as the one shown below:1 PC running OFS software including the OPC Server. 2 PC running the Client application, which accesses the PLC data via OFS.3 Communication networks linking the PC, running OFS software, with the PLCs.4 OPC communication protocol.5 Modbus on TCP/IP communication protocol.6 Uni-TE on TCP/IP communication protocol.7 OFS software program accesses Unity Pro project variables directly. Additionally,

it conducts a check to verify that these variables are consistent with those of the Premium or Quantum PLC.

Depending on the usage, the Client application and OFS software can be located on the same PC or on two different PCs 1 and 2, linked by a TCP/IP Ethernet network 7.

Nota : Depending on the software used for Modicon PLCs:

- PL7 software generates PLC variable symbol export files. These export files (symbols.scy) should be integrated in the OPC Server.- Concept, the variables can be accessed directly in the project (file.prj) of the Concept application. This direct link requires Concept (version > V2.0) to be installed on the OFS station 1.- Unity Pro programming software generates export files from PLC variable symbols. These export files (.xvm symbols) should be integrated into the OPC Server when the Unity Pro project development station 8 is not accessible via the OFS station. If the Unity Pro project station is permanently accessible via the OFS station, the former exchanges directly with the variables of the Unity Pro project (via P.server).

Setup

7

3

1

2

6

5

47

8

Ethernet TCP/IP

OFS Station (V3.0)

Databases

symbols.xvm (Unity Pro)symbols.prj (Concept)symbols.scy (PL7)

Premium

TSX MicroMomentum

QuantumEthernet TCP/IP

Unity Pro project station


Functions:page 6/32

Reference:page 6/33

6/32

6



OFS software has two interfaces:b OPC Automation interface.Particularly suitable for “end” users, it enables the development of OPC Client applications in Visual Basic, in Visual Basic for Excel, but also in C++.b OPC Custom interface.Used primarily by “suppliers” of automated control system or industrial IT products. It enables the development of applications in C++ in order to access the OFS software OPC Server. This interface is aimed at software development experts in particular, so that they can integrate the Client application into their standard products. This is the interface with the highest performance, in terms of access time to data stored in the OPC Server but requires extensive knowledge of C++ programming.

The various OFS software services enable:b Access to the Server in local or remote mode. Symbols are accessed either:v via an .xvm/.prj/.scy-format export file (depending on the software used), v or via direct access to the Unity Pro project in the case where it is accessible via the OFS station.b With Unity Pro software, when accessing the Unity Pro project directly, the OFS software program transparently manages the consistency of the Unity Pro project symbol database with that of the Premium or Quantum PLC. In the event of inconsistency, three types of operation are possible:v "strict" mode, which stops exchanges,v "symbolic" mode, which signals an alert to the user,v "debug" mode, which does not hold up debugging of the architecture.b Access to variables in the form of addresses or symbols.b Reading and writing of variables to one or more PLCs present on the communication network connected to the PC running the OFS software. These variables can be:v the sum of all variables belonging to the Unity Pro projects (bits, words, spreadsheets, DDT/IODDT-type compound data,v system variables (OPC System Group: PLC status, diagnostics, etc.),v internal variables representing the PLC words or registers (OPC User Group).b Use of a notification mechanism that transmits change of status values to the Client. Communication between the OPC Server and the PLC uses polling or can be initiated by the PLC in order to decrease the volume of exchanges (“push data”).b Definition of dead bands for measurement noise filtering (floating variables).

The various variables contained in the PLCs are accessed via standard Telemecanique communication protocols using the following:

b Uni-Telway bus and Ethernet/Fipway networks, Uni-TE protocol on TCP/IP, as well as the PCIway communication driver when TSX PCI 57 Atrium coprocessors (with Unity Pro) are used.b Modbus serial link, Ethernet/Modbus Plus networks and Modbus protocol on TCP/IP.

The various corresponding communication drivers are supplied in the OFS software (except Modbus Plus driver, which is supplied with the PC Modbus Plus card).

FunctionsDevelopment of Client applications

OFS software services

Communication with PLCs


Setup:page 46/31


6/33

6



OFS software for PC compatible stations (minimum configuration: Pentium 266 MHz processor, 64 Mb of RAM) running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP.

The OFS offer comprises:

b OPC Server software, compatible with the OPC Data Access 2.0 standard. b OPC Server simulator (for debugging the application when no PLCs are present).b A tool for configuring the Server on the PC.b A example of OPC Client for setting up applications.b The setup documentation on CD-Rom.

Supplied on CD-Rom, this software operates independently on a PC. Nevertheless, export files for variables generated by PL7 or ProWORX development software are required. The direct link with Concept applications requires Concept software (version > 2.0) to be installed on the same station.

References

Description Function Type of license

Reference Weightkg

OFS data server software (version V3.0)

Enables the development of Client applications, accessing data of Premium and Quantum (with Unity Pro) via the OFS Server.Also compatible with:- TSX Micro/Premium (with PL7), - Momentum/Quantum (with Concept/ProWORX),- TSX Series 7 and April PLCs

Single station TLX CD OFS 30M –

10 stations TLX CD 10OFS 30M –

200 stations TLX CD UNOFS 30M –

OFS software update

Enables you to update a previous version of OFS data server software

– Consult your Regional Sales Office.


Setup:page 6/31

Functions:page 6/32

7/0

7

7/1

7

Contents 7 - Terminals, industrial PCs and HMI software 7

7 - Terminals, industrial PCs and HMI softwareSelection guide Magelis display units and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2

Selection guide Magelis graphic terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4

Selection guide Magelis iPC industrial PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6

b Vijeo Look software supervision software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1)

b Monitor Pro V7.2 supervision software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1)

(1) See our catalogue “Human/Machine Interface for terminals, industrial PC and software”.

7/2

7


Magelis display units and terminals

Applications Display of text messages Display of text messages and/or semi-graphics

Type of unit Compact display units Display units

Display Type Back-lit green LCD, height 5.5 mmorBack-lit green, orange or red LCD, height 4.34…17.36 mm

Fluorescent green matrix (5 x 7 pixels), height 5 mmorBack-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm

Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (240 x 64 pixels),height 5.3 or 10.6 mm

Capacity 2 lines of 20 characters or 1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters

2 lines of 20 characters 4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40 characters

Data entry Via keypad with8 keys (4 with changeable legends)

Display onlyorvia keypad with 4 function keys + 1 service keyor5 service keys

Memory capacity Application 512 Kb Flash 128 Kb/256 Kb Flash 384 Kb Flash EPROM

Extension via type II PCMCIA –

Functions Maximum number of pages 128/200 application pages256 alarm pages

100/200 application pages128/256 alarm pages256 print-out form pages (1)

600 application pages256 alarm pages256 print-out form pages (1)

Variables per page 40…50 50Representation of variables Alphanumeric Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge

Recipes –Curves –Alarm logs – Depending on model

Real-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clockAlarm relay – No

Communication Asynchronous serial link RS 232 C/RS 485 RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422Downloadable protocols Uni-Telway, Modbus Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE

Fanuc, Omron, Siemens

Bus and networks – AS-i using 22.5 pitch modulePrinter link – RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (1)

Development software XBT L1001 and XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP)

Operating systems Magelis

Type of terminal XBT N XBT H XBT HM

Pages Consult our catalogue “Operator dialogue terminals”

(1) Depending on model

7/3

7

7

Display of text messagesControl and parametering of data

Display of text messages and/or semi-graphicsControl and parametering of data

Terminals



Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (240 x 64 pixels),height 5.3 or 10.6 mm

2 lines of 20 characters 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters 4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40 characters

Via keypad with8 function keys + 9 service keysorkeypad with 12 function keys+ 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys

Via keypad with24 function keys+ 10 service keys+ 12 alphanumeric keys

Via keypad with12 function keys10 service keys12 numeric keys4 soft function keys

256 Kb Flash EPROM 384 Kb Flash EPROM 512 Kb Flash EPROM

–




50Alphanumeric Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge

––Depending on model

Access to the PLC real-time clock Built-in Access to the PLC real-time clockNo Yes No

RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens

AS-i using 22.5 pitch module – AS-i using 22.5 pitch moduleRS 232 C asynchronous serial link (1)

XBT L1001 and XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP)

Magelis

XBT P XBT E XBT PM

Consult our catalogue “Operator dialogue terminals”

7/4

7


Magelis graphic terminals

Applications Display of text messages and graphic objectsControl and parametering of data

Type of unit Graphic terminals

Display Type Back-lit monochrome LCD (320 x 240 pixels)or Colour LCD STN with touch-sensitive screen (320 x 240 pixels) with optimum viewing angle (1)

Capacity 5.7"

Data entry Via touch-sensitive screen4 tactile feedback keys (XBT-FC)

Via keypad with10 static function keys 8 soft function keys12 service keys12 alphanumeric keys

Memory capacity Application 8 Mb Flash EPROM (via PCMCIA type II card)

Extension By PCMCIA type II card, 8 or 16 Mb

Functions Maximum number of pages 50 to 720 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card used (512 alarms maximum)

Variables per page 64

Representation of variables Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, potentiometer, selector

Recipes 125 records maximum with 5000 values maximumCurves 16

Alarm logs YesReal-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clockAlarm relay Yes

Communication Asynchronous serial link RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422Downloadable protocols Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens

Bus and networks Modbus Plus, Fipio/Fipway with add-on PCMCIA type III card, Ethernet 10/100 TCP/IP (1) (2)

Printer link RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (depending on model)

Development software XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP)

Operating systems Magelis

Type of terminal XBT F01/F03/FC

Pages Consult our catalogue “Operator dialogue terminals”(1) Depending on model.(2) TCP/IP with Modbus protocol for XBT F.(3) Uni-Telway version V2 for Nano/Micro/Premium PLCs.

7/5

7

7

New Technology touch-sensitive graphic terminals

Back-lit monochrome LCD (640 x 480 pixels)or Back-lit colour LCD TFT (640 x 480 pixels) with optimum viewing angle (1)

Back-lit monochrome (blue or black and white mode) or colour LCD STN or LCD TFT (320 x 240 pixels) or Back-lit colour LCD TFT (640 x 480 pixels or 800 x 600 pixels)or Back-lit colour LCD STN (640 x 480 pixels)

9.5" (monochrome)10.4" (colour)

5.7" (monochrome or colour)7.4", 10.4" and 12.1" (colour)

Via touch-sensitive screen8, 12 or 16 tactile feedback keys (XBT-FC) (1)

Via keypad with12 static function keys 10 soft function keys12 service keys12 alphanumeric keys

Via touch-sensitive screen (1)

4…8 Mb (1)

By "Compact Flash" card, 16 or 32 Mb

30 to 480 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card used(512 alarms maximum)

Limited by the internal Flash memory capacity or "Compact Flash" card memory capacity

Unrestricted

Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, button, light, clock, flashing light, keypad

–

Yes, with log

Built-in

–

RS 232 C/RS 485

Uni-Telway (3), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP

Ethernet (1), IEEE 802.3 10 BaseT, RJ 45

For future use

VJD SPUL FUCDV10M (under Windows 2000 and XP)

Magelis (CPU 100 MHz RISC)

XBT F02/F03/FC XBT G

Consult our catalogue “Operator dialogue terminals”

0485Q-FR_Ver2.0.fm/2

Guide de choix Interface Homme/Machine 0

PC industriels Magelis iPC

Applications Produits compacts “Tout en Un”

Ecran 12”SVGA (800 x 600)

Saisie par clavier

Saisie par clavier et écran tactile

Saisie par écran tactile

Ecran 15”XGA (1024 x 768)

Saisie par clavier

Saisie par clavier et écran tactile

Saisie par écran tactile p p

Pages –

Unité centraleControl box

Modèle Smart iPC Compact iPC

Processeur VIA 667 MHz Intel Pentium 4 Mobile1,7 GHz

Disque dur interne – u 20 Go

Mémoire RAM 128 Mo ext. jusqu’à 512 Mo 256 Mo extensible jusqu’à 512 Mo

Lecteur de CD-Rom – Oui

Lecteur de disquette – Oui

Emplacements disponible pourextension

2 emplacements PCMCIA 1 emplacement bus PCI,2 emplacements PCMCIA,1 emplacement Compact Flash

Réseau Ethernet TCP/IP 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

Ports d’entrées/sorties 2 x USB, 1 x COM1,1 x COM2, 1 x parallèle

2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM2, 1 x COM3, 1 x parallèle

1 x clavier PS/2 1 x USB sur face avant, 1 x clavier PS/2, 1 x dispositif depointage PS/2

Système d’exploitation Système d’exploitation intégréWindows XPe

Système d’exploitation pré-installé Windows 2000

Logiciel ou pack logicielpréinstallé

Navigation WebTransparent Ready

–Vijeo Look

–Vijeo Look

Tension d’alimentation c 24 V a 115...230 V

Type de PC ou d’unité centraleControl box

MPC ST5 2NDJ 00T MPC KT5 2NAA 00p MPC KT5 5NAA 00p

Pages 43632/7

0485Q-FR_Ver2.0.fm/3

0

Produits modulaires(Unité centrale Control box à associer avec 1 face avant écran ou à utiliser seul) (1)

MPC NA2 0NNN 00NMPC NB2 0NNN 00N

MPC NT2 0NNN 00N

MPC NA5 0NNN 00NMPC NB5 0NNN 00N

MPC NT5 0NNN 00N

43631/7

Modular iPC Small Modular iPC Medium Modular iPC Large

Intel Celeron 566 MHz Intel Pentium III850 MHz

Intel Celeron 566 MHz Intel Pentium III 850 MHz

u 20 Go, extractible

En option Oui, extractible

Oui, extractible

– 1 emplacement bus ISA,1 emplacement bus PCI et1 emplacement bus ISA/PCI

2 emplacements bus ISA,3 emplacements bus PCI et1 emplacement bus ISA/PCI

2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM4 et 1 x parallèle

1 x écran vidéo externe VGA, 1 x clavier PS/2 (2), 1 x dispositif de pointage PS/2 (2)

Système d’exploitation Windows pré-installé (Windows 2000 ou Windows XPe)

Pack A – Pack A, B, C ou D(a 115…230 V)

– Pack E (modèle a 115…230 V)

a 115...230 V c 24 V a 115…230 V ou c 24 V selon modèle

MPC AN02NAp 00N

MPC AN02NDp 00N

MPC BN02NpA 00N

MPC BN05NpA 00N

MPC CN0 2NpA 00N MPC CN0 5NpA 00N

43631/8 et 43631/9

(1) L’utilisation d’une unité centrale Control box sans face avant écran nécessite le panneau de montage MPC NP0 0NNN 00N.(2) Port non opérationnel lorsque l’unité centrale Control box est équipée de la face avant écran.

8/0

8

8/1

8

Contents 8 - Services 8

8 - Servicesb Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/2

b TSX PSY power supply module selection document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/4

b Standards, certifications and environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/6

b Automation product certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8

b Community regulations and protective treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/9

b Schneider Electric worldwide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/10

b Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/16

8/2

8


Documentation

PLC products are generally supplied with :b A B7 format multilingual Quick Reference Guide (128 x 92 mm) for TSX PLC bases and their modulesb A PL7 software installation and start-up guide, A5 format document (210 x 148 mm)

A multilingual online contextual help is integrated in PL7 software. Paper versions of hardware and software installation manuals should be ordered separately. Documentation on CD-ROM (English and French)Description Composition Reference

(1)Weight

kgTSX technical documentation

Includes all documentation for PLCs, software, networks, buses and terminals

TSX CD D MTE 13F 0.080

2.000

A5 bound documentations manuals (french)PLCsDescription Inclus dans le produit Reference

(1)Weight

kgMicro PLC hardware installation : bases, discrete I/O modules, application-specific modules, Telefast 2, process power supplies and AS-Interface bus

To be ordered separately TSX DM 37 50F 0.660

Premium PLC hardware installation : bases, discrete I/O modules, application-specific modules, Telefast 2, process power supplies and AS-Interface bus

To be ordered separately TSX DM 57 43F 0.740

Nano PLC installation and programming

T FTX 117 071F (FTX 117 terminal)

TLX DM 07 117F 0.265

TLX L PL7p30F (PL7 07 software)

TLX DM 07 DSF 0.320

Twido installation and programming

To be ordered separately TWD USE 10AF –

PL7 softwareAll PL7 software installation manuals(reference, application-specific functions, communication, converters, runtime screens, diagnostics)

To be ordered separately TLX DOC PL7 44F 3.210

A5 bound documentation manuels (french)TerminalsDescription Included with product Reference

(1)Weight

kgXBT-H/P/E terminals user's manual

To be ordered separately XBT X000FR 0.200

T XBT graphic stations user's manual

T XBT F024p10F T XBT DM 00F 0.500

CCX 17 application design under Windows

TMX LP M17 XWF 6F TMX DM M17 W V6F 0.340

(1) Documentation in French, German, Spanish, etc, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

8/3

8


Documentation

Buses and networksElectromagnetic compatibility of buses and network reference manual

To be ordered separately TSX DGK BL F –

X-Way communication reference manual

To be ordered separately TSX DR NET F 0.320

Fipway network installation and setup

To be ordered separately TSX DG FPW F 0.140

Fipio bus reference manual To be ordered separately TSX DR FIP F 0.230

Fipio/Fipway fibre optic transceiver setup

To be ordered separately TSX DM OZD 01F 0.110

Modbus Plus network installation guide

A commander separement 890 USE 100 01 0.040

Ethernet (10BASE5) network reference manual

To be ordered separately TSX DR ETH F 0.120

Ethernet TCP/IP network reference manual

To be ordered separately 490 USE 133 01 –

Uni-Telway bus installation and setup

To be ordered separately TSX DG UTW F 0.060

Modbus bus user's manual To be ordered separately TSX DG MDB F 0.040

INTERBUS-S module installation manual

To be ordered separately TSX DM IBY 100F 0.140

Profibus-DP module installation manual

To be ordered separately TSX DM PBY 100F 0.140

CANopen bus module installation manual

To be ordered separately TSX DM CPP 100F –

Jnet network user's manual (English and French)

To be ordered separately TSX DG JNT M 0.360

Momentum distributed I/OBase unit installation manual To be ordered separately 870 USE 002 01 –

Modbus plus communicator installation manual


Fipio communicator installation manual


(1) Documentation in French, German, Spanish, etc, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

8/4

8

TSX PSY power supply module selection document(specimen to be photocopied)


The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number of modules installed. It is therefore necessary to create a power consumption table for each rack in order to define the most suitable TSX PSY power supply module for each rack.The table below can be used to calculate the consumption on the three different voltages to be supplied (c 5 V, c 24 V, c 24 VR).Procedure :b Check and choose a power supply module corresponding to the power supplies available for the 3 voltages.b Check that the total power absorbed on these three voltages does not exceed the overall power of the power supply module.b Values to be entered according to the type of Premium PLC configuration.

Reference Format Number Consumption in mA (1)Rack n° S : standard voltage c 5 V voltage c 24 VR voltage c 24 V

D : double Module Total Module Total Module Total

Processor with memory extension card

TSX P57 103M S 440TSX P57 153M S 530TSX P57 203M D 750TSX P57 2623M D 1110TSX P57 253M D 820TSX P57 2823M D 1180TSX P57 303M D 1000TSX P57 3623M D 1360TSX P57 353M D 1060TSX P57 453M D 1080TSX P57 4823M D 1440

Discrete I/O TSX DEY 08D2 S 55 80TSX DEY 16A2 S 80TSX DEY 16A3 S 80TSX DEY 16A4 S 80TSX DEY 16A5 S 80TSX DEY 16D2 S 80 135TSX DEY 16D3 S 80 135TSX DEY 16FK S 250 75TSX DEY 32D2K S 135 160TSX DEY 32D3K S 140 275TSX DEY 64D2K S 155 315TSX DSY 08R4D S 55 80TSX DSY 08R5 S 55 70TSX DSY 08R5A S 55 80TSX DSY 08S5 S 125TSX DSY 08T2 S 55TSY DSY 08T22 S 55TSX DSY 08T31 S 55TSX DSY 16R5 S 80 135TSX DSY 16S4 S 220TSX DSY 16S5 S 220TSX DSY 16T2 S 80TSX DSY 16T3 S 80TSX DSY 32T2K S 140TSX DSY 64T2K S 155TSX DMY 28FK S 300 75TSX DMY 28RFK S 300 75

Bus X remote system TSX REY 200 S 500Analogue I/O

TSX AEY 414 S 660TSX AEY 420 S 500TSX AEY 800 S 270TSX AEY 810 S 475TSX AEY 1600 S 270TSX AEY 1614 S 300TSX ASY 410 S 900TSX ASY 800 (2) S 200 300

SafetyTSX PAY 262 S 150 200TSX PAY 282 S 150 200

Total (cary over to page 8/5) Current (mA)

(1)Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.(2) If using an external c 24 VR power supply, the 300 mA consumption on the internal 24 VR should not be included when selecting the

rack power supply.

8/5

8

TSX PSY power supply module selection document(specimen to be photocopied)


Reference Format Number Consumption in mA (1)Rack n° S : standard voltage c 5 V voltage c 24 VR voltage c 24 V

D : double Module Total Module Total Module Total

Carried forward

Counting, motion control, weighing TSX CTY 2A S 280 30

TSX CTY 4A S 330 36TSX CTY 2C S 850 15TSX CCY 1128 S 660 15TSX CAY 21 S 1100 15TSX CAY 41 D 1500 30TSX CAY 22 S 1100 15TSX CAY 42 D 1500 30TSX CAY 33 D 1500 30TSX CFY 11 S 510 50TSX CFY 21 S 650 100TSX CSY 84 D 1800TSX CSY 164 D 2000TSX ISP Y101 S 150 145

Communication TSX ETY 4103/5103 S 360TSX ETY 110/210 (2) S 800TSX ETY 110/210 (3) S 1200TSX ETY 110 WS (2) S 800TSX ETY 110 WS (3) S 1200TSX IBY 100 S 500TSX PBY 100 S 400TSX SAY 100 S 110TSX SAY 1000 S 100TSX SCY 11601 S 350TSX SCY 21601 S 350TSX SCP 111 – 140TSX SCP 112 – 120TSX SCP 114 – 150TSX FPP 10 – 330TSX FPP 20 – 330TSX JNP 112 – 120TSX JNP 114 – 150TSX MBP 100 – 220TSX CPP 110 – 600TSX P ACC 01 – 150

Terminal T FTX 117 ADJ 02 – 310

Terminal port junction box

TSX P ACC01 – 150

Consumption per voltageTotal

of the 3 powersTotal current (mA)

x 5 V + x 24 VR + x 24 VPower (mW) =

Supply Power available in mW Overall

Choice of power supply

TSX PSY 1610 S c 24 V non isolated 15 000 15 000 – 30 000TSX PSY 2600 S a 100…240 V 25 000 15 000 12 000 26 000TSX PSY 3610 D c 24 V non isolated 35 000 19 000 – 50 000TSX PSY 5520 D c 24…48 V isolated 35 000 19 000 – 50 000TSX PSY 5500 D a 100…120 V/

200…240 V35 000 19 000 19 000 50 000

TSX PSY 8500 D a 100…120 V/200…240 V

75 000 – 38 000 77 000 (5)

(1) Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.(2) Without remote power supply (RJ 45).(3) With remote power supply (AUI).(4) If using an external c 24 V sensor power supply, the consumption on the c 24 V voltage should not be included.(5) 77,000 mW at 60 °C, 85,000 mW at 55 °C or 100,000 mW at 55 °C when using TSX FAN fan modules.

8/6


Standards, certifications and environment conditions

Modicon Premium and Atrium PLCs have been developed to conform to the principal national and international standards concerning electronic equipment for industrial automation systems.

b Requirements specific to programmable controllers: functional characteristics, immunity, resistance, safety, etc.: IEC 61131-2, CSA 22.2 N° 142, UL 508.b Merchant navy requirements of the main international bodies: ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LR, RINA, RMRS, etc.b Compliance with European Directives:v Low Voltage: 73/23/EEC amendment 93/68/EEC,v Electromagnetic Compatibility: 89/336/EEC amendments 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC.b Electrical qualities and self-extinguishing capacity of insulating materials: UL 746C, UL 94.b Hazardous areas calssification: CSA 22.2 No. 213, Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D..

Premium/Atrium PLCs meet the requirements of "TC" treatment (Treatment for all Climates).For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding to "TH" treatment (treatment for hot and humid environments), Premium PLCs must be embedded in envelopes with a minimum IP 54 protection, in compliance with IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040.

Premium/Atrium PLCs themselves offer protection to IP 20 level (1). They can therefore be installed without an envelope in reserved-access areas which do not exceed pollution level 2 (control room with no dust-producing machine or activity). The pollution level 2 does not take account of more severe environmental conditions: air pollution by dust, smoke, corrosive or radioactive particles, vapours or salts, attack by fungi, insects, ...

Where:Un: nominal voltageFn: nominal frequencyUdl: detection level when powered

(e): tests required by European directives e and based on IEC / EN 61131-2 standards.(6) In the case where a position is not occupied by a module, a TSX RKA 02 protection cover

must be installed.(7) Devices must be installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the

TSX DG KBL E manual "Electromagnetic compatibility of networks and field buses".

Standards and certifications

CharacteristicsService conditions and recommendations relating to environment

Temperature Operation ° C 0...+ 60 (to IEC 61131-2, + 5...+ 55)0...+ 70 with TSX FAN fan modules

Storage ° C -25...+ 70 (according to IEC 61131-2)Relative humidity Operation % 10…95 without condensation

Storage % 5…95 without condensation (according to IEC 61131-2)Altitude m 0…2000Supply voltage TSX PSY p610 TSX PSY 5520 TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY p500

Nominal voltage V c 24 c 48 a 100...240 a 100...120a 200...240

Limit voltages c 19..30 c 19...60 a 90...264 a 140/190...264Nominal frequencies Hz – – 50/60 50/60

Limit frequencies Hz – – 47/63 47/63

Protective treatment of Modicon Premium PLCs

Environment testsName of test Standards Levels

Immunity to LF interference (e) (2)

Voltage and frequency variation IEC/EN 61131-2 0.85 Un/0.95 Fn for 30 minutes; 1.15 Un/1.05 Fn for 30 minutes;0.8 Un/0.9 Fn for 5 seconds; 1.2 Un/1.1 Fn for 5 seconds

Direct voltage variation IEC/EN 61131-2 0.85 Un...1.2 Un for 30 minutes with 5% ripple (peak values)

Harmonic 3 IEC/EN 61131-2 10 % Un; 0°/5 min...180°/5 minShort momentary interrupt IEC/EN 61131-2 10 ms with a supply; 1 ms with c supplyVoltage shut-down/start-up IEC/EN 61131-2 Un-0-Un; Un for 60 s; 3 cycles separated by 10 s

Un-0-Un; Un for 5 s; 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 sUn-0.9-Udl; Un for 60 s; 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s

Standards and certifications

8/7


Standards, certifications and environment conditions

Name of test Standards Levels

Immunity to HF interference. (e) (1)

Damped oscillatory wave IEC 61000-4-12 a / c supply: 1kV in serial modeDiscrete I/O u 24V: 1 kV in serial mode

Electrical fast transient bursts IEC 61000-4-4 a / c supply: 2 kV in wire/common modeDiscrete I/O > 48V: 2 kV in common mode; other ports: 1 kV in common mode

Surge IEC 61000-4-5 a / csupply: 2 kV in wire mode/1 kV in serial mode; Discrete I/O a: 2 kV in wire mode/1 kV in serial mode; Discrete I/O c: 2 kV in wire mode/0.5 kV in serial mode; shielded cable: 1 kV in common mode

Electrostatic discharges IEC 61000-4-2 6 kV contact, 8 kV air

Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m; 80 MHz...2 GHzSinusoidal modulation amplitude 80 %/1 kHz

Conducted interference induced by radiated field

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V/0,15 MHz...80 MHzSinusoidal modulation amplitude 80%/1 kHz

Electromagnetic emissions (e) (1) (2)

Interference voltage IEC 61000-6-4 Class A150 kHz...500 kHz quasi-peak 79 dB (µV); average 66 dB (µV)500 kHz...30 MHz quasi-peak 73 dB (µV); average 60 dB (µV)

Interference field (3) IEC 61000-6-4 Class A, 10 m measurement30 MHz...230 MHz quasi-peak 40 dB (µV); 230 MHz...1 GHz quasi-peak 47 dB (µV)

Immunity to climatic variationsDry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bd 60 ° C for 16 hours (D.O); 40 ° C for 16 hours (D.C)Cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ad 0 ° C for 16 hours Continuous humid heat IEC 60068-2-3 Ca 60 ° C with 93 % relative humidity/96 hours (D.O);

40 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity/96 hours (D.C); Cyclical humid heat IEC 60068-2-3 Db [55 ° C (D.O)/40 ° C (D.O)] - 25 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity; 2 cycles: 12 hours/12 hours

Cyclical temperature variations IEC 60068-2-14 Nb 0 ° C...60 ° C/5 cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.O)0 ° C...40 ° C/5 cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.C)

Temperature Rise IEC 61131-2/UL 508CSA 22-2 No.142

Ambient temperature: 60 ° C

Withstand to climatic variationsDry heat (power off) IEC 60068-2-2 Bb 70 ° C for 96 hours Cold (power off) IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -25 ° C for 96 hours Humid heat (power off) IEC 60068-2-30 dB 60 ° C-25 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity; 2 cycles: 12 hours/12 hours

Heat shocks when not operational IEC 60068-2-14 Na - 25 ° C...70 ° C; 2 cycles: 3 hours/3 hours

Immunity to mechanical constraintsSinusoidal vibrations IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz...100 Hz/1 mm amplitude/0.7 g; endurance: fr/90 min/axis (application coefficient < 10)

IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 10...150 Hz/75 µm amplitude/1 g; endurance: 10 cycles of 1 octave/minShocks IEC 60068-2-27 Ea 15 g-11 ms; 3 shocks/direction/axis

Withstand to mechanical constraintsFlat freefall IEC 60068-2-32 Ed 10 cm/2 falls

Controlled position freefall IEC 60068-2-31 Ec 30 ° or 10 cm/2 falls Random freefall, equipment in packaging

IEC 60068-2-32 method 1 1 m/5 falls

Equipment and personnel safety (1)

Dielectric strength and insulation resistance (e)

UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.14 IEC 60950

c 24/48V supply: 1,500 V rms; a 100/220V supply: 2,000 V rms Discrete I/O u 48 V: 500 V rms; Discrete I/O > 48 V: 2,000 V rms; > 10 MΩ

Continuity of earth(e) UL 508CSA 22-2 No.142

< 0,1 Ω/30 A/2 min

Leakage current (e) CSA 22-2 No.142/IEC 60950 < 3.5 mA fixed device Protection offered by enclosures (e)

CSA 22-2 No.142IEC 60950

IP 20

Withstand to impacts CSA 22-2 No.142/IEC 60950 500 g sphere: fall from 1.3 mD.O: Device Open (device to be embedded in an envelope D.C: Device Closed (device can be installed without envelope), see (1) page 8/6

(e): tests required by European directives e. and based on IEC / EN 61131-2 standards.

(1) Devices must be installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the TSX DG KBL E manual "Electromagnetic compatibility of networks and field buses".

(2) These tests are performed without a cabinet, with devices fixed on a metal grid and wired as per the recommendations in the industrial TSX DG KBL E manual "Electromagnetic compatibility of networks and field buses".

(3) In the case where the limits of electromagnetic emissions between 30 MHz and 1 GHz must be supervised, it is recommended to use the TSX RKY 6EX/8EX racks instead of the TSX RKY 6/8 racks.

Environment tests

8/8

8


Automation products certifications

In some countries, certification of certain electrical components is enforced by law. A standard conformity certificate is then issued by the official organization. Each certified product must carry approval symbols when enforced.Use on board merchant navy vessels generally requires prior approval (= certification) of an electrical device by certain marine classification authorities.

The table below shows the situation as of the 01.05.2002 for certifications obtained or pending from organizations for base PLCs. An overview of certificates for Telemecanique products is available on our Internet web site : www.telemecanique.com

Key Certification body CountryCSA Canadian Standards Association CanadaC-Tick Australian Communication Authority AustraliaGOST Institut de recherche Scientifique Gost Standardt C.I.S., Russia

UL Underwriters Laboratories USAKey Classification authority Country

ABS American Bureau of Shipping USA

BV Bureau Veritas FranceDNV Det Norske Veritas NorwayGL Germanischer Lloyd Germany

LR Lloyd's Register United-KingdomRINA Registro Italiano Navale ItaliyRMRS Register of Shipping C.I.S.

Product certifications Certifications

C-Tick

Certified HazardouslocationsClass 1, div 2 (1)

Pending certification UL CSA ACA SIMTARS GOST

USA Canada Australia Australia CEI, Russia USAdvantys STBCCX 17Lexium MHD/BPHMagelis iPCMagelis XBT-F/FCMagelis XBT-G/H/P/E/HM/PMMomentumNanoPremiumQuantumTBXTelefast 2TSX MicroTSX/PMX 47 à 107Twido (1)Twin Line

(1) Hazardous locations: CSA 22.2 no. 213, certified products are suitable for use in Class I, division 2, groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous locations only.

(2) cULus north-american certification (Canada and US).

Specific certifications BG Germany TSX DPZ 10D2A safety module (TSX Micro)

TSX PAY 262/282 safety modules (Premium)

AS-Interface Europe TSX SAZ 10 master module (TSX Micro) TSX SAY 100/1000 master modules (Premium)TBX SAP 10 Fipio bus/AS-Interface bus gateway

8/9

8


Automation products certifications Community regulations

The opening of European markets implies a harmonization of regulations in the various European Union member states.European Directives are documents used to remove obstacles to the free movement of goods and their application is compulsory in all states of the European Union.Member states are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and, at the same time, to withdraw any conflicting regulations.The Directives, particularly those of a technical nature with which we are concerned, only set objectives, called “general requirements”.The manufacturer must take all necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each Directive relating to his equipment.As a general rule, the manufacturer affirms that his product conforms to the necessary requirements of the Directive(s) by applying the e label to his product.e marking is applied to Telemecanique products where relevant.

b e marking on a product means that the manufacturer certifies that his product conforms to the relevant European Directives ; it is necessary in order that a product which is subject to a Directive(s) can be marketed and freely moved within the European Union.b e marking is intended solely for the national authorities responsible for market regulation.

For electrical equipment, only conformity of the product to standards indicates that it is suitable for use, and only a guarantee by a recognised manufacturer can ensure a high level of quality.One or more Directives, as appropriate, may apply to our products, in particular :b The Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC : e marking under the terms of this Directive is compulsory as of 1 January 1997.b The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC : e marking on the products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1 January 1996.

Marine classificationMarine classification des authorities

Certified

Pending certification ABS BV DNV GL LR RINA RMRS

USA France Norway Germany Unit.-Kingdom Italiy C.I.S.

Advantys STBCCX 17Lexium MHD/BPHMagelis iPCMagelis XBT-F/FCMagelis XBT-H/P/E/HM/PMMomentumNanoPremiumQuantumTBXTelefast 2TSX MicroTSX/PMX 47 à 107TwidoTwin Line

Community regulations European directives

The significance of e marking

8/10

8

Schneider Electric worldwide 8

Afghanistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India

Albania Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Austria

Algeria b Schneider Electric voie A Lot C22Zone industrielle Rouiba - Alger

Tel. : +213 21 92 97 02 à 09Fax : +213 21 92 97 00 à 01

Andorra Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric France

Angola Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa

Anguilla Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Antartica Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Brazil

Antigua & Barbuda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Argentina b Schneider Argentina Viamonte 2850 - 1678 Caseros(provincia Buenos Aires)

Tel.: +54 1 716 88 88Fax: +54 1 716 88 33

www.schneider-electric.com.ar

Armenia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Aruba Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Australia b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. Limited

2 Solent CircuitNorwest Business ParkBaulkham Hill _ NSW 2153

Tel.: +61 298 51 28 00Fax: +61 296 29 83 40

www.schneider.com.au

Austria b Schneider Austria Ges.m.b.H. Birostrasse 111239 Wien

Tel.: +431 610 540Fax: +431 610 54 54

www.schneider-electric.at

Azerbaijan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Bahamas b Schneider Electric Union VillagePO Box 3901 - Nassau

Tel. : +1 242 327 42 91Fax : +1 242 327 42 91

www.squared.com

Bahrain b Schneider Electric Floor 1 - Juma BuildingAbu Horaira AvenuePO Box 355 - 304 Manama

Tel.: +97 322 7897Fax: +97 321 8313

Bangladesh Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India

Barbados Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Belarus b Schneider Electric Industries SA Prospect Macherova 5, of. 202220004 Minsk

Tel. : +375 172 23 75 50Fax : +375 172 23 97 61

Belgium b Schneider Electric nv/sa Dieweg 3B - 1180 Brussels

Tel.: +3223737711Fax: +3223753858

www.schneider-electric.be

Belize Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric USA

Benin Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast

Bermuda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Bhutan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India

Bolivia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Chile

Bosnia and Herzegovina Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Croatia

Botswana Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa

Bouvet island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Brazil b Schneider Electric Brazil Ltda. Avenida Das Nações Unidas 23223Jurubatuba - CEP 04795-907São Paulo-SP

Tel.: +55 55 24 52 33Fax: +55 55 22 51 34

www.schneider-electric.com.br

Brunei (Darussalam) Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Singapore

Bulgaria b Schneider Electric Expo 2000, Boulevard Vaptzarov1407 Sofiav

Tel.: +3592 919 42Fax: +3592 962 44 39

www.schneiderelectric.bg

Burkina Faso Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast

Burundi Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya

Cambodia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Viet Nam

Cameroon b Schneider Electric Cameroon 166, rue de l'Hôtel de VilleBP12087 - Douala

Tel.: +237 343 38 84Fax: +237 343 11 94

Canada b Schneider Canada 19, Waterman AvenueM4 B1Y2 Toronto - Ontario

Tel.: +1 416 752 8020Fax: +1 416 752 4203

www.schneider-electric.ca

Cape Verde Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal

Caribee Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Cayman islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Central African Republic Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon

Chad Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon

Chile b Schneider Electric Chile S.A. Avda. Pdte Ed. Frei Montalva, 6001-31 Conchali - Santiago

Tel.: +56 2 444 3000Fax: +56 2 423 9335

www.schneider-electric.co.cl

China b Schneider Beijing Landmark bldg-Room 18018 North Dong Sanhuan RdChaoyang District 100004 Beijing

Tel.: +86 10 65 90 69 07Fax: +86 10 65 90 00 13

www.schneider-electric.com.cn

Up-dated: 28-07-2003


Up-dated: 28-07-2003

8/11

8

Christmas island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Cocos (Keeling) islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Colombia b Schneider Electric de Colombia S.A.

Calle 45A #102-48Bogota DC

Tel.: +57 1 426 97 00Fax: +57 1 426 97 40

Comoros Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric la Reunion

Congo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon

Cook islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Costa Rica b Schneider Centroamérica Ltda. 1.5 kmts oeste de la Embajada Americana,Pavas, San José, Costa Rica C.A.Apartado: 4123-1000 San Jose

Tel.: +506 232-60-55Fax: +506 232-04-26

www.schneider-ca.com

Croatia b Schneider Electric SA Fallerovo Setaliste 22HR - 10000 Zagreb

Tel.: +385 1 367 100Fax: +385 1 367 111

Cuba b Schneider Electric Bureau de Liaison de La HavaneCalle 36- N°306-Apto1Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida MiramarPlaya Habana

Tel.: +53 724 15 59Fax: +53 724 12 17

Cyprus b Schneider Electric Cyprus 28 General Timayia AvenueKyriakos Building, Block #A301Larnaca 6046

Tel.: +00357 248 12646Fax: +00357 246 37382

Czech Republic b Schneider Electric CZ, s.r.o. Thámova 13Praha 8 - 186 00

Tel.: +420 2 810 88 111Fax: +420 2 24 81 08 49

www.schneider-electric.cz

Democratic Rep. of Congo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon

Denmark b Schneider Electric A/S Baltorpbakken 14DK-2750 Ballerup

Tel.: +45 44 73 78 88Fax: +45 44 68 5255

www.schneider-electric.dk

Djibouti Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt

Dominican Republic b Schneider Electric Calle Jacinto ManonEsq. Federico GeraldinoEdificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402,Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo

Tel.: +1 809 334 66 63Fax: +1 809 334 66 68

Ecuador b Schneider Electric Ecuador SA Av.Republica del Salvador 1082 y Nac Edificio Mansion Blanca-Quito

Tel. : +593 2 224 42 42Fax : +593 2 224 42 94

Egypt b Schneider Electric Egypt sae 68, El Tayaran StreetNasr City, 11371 - Cairo

Tel.: +20 24 01 01 19Fax: +20 24 01 66 87

www.schneider.com.eg

El Salvador Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric USA

Equatorial Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon

Eritrea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt

Estonia b Lexel Electric Ehitajate tee 110EE 12618 Talinn

Tel. : +372 650 97 00Fax : +372 650 97 22

Ethiopia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt

Falkland islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Brazil

Faroe islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Fiji Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Finland b Schneider Electric Oy Sinimäentie 1402630 Espoo

Tel. : +358 9 527 000Fax : +358 9 5270 0376

www.schneider-electric.fi

France b Schneider Electric SA 5, rue Nadar92500 Rueil Malmaison

Tel.: +33 (0)1 41 29 82 00Fax: +33 (0)1 47 51 80 20

www.schneider-electric.fr

French Polynesia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

French West Indies Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Gabon Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon

Gambia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal

Georgia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Germany b Schneider Electric GmbH Gothaer Straße 29D-40880 Ratingen

Tel.: +49210 240 40Fax: +492 10 240 49 256

www.schneiderelectric.de

Ghana b Schneider Electric Ghana PMB Kia3rd Floor Opeibea HouseAirport Commercial CenterLiberation road - Accra

Tel. : +233 21 70 11 687Fax : +233 21 77 96 22

Gilbraltar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Spain

Greece b Schneider Electric AE 14th km - RN Athens-LamiaGR - 14564 Kifissia

Tel.: +302 106 29 52 00Fax: +302 106 29 52 10

www.schneider-electric.com.gr

Greenland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States

Grenada Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Guadeloupe Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Martinique

Guam Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia


Up-dated: 28-07-2003

8/12

8

Guatemala Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States

Guinea-Bissau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Sénégal

Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast

Guyana Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States

Haiti Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Heard & Mac Donald isl. Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Honduras Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States

Hong Kong b Schneider Electric (Hong Kong) Ltd

Room 3108-28, 31th Floor,Sun Hung Kai Centre,30 Harbour Road, Wanchai

Tel.: +852 25 65 06 21Fax: +852 28 11 10 29

Hungary b Schneider Electric Hungária Villamossági Rt.

Fehérvári út 108 – 112H-1116 Budapest

Tel.: +36 1 382 26-06Fax: +36 1 206 1429

www.schneider-electric.hu

Iceland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Denmark

India b Schneider Electric India Max House, 1 Dr Jha Marg, Okhla110 020 New Dehli

Tel. : +91 11 631 85 84Tel. : +91 11 631 71 61

www.schneiderelectric-in.com

Indonesia b P.T. Schneider Indonesia Ventura Building 7th FloorJalan R.A. Kartini Kav.26Cilandak - 12430 Jakarta

Tel.: +62 +21 750 44 06Fax: +62 +21 750 44 15/ 16

www.schneider-electric.co.id

Iran (Islamic Republic of) b Telemecanique Iran 1047 Avenue VALI ASSRP.O. Box 15875-3547 15116 Teheran

Tel.: +98 218 71 01 42Fax: +98 218 71 81 87

Irak b Schneider Electric Industries SA 38050 Grenoble Cedex 9 Tel.: +33 04 76 60 54 27Fax: +33 04 76 60 56 60

Ireland b Schneider Electric Ireland Maynooth RoadCellbridge - Co. Kildare

Tel.: +353+0 1 6012200Fax: +353+0 1 6012201

www.schneiderelectric.ie

Italy b Schneider Electric S.p.A. Centro Direzionale ColleoniPalazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 720041 Agrate Brianza (Mi)

Tel.: +39 39 655 8111Fax: +39 39 605 6237

www.schneiderelectric.it

Ivory Coast b Schneider Electric Afrique de l'Ouest

Rue Pierre et Marie Curie18 BP 2027 Abidjan 18

Tel.: +225 21 75 00 10Fax: +225 21 75 00 30

Jamaica b Schneider Electric Shop#5, Plaza Dunrobin30 Dunrobin Avenue - Kingstown

Tel. : +1876 755 41 27Tel. : +931 87 74

Japan b Schneider Electric Japan Ltd Torigoe F. Bldg1-8-2, TorigoeTaito-Ku - 111-0054 Tokyo

Tel.: +81 358 35 35 81Fax: +81 358 35 35 85

www.schneider-electric.co.jp

Jordan b Schneider Electric Industr. Jordan Jordan University StreetAbu Al Haj Commercial Complex2nd Floor - Office # 202 - Amman

Tel.: 962 65 16 78 87Fax: 962 65 16 79 1

Kazakstan b Schneider Electric Kazakhstan Liaison Office

Prospekt Abaia 157 off 9480009 Almaty

Tel. : +7 327 250 93 88Tel. : +7 327 250 63 70

Kenya b Schneider East Africa Power Technics ComplexMonbasa Road - PO Box 46345Nairobi

Tel. : +254 2.824.156Fax : +254 2.824.157

Kiribati Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Korea b Schneider Electric Korea Ltd 3Floor, Cheil Bldg., 94-46, 7-KaYoungdeungpodong, Youngdeungpo-ku150-037 Seoul

Tel. : +82 2 2630 9700Fax : +82 2 2630 9800

www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/

Kurdistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Kuwait b Schneider Electric Kuwait Al Gaas Tower - Sharq 2nd FloorPO Box 20092 - 13 061 Safat

Tel.: +965 240 75 46Fax: +965 240 75 06

Kyrgyz Republic Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Laos Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Thailand

Latvia b Lexel Electric 60A A.Deglava str.LV1035 Riga

Tel. : +371 780 23 74/75Fax : +371 754 62 80

Lebanon b Schneider Electric Liban Tabaris, Avenue Charles MalekImmeuble Ashada, 8P.O. Box 166223 - Beyrouth

Tel. : +961 1 20 46 20Tel. : +961 1 20 31 19

Lesotho Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa

Liberia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ghana

Libya Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Tunisia

Liechtenstein Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Switzerland

Lithuania b Lexel Electric 44, Verkiu str.LT-2012 Vilnius

Tel. : +370 278 59 59/61Fax : +370 278 59 60

Loro Sae Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Luxembourg b Schneider Electric Industrie SAS Agence de Metz1, Rue Graham Bell - BP n° 3519057075 Metz cedex 3 - France

Tel.: 33 03 87 39 06 03Fax: 33 03 87 74 25 96

www.schneider-electric.fr


Up-dated: 28-07-2003

8/13

8

Macau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric China

Macedonia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Bulgaria

Madagascar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric la Reunion

Malawi Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa

Malaysia b Schneider Electric (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd

No.11 Jalan U1/19, Seksyen U1Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park40150 Shah AlamSelangor Darul Ehsan

Tel. : (603) 7883 6333Fax : (603) 7883 6188

www.schneider-electric.com.my

Maldives Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion

Mali Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal

Malta Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Tunisia

Marshall islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Martinique b Schneider Electric Schneider ElectricImmeuble Cottrell - ZI de la Lézarde97232 Le Lamentin

Tel.: +05 96 51 06 00Fax: +05 96 51 11 26

Mauritania Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal

Mauritius b Schneider Electric Route côtièreCalodyne - Mauritius

Tel.: 230 282 18 83Fax: 230 282 18 84

Mayotte Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion

Mexico b Groupe Schneider Mexico Calz. Rojo Gomez N° 1121-ACol. Guadalupe del MoralMéxico, D.F. - C.P. 09300

Tel.: +525 686 30 00Fax: +525 686 24 09

www.schneider-electric.com.mx

Micronesia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Moldova Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Romania

Monaco Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric France

Mongolia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Montserrat Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Morocco b Schneider Electric Morocco 26, rue Ibnou KhalikaneQuartier Palmiers20100 Casablanca

Tel.: +212 299 08 48 to 57Fax: +212 299 08 67 and 69

www.schneider.co.ma

Mozambique Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa

Myanmar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Singapore

Namibia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa

Nauru Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Nepal Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India

Netherlands b Schneider Electric BV Waarderweg 40 - Postbus 8362003 RV Haarlem

Tel.: +31 23 512 4124Fax: +31 23 512 4100

www.schneider-electric.nl

Netherlands Antilles Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

New Caledonia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

New Zealand b Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd 14 Charann Place AvondaleP.O. Box 15355 - New LynnAuckland

Tel. : +64 9 829 04 90Fax : +64 9 829 04 91

www.schneider-electric.co.nz

Nicaragua Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States

Niger Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast

Nigeria b Schneider Electric Nigeria Limited Biro plaza - 8th Floor - Plot 634Abeyemo Alakija StreetVictoria Islan - Lagos

Tel. : +234 1 2702973Fax : +234 1 2702976

Niue Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Norfolk island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

North Korea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric China

Northern Mariana islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Norway b Schneider Electric Norge A/S Solgaard Skog 2Postboks 128 - 1501 Moss

Tel.: +47 6924 9700Fax: +47 6925 7871

www.schneider-electric.no

Oman b Schneider Electric CA c/o Arab Development CoPO Box 439 - 113 Muscat

Tel.: +968 77 163 64Fax: +968 77 104 49

Pakistan b Schneider Electric Pakistan 43-L, 2nd floor, M.M. Alam Road,Gulberg II - Lahore

Tel.: +92 42 5754471 à 73Fax: +92 42 5754474

Palau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Panama Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States

Papua New Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Paraguay Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Uruguay


Up-dated: 28-07-2003

8/14

8

Peru b Schneider Electric Peru S.A. Los Telares n°231 Urb. Vulcano, Ate Lima 03

Tel.: +511 348 44 11Fax: +511 348 05 23

www.schneider-electric.com.pe

Philippines b Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc 5th Floor, ALCO Building391 Sen, Gil Puyat AvenueMakati 1209

Tel. : +632 896 6063Fax : +632 896 7229

Pitcairn Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Poland b Schneider Electric Polska Sp.zo.o. ul. Lubinowa 4a03-878 - Warszawa

Tel.: +48 22 511 8 200Fax: +48 22 511 8 210

www.schneider-electric.pl

Portugal b Schneider Electric Portugal Av.do Forte, 3Edificio Suécia II, Piso 3-ACP 2028 Carnaxide2795 Linda-A-Velha

Tel.: +351 21 416 5800Fax: +351 21 416 5857

www.schneiderelectric.pt

Puerto Rico Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States

Qatar b Schneider Electric Qatar Branch c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al ThaniTrad.and Co - P.O. Box 4484Doha

Tel.: +97 4424358Fax: +97 4424358

Reunion b Schneider Electric Immeuble Futura, 190, rue des 2 canonsBP 646 - 97497 Sainte Clothilde

Tel.: +262 28 14 28Fax: +262 28 39 37

Romania b Schneider Electric Bd Ficusului n°42Apimondia, Corp.A, et.1, Sector 1Bucuresti

Tel.: +401 203 06 50Fax: +401 232 15 98

www.schneider-electric.ro

Russian Federation b Schneider Electric ZAO Enisseyskaya 37129 281 Moscow

Tel.: +7095 797 40 00Fax: +7095 797 40 03

www.schneider-electric.ru

Rwanda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya

Samoa Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

San Marino Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy

Sandwich & Georgia island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Sao Tome & Principe Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal

Saudi Arabia b Schneider Electric Second Industrial CityP.O. Box 89249 - 11682 Riyadh

Tel.: +966 1 265 1515Fax: +966 1 265 1860

Senegal b Schneider Electric Sénégal BP 15952 - Dakar-FannRond point N'Gor - Dakar

Tel.: +221 820 68 05Fax: +221 820 58 50

Seychelles Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion

Sierra Leone Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ghana

Singapore b Schneider Electric Singapore Pte Ltd

10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65#02-17/20 TechPointSingapore 569059

Tel.: +65 484 78 77Fax: +65 484 78 00

www.schneider-electric.com.sg

Slovak Republic b Schneider Electric Slovakia spol s.r.o.

Borekova 10SK-821 06 Bratislava

Tel. : +02 45 52 40 10 and 40 30Fax : +02 45 52 40 00

www.schneider-electric.sk

Slovenia b Schneider Electric, d.o.o. Dunasjka 471000 Ljubljana

Tel. : +386 1 23 63 555Fax : +386 1 23 63 559

www.schneider-electric.si

Solomon islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Somalia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt

South Africa b Schneider Electric South Africa (PTY) Ltd

Private Bag X139Halfway House1685 - Midrand.

Tel.: +27 11 254 6400Fax: +27 11 315 8830

www.schneider-electric.co.za

Spain b Schneider Electric España, S.A. Pl. Dr. Letamendi, 5-708007 Barcelona

Tel.: +34 93 484 3100Fax: +34 93 484 3308

www.schneiderelectric.es

Sri Lanka b Schneider Electric Industries SA Liaison office SRI LankaLevel 3B Valiant towers46/7 Nawam Mawatha-Colombo 2

Tel. : +94 77 48 54 89 www.schneiderelectric-in.com

St Helena Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy

St Kitts & Nevis Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

St Lucia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

St Pierre et Miquelon Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

St Vincent & Grenadines Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Sudan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt

Suriname Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States

Svalbard & Jan Mayen isl. Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Denmark

Swaziland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa

Sweden b Schneider Electric AB Djupdalsvägen 17/1919129 Sollentuna

Tel.: +46 8 623 84 00Fax: +46 8 623 84 85

www.schneider-electric.se

Switzerland b Schneider Electric (Switzerland) S.A.

Schermenwaldstrasse 11CH - 3063 Ittigen

Tel.: +41 31 917 3333Fax: +41 31 917 3355

www.schneider-electric.ch


Up-dated: 28-07-2003

8/15

8

Syrian Arab Republic b Schneider Electric Syria Elba Street - MalkiGheibeh and Qassas bldg, 1st floorPO Box 33876-Damascus

Tel. : +963 11 37 49 88 00Fax : +963 11 37 17 55 9

Taiwan, Republic of China b Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 2FI., N°37, Ji-Hu Road, Nei-Hu Dist.,Taipei 114

Tel. : +886 2 8751 6388Fax : +886 2 8751 6389

www.schneider-electric.com.tw

Tajikistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Tanzania, United Rep. of Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya

Thailand b Schneider (Thailand) Ltd 20th Floor Richmond Building75 Sukhumvit 26 Road, KlongtoeyBangkok 10110

Tel.: +662 204 9888Fax: +662 204 9816

www.schneider-electric.co.th

Togo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast

Tokelau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Tonga Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Trinidad & Tobago b Schneider Electric 6, 1st Street West Ext.Beaulieu AvenueTrincity Trinidad West Indies

Tel.: 1868 640 42 04Fax: 1868 640 42 04

Tunisia b Schneider Electric Tunisia Rue du Lac Oubeira1053 Les Berges du Lac - Tunis

Tel.: +216 71 960 477Fax: +216 71 960 342

Turkey b Schneider Elektrik Sanayi Ve Ticaret A.S.

Tütüncü Mehmet Efendi Cad. N°:110 Kat 1-2 - 81080 Göztepe – Istanbul

Tel.: +90 21 63 86 95 70 Fax: +90 21 63 86 38 75

www.schneiderelectric.com.tr

Turkmenistan b Schneider Electric Turkmenistan Liaison Office

rue Neitralny Turkmenistan 28,off.326/32774 000 Achgabad

Tel. : +993 12 46 29 52Fax : +993 12 46 29 52

Turks & Caicos islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Tuvalu Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Uganda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya

Ukraine b Schneider Electric Rue Krechtchalik 2252601 Kiev

Tel.: +380 44 462 04 25Fax: +380 44 462 04 24

www.schneider-electric.com.ua

United Arab Emirates b Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi PO Box 29580Office Floor 2/Lulu StreetAl Marina Plaza TowerAbu Dhabi

Tel.: +9712 6 339444Fax: +9712 6 316606

United Kingdom b Schneider Electric Ltd Braywick House EastWindsor Road - MaidenheadBerkshire SL6 1 DN

Tel.: +44 (0)1 628 508 500Fax: +44 (0)1 628 508 508

www.schneider.co.uk

United States b Schneider Electric North American Division1415 Roselle RoadPalatine - IL 60067

Tel.: +1 847 397 2600Fax: +1 847 925 7500

www.squared.com

Uruguay b Schneider Electric Uruguay S.A. Ramon Masini 3190Montevideo

Tel. : +59 82 707 2392 Fax : +59 82 707 2184

Uzbekistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Vanuatu Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Vatican city St./Holy See Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy

Venezuela b Schneider Mg SD TE, S.A Calle 162/ Piso 2Edificio Centro CynamidLa Urbina, 1070 - 75319 Caracas

Tel.: +58 2 241 13 44Fax: +58 2 243 60 09

www.schneider-electric.com.ve

Viet Nam b R.R.O. of Schneider Electric Industries S.A.S. in Viet Nam

Unit 2.9, 2nd Floor, e-Town Building364 Cong Hoa StreetTan Binh District - Ho Chi Minh City

Tel.: +84 8 8103 103Fax: +84 8 8120 477

Virgin islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Wallis & Futuna islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia

Western Sahara Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Morocco

Yemen Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric U.A.E.

Yugoslavia b Schneider Electric Jugoslavija d.o.o.

Ratarski put 27d11186 Belgrade

Tel.: +381 11 192 414Fax: +381 11 107 125

Zambia b Schneider Zambia Zambia Officec/o Matipi Craft Center BuildingPlot 1036 - Accra RoadPO Box 22792 - Kitwe

Tel.: +260 222 22 52Fax: +260 222 83 89

Zimbabwe b Schneider Electric Zimbabwe Liaison Office75A Second Street(corner Livingstone Avenue)Harare

Tel.: +263 4 707 179/180Fax: +263 4 707 176

8/16

8

Product reference index 0

0043 509 383 5/77

1140 NWM 100 00 5/27170 DTN 110 00 5/119170 EDI 346 00 3/47170 EDO 346 00 3/47170 ENO 396 00 3/47170 INT 110 00 5/117170 MCI 007 00 5/117170 MCI 020 10 5/77170 MCI 020 36 5/77170 MCI 020 80 5/77170 MCI 021 20 5/77170 MCI 100 00 5/117170 PNT 110 20 5/77170 XTS 009 00 5/117170 XTS 020 00 5/77170 XTS 021 00 5/77170 XTS 050 00 3/43

and 3/47174 CEV 200 30 5/59174 CEV 300 20 5/59

4490 NAA 271 01 5/77490 NAA 271 02 5/77490 NAA 271 03 5/77490 NAA 271 04 5/77490 NAA 271 06 5/77490 NAD 911 03 5/119490 NAD 911 04 5/119490 NAD 911 05 5/119490 NOC 000 05 5/59490 NOR 000 05 5/59490 NOT 000 05 5/59490 NTC 000 05 5/59490 NTC 000 15 5/59490 NTC 000 40 5/59490 NTC 000 80 5/59490 NTW 000 02 5/59490 NTW 000 05 5/59490 NTW 000 12 5/59490 NTW 000 40 5/59490 NTW 000 80 5/59490 USE 133 01 8/3499 NEH 104 10 5/59499 NEH 141 00 5/59499 NES 171 00 5/59499 NES 181 00 5/59499 NES 251 00 5/59499 NOH 105 10 5/59499 NOS 171 00 5/59499 NTR 100 10 5/59499 NTR 101 00 5/59

8870 USE 002 00 8/3870 USE 100 00 3/47870 USE 103 00 8/3870 USE 105 00 8/3890 USE 100 00 8/3

9990 MCO 000 01 4/56990 MCO 000 03 4/56990 MCO 000 05 4/56990 MCO 000 15 4/56990 MCO 000 55 4/56990 MCO 000 75 4/56990 MCO 001 25 4/56990 MCO KIT 00 4/56990 MCO KIT 01 4/56990 NAA 263 20 5/117990 NAA 263 50 5/117

990 NAD 211 10 5/77990 NAD 211 30 5/77990 NAD 230 00 5/77990 NAD 230 10 5/77990 NAD 230 11 5/77990 NAD 230 12 5/77990 NAD 230 20 5/77990 NAD 230 21 5/77990 NAD 230 22 5/77990 NAD 230 23 5/77

AABE 7ACC01 2/43ABE 7ACC02 2/43ABE 7ACC10 2/43ABE 7ACC11 2/43ABE 7ACC12 2/41ABE 7ACC20 2/43ABE 7ACC21 2/43ABE 7ACC30 2/43ABE 7ACC80 2/43ABE 7ACC81 2/43ABE 7ACC82 2/43ABE 7ACC83 2/43ABE 7ACC84 2/43ABE 7ACC85 2/43ABE 7BV10 2/43ABE 7BV10E 2/43ABE 7BV20 2/43

4/25, 4/29 and 4/37ABE 7BV20E 2/43ABE 7CPA01 2/42

4/25, 4/29 and 4/41ABE 7CPA02 2/42

and 4/9ABE 7CPA03 2/42

and 4/9ABE 7CPA11 2/42,

4/29, 4/32 and 4/41ABE 7CPA12 2/42


and 2/26ABE 7CPA21 2/42


and 4/9ABE 7CPA31E 2/42

and 4/9ABE 7FU012 2/43ABE 7FU050 2/43ABE 7FU100 2/43ABE 7FU200 2/43ABE 7FU400 2/43ABE 7FU630 2/43ABE 7H08R10 2/37ABE 7H08R11 2/37ABE 7H08R21 2/37ABE 7H08S21 2/37ABE 7H12R10 2/37ABE 7H12R11 2/37ABE 7H12R20 2/37ABE 7H12R21 2/37ABE 7H12R50 2/37ABE 7H12S21 2/37ABE 7H16C10 2/36ABE 7H16C11 2/36ABE 7H16C21 2/36ABE 7H16C31 2/36ABE 7H16CM11 2/36ABE 7H16CM21 2/36ABE 7H16F43 2/37ABE 7H16R10 2/37ABE 7H16R11 2/37ABE 7H16R11E 2/37ABE 7H16R20 2/37

ABE 7H16R20 4/254/29, 4/32, 4/37 and 4/41

ABE 7H16R21 2/37ABE 7H16R21E 2/37ABE 7H16R23 2/37ABE 7H16R30 2/37ABE 7H16R31 2/37ABE 7H16R50 2/37ABE 7H16R50E 2/37ABE 7H16S21 2/37ABE 7H16S21E 2/37ABE 7H16S43 2/37ABE 7H20E100 2/36ABE 7H20E200 2/36ABE 7H20E300 2/36ABE 7H32E150 2/36ABE 7H32E300 2/36ABE 7LOGF25 2/43ABE 7LOGV10 2/43ABE 7P08T330 2/40ABE 7P08T330E 2/40ABE 7P16F310 2/39ABE 7P16F310E 2/39ABE 7P16F312 2/39ABE 7P16M111 2/40ABE 7P16T111 2/40ABE 7P16T210 2/40ABE 7P16T212 2/40ABE 7P16T214 2/40ABE 7P16T215 2/40ABE 7P16T230 2/40ABE 7P16T230E 2/40ABE 7P16T318 2/40ABE 7P16T318E 2/40ABE 7P16T330 2/40ABE 7P16T330E 2/40ABE 7P16T332 2/40ABE 7P16T334 2/40ABE 7R08S111 2/38ABE 7R08S111E 2/38ABE 7R08S210 2/38ABE 7R08S210E 2/38ABE 7R08S216 2/38ABE 7R08S216E 2/38ABE 7R16M111 2/38ABE 7R16S111 2/38ABE 7R16S111E 2/38ABE 7R16S210 2/38ABE 7R16S210E 2/38ABE 7R16S212 2/38ABE 7R16S212E 2/38ABE 7R16T111 2/39ABE 7R16T210 2/39ABE 7R16T212 2/39ABE 7R16T230 2/39ABE 7R16T231 2/39ABE 7R16T330 2/39ABE 7R16T332 2/39ABE 7R16T370 2/39ABE 7S08S2B0 2/38ABE 7S08S2B0E 2/38ABE 7S08S2B1 2/38ABE 7S08S2B1E 2/38ABE 7S16E2B1 2/38ABE 7S16E2B1E 2/38ABE 7S16E2E0 2/38ABE 7S16E2E0E 2/38ABE 7S16E2E1 2/38ABE 7S16E2E1E 2/38ABE 7S16E2F0 2/38ABE 7S16E2F0E 2/38ABE 7S16E2M0 2/38ABE 7S16E2M0E 2/38ABE 7S16S1B2 2/38ABE 7S16S1B2E 2/38ABE 7S16S2B0 2/38

ABE 7S16S2B0E 2/38ABE 7TES160 2/16

and 2/43ABF Y25S150 4/9ABF Y25S200 4/9ABF Y25S300 4/9ABF Y25S500 4/9ABF C08R02B 2/43ABF C08R02R 2/43ABF C08R02W 2/43ABF C08R12B 2/43ABF C08R12R 2/43ABF C08R12W 2/43ABL 7CEM24003 2/63ABL 7CEM24006 2/63ABL 7CEM24012 2/63ABL 7RE2402 2/63ABL 7RE2403 2/63ABL 7RE2405 2/63ABL 7RE2410 2/63ABL 7REQ24050 2/63ABL 7REQ24100 2/63ABL 7RP1205 2/63ABL 7RP2403 2/63ABL 7RP2405 2/63ABL 7RP2410 2/63ABL 7RP4803 2/63ABL 7UEQ24100 2/63ABL 7UEQ24200 2/63ABL 7UES24050 2/63ABL 7UPS24100 2/63ABL 7UPS24200 2/63ABL 7UPS24400 2/63ABR 7S11 2/41ABR 7S21 2/41ABR 7S23 2/41ABR 7S33 2/41ABR 7S33E 2/41ABR 7S37 2/41ABS 7EA3E5 2/41ABS 7EA3F5 2/41ABS 7EA3M5 2/41ABS 7EC3AL 2/41ABS 7EC3B2 2/41ABS 7EC3E2 2/41ABS 7SA2M 2/41ABS 7SA3MA 2/41ABS 7SC1B 2/41ABS 7SC2E 2/41ABS 7SC3BA 2/41ABS 7SC3E 2/41AR1 SB3 2/43AS MBKT 185 5/77ASI ABLB3002 5/73ASI ABLB3004 5/73ASI ABLD3002 5/73ASI ABLD3004 5/73ASI ABLM3024 5/73

OOZD FIP G3 5/99

SSF3 CPY005 4/65SF3 CPY010 4/65SF3 CPY015 4/65SF3 CPY020 4/65SF3 CPY025 4/65SF3 CPY030 4/65SM1 PS371 4/65SM1 PS381 4/65STB NDP 2112 5/119STB NMP 2212 5/77SPU LFF CD28M 5/65SPU LFG CD28M 5/65SPU LFT CD28M 5/65

SPU LFU CD28M 5/65SPU LRU CD28M 5/65SPU LUF CD28M 5/65SPU LUG CD28M 5/65SPU LUT CD28M 5/65

TBXTBX AES 400 3/25TBX AMS 620 3/25TBX ASS 200 3/25TBX BAS 10 3/32

and 3/47TBX BLP 01 3/15

and 3/25TBX BLP 10 3/32TBX CBS 010 3/15TBX CEP 1622 3/14TBX CSP 1622 3/14TBX CSP 1625 3/14TBX DES 1622 3/14TBX DES 1633 3/14TBX DES 16C22 3/14TBX DES 16C22 3/14TBX DES 16F22 3/14TBX DES 16S04 3/14TBX DMS 1025 3/14TBX DMS 1625 3/14TBX DMS 16C22 3/14TBX DMS 16C222 3/14TBX DMS 16P22 3/14TBX DMS 16S44 3/14TBX DSS 1235 3/14TBX DSS 1622 3/14TBX DSS 1625 3/14TBX DSS 16C22 3/14TBX EEP 08C22 3/32TBX EEP 1622 3/32TBX ESP 08C22 3/32TBX ESP 1622 3/32TBX FP ACC 10 3/32TBX GND 015 3/15TBX LEP 020 3/15TBX LEP 030 3/15TBX RV 015 3/15TBX SEP 08 3/15TBX SSP 08 3/15TBX SUP 10 3/15

TCCTCC ETH 01 5/41

TFTTFTX CB1 020 5/110TFTX CB1 050 5/110

TLXCD pOFS 30M 6/35CD 10OFS 30M 6/35CD DRV20M 5/89

and 6/19CD FCHMI V1M 5/27CD PL7 DIF 41 6/27CD PL7J p44M 6/18CD PL7M p44M 6/18CD PL7M PC44M 6/18CD PL7P p44M 6/19CD UNOFS 30M 6/35CD WSBY P40F 4/70CD3 PL7 DIF 41 6/27CD3 PL7J p44M 6/18CD3 PL7M p44M 6/18CD3 PL7P p44M 6/19CD3 WSBY P40F 4/70DM 07 117F 8/2DM 07 DSF 8/2DOC PL7 44F 6/19

8/17

8


DOC PL7 44F 8/2L PL7 FUZ 34M 6/31L SDKC PL7 41M 6/29LC SMC PL7 40M 6/25LIBS CNVF 5/117OS PL7P P44M 6/19OT PL7M P44M 6/19OT PL7P P44M 6/19RCD PL7J P44M 6/18RCD PL7M P44M 6/18RCD PL7M PC44M 6/18RCD PL7P P44M 6/19RCD3 PL7J P44M 6/18RCD3 PL7M P44M 6/18RCD3 PL7P P44M 6/19S PL7P P44M 6/19UCD PL7J P44M 6/18UCD PL7P P44M 6/19UCD3 PL7J P44M 6/18UCD3 PL7P P44M 6/19

TPCXTPCX 57 203M 1/23TPCX 57 353M 1/23

and 5/93

TSX ATSX AAK2 3/25

and 4/9TSX ACC VA625 1/6TSX AEY 1600 4/8TSX AEY 1614 4/8TSX AEY 414 4/8TSX AEY 420 4/8TSX AEY 800 4/8TSX AEY 810 4/8TSX ASY 410 4/8TSX ASY 800 4/8

TSX BTSX BAT M01 1/25TSX BLY 01 2/16

and 4/9

TSX CTSX CAP 030 4/9TSX CAP S15 4/25

4/29, 4/324/37 and 4/41

TSX CAP S9 4/41TSX CAY 21 4/41TSX CAY 22 4/41TSX CAY 33 4/41TSX CAY 41 4/41TSX CAY 42 4/41TSX CBRY 2500 1/9TSX CBRY 2500F 1/9TSX CBRY K5 1/9TSX CBY 010K 1/6TSX CBY 030K 1/6TSX CBY 050K 1/6TSX CBY 1000 1/6TSX CBY 1000K 1/6TSX CBY 120K 1/6TSX CBY 180K 1/6TSX CBY 280K 1/6TSX CBY 380K 1/6TSX CBY 500K 1/6TSX CBY 720K 1/6TSX CBY ACC 10 1/6TSX CBY K9 1/6TSX CCP 301 4/29TSX CCP S15 050 4/25

4/29, 4/32 , and 4/42TSX CCP S15 100 4/25

4/29, 4/32 and 4/42

TSX CCP S15 4/254/29, 4/32 and 4/42

TSX CCT 200 4/56TSX CCY 1128 4/32TSX CD D MTE 13E 8/2TSX CDP 053 2/16

4/25, 4/29, 4/32, 4/37and 4/42

TSX CDP 1001 2/164/25, 4/29 and 4/37

TSX CDP 1003 2/16TSX CDP 102 2/16

4/25 and 4/29TSX CDP 103 2/16

4/25, 4/29, 4/32, 4/37and 4/42

TSX CDP 202 2/164/25 and 4/29

TSX CDP 203 2/164/25, 4/29, 4/32, 4/37

and 4/42TSX CDP 301 2/16

4/25, 4/29, 4/32, 4/37and 4/42

TSX CDP 302 2/164/25 and 4/29

TSX CDP 303 2/164/25, 4/29, 4/32, 4/37

and 4/42TSX CDP 501 2/16

4/25, 4/29, 4/32, 4/37and 4/42

TSX CDP 503 2/164/25, 4/29, 4/32, 4/37

and 4/42TSX CDP 611 4/42TSX CFY 11 4/37TSX CFY 21 4/37TSX CPP 102 2/26TSX CPP 110 5/65TSX CPP 202 2/26TSX CPP 301 2/26TSX CPP 302 2/26TSX CSA 100 5/81

and 5/107TSX CSA 200 5/81

and 5/107TSX CSA 500 5/81

and 5/107TSX CSY 164 4/56TSX CSY 84 4/56TSX CTC 07 5/111TSX CTC 10 5/111TSX CTY 2A 4/25TSX CTY 2C 4/29TSX CTY 4A 4/25TSX CXP 213 4/42TSX CXP 223 4/42TSX CXP 233 4/42TSX CXP 235 4/42TSX CXP 243 4/42TSX CXP 245 4/42TSX CXP 263 4/37TSX CXP 273 4/42TSX CXP 613 4/42TSX CXP 633 4/42TSX CXP 635 4/42TSX CXP 643 4/42TSX CXP 645 4/42TSX CXP 663 4/37TSX CXP 673 4/42

TSX DTSX DEY 08D2 2/14

TSX DEY 16A2 2/14TSX DEY 16A3 2/14TSX DEY 16A4 2/14TSX DEY 16A5 2/14TSX DEY 16D2 2/14TSX DEY 16D3 2/14TSX DEY 16FK 2/14TSX DEY 32D2K 2/14TSX DEY 32D3K 2/14TSX DEY 64D2K 2/14TSX DG FPW E 8/3TSX DG JNT M 8/3TSX DG MDB E 8/3TSX DG UTW E 8/3TSX DGK BL E 8/3TSX DM 37 50E 8/2TSX DM 57 43E 8/2TSX DM CPP 100E 8/3TSX DM IBY 100F 8/3TSX DM ISP Y100E 4/65TSX DM ISP Y100F 4/65TSX DM ISP Y100G 4/65TSX DM ISP Y100S 4/65TSX DM OZD 01E 8/3TSX DM PBY 100E 8/3TSX DMY 28FK 2/16TSX DMY 28RFK 2/16TSX DR ETH F 8/3TSX DR FIP F 8/3TSX DR NET F 8/3TSX DSY 08R4D 2/15TSX DSY 08R5 2/15TSX DSY 08R5A 2/15TSX DSY 08S5 2/15TSX DSY 08T2 2/15TSX DSY 08T22 2/15TSX DSY 08T31 2/15TSX DSY 16R5 2/15TSX DSY 16S4 2/15TSX DSY 16S5 2/15TSX DSY 16T2 2/15TSX DSY 16T3 2/15TSX DSY 32T2K 2/15TSX DSY 64T2K 2/15

TSX ETSX EEF 08D2 3/42TSX EEF 16D2 3/42TSX EF ACC 2002 3/43TSX EF ACC 2010 3/43TSX EF ACC 20120 3/43TSX EF ACC 20250 3/43TSX EF ACC 2030 3/43TSX EF ACC 2070 3/43TSX EF ACC 7 3/42TSX EF ACC 99 3/42

and 5/102TSX EF ACC7 5/102TSX EF CF 01 3/42TSX EF CF 02 3/42TSX EF CF 03 3/42TSX EF CM 01 3/42TSX EF CM 03 3/42TSX EF CT 03 3/42TSX EMF 16DT2 3/42TSX ESF 08T22 3/42TSX ETH ACC 10M 5/61TSX ETH ACC 2 5/61TSX ETH ACC 3 5/61TSX ETH ACC 4 5/61TSX ETH ACC 5 5/61TSX ETH CA 020 5/61TSX ETH CA 100 5/61TSX ETH CA 200 5/61TSX ETH CC 005 5/61TSX ETH CC 010 5/61

TSX ETH CC 020 5/61TSX ETH CD 025 5/61TSX ETH NEH 8 5/61TSX ETH NTR1 5/59TSX ETH PC 101M 5/41TSX ETY 110 5/41TSX ETY 110 WS 5/41TSX ETY 210 4/70

and 5/41TSX ETY 4103 5/41TSX ETY 5103 5/41TSX ETY CB 005 5/61TSX ETY CB 010 5/61TSX ETY CB 020 5/61TSX ETY 110 5/41TSX ETY 110 WS 5/41TSX ETY 210 4/70

and 5/41TSX ETY 4102 5/41

TSX FTSX FAN A4P 1/6TSX FAN A5P 1/6TSX FAN D2P 1/6TSX FP ACC 12 3/42

and 5/93TSX FP ACC 2 3/42

and 5/93TSX FP ACC 3 5/97TSX FP ACC 4 3/32

and 5/97TSX FP ACC 7 3/42TSX FP ACC12 5/102TSX FP ACC14 5/102TSX FP ACC2 5/102TSX FP ACC3 5/102TSX FP ACC4 5/102TSX FP ACC6 5/102TSX FP ACC8M 5/102TSX FP ACC9 5/102TSX FP C100 5/103TSX FP C200 5/103TSX FP C500 5/103TSX FP CA100 3/43

and 5/103TSX FP CA200 3/43

and 5/103TSX FP CA500 5/103TSX FP CC100 3/43

and 5/103TSX FP CC200 3/43

and 5/103TSX FP CC500 3/43

and 5/103TSX FP CE030 5/103TSX FP CG 010 5/89

and 5/97TSX FP CG 030 5/89

and 5/97TSX FP CP 100 3/43

and 5/103TSX FP CP 500 3/43

and 5/103TSX FP CR 100 3/43TSX FP CR 200 3/43TSX FP CR 500 3/43TSX FP JF020 5/103TSX FPC10M 5/102TSX FPP 10 5/97

and 5/99TSX FPP 20 5/89TSX FPP OZD 200 5/99

and 5/103TSX FP CE030 5/103

TSX ITSX IBI CP DD9 004

3/47

TSX IBI CP DD9 010

3/47

TSX IBI CP DD9 030

3/47

TSX IBI CP DD9 070

3/47

TSX IBI CP DD9 120

3/47

TSX IBI CP DD9 250

3/47

TSX IBS CA 100 5/117TSX IBS CA 400 5/117TSX IBX 100 5/117TSX IBY 100 5/117TSX ISP Y101 4/65TSX ISP Y101C1 4/65TSX ISP Y111 4/65TSX ISP Y111C1 4/65

TSX JTSX JNP 112 5/113TSX JNP 114 5/113

TSX MTSX MBP 100 5/77TSX MBP CE 002 5/77TSX MBP CE 030 5/77TSX MBP CE 060 5/77TSX MFP 0128P 1/25TSX MFP 032P 1/25TSX MFP 064P 1/25TSX MFP 232P 1/25TSX MFP 264P 1/25TSX MRP 0128P 1/25TSX MRP 0256P 1/25TSX MRP 032P 1/25TSX MRP 0512P 1/25TSX MRP 064P 1/25TSX MRP 2128P 1/25TSX MRP 232P 1/25TSX MRP 264P 1/25TSX MRP 3256P 1/25TSX MRP 3384P 1/25TSX MRP DS 2048P

1/25

TSX PTSX P ACC 01 5/80

5/107, 5/109 and 5/110TSX P CAP 1/25TSX P57 103M 1/19TSX P57 153M 1/19

and 5/93TSX P57 203M 1/19TSX P57 253M 1/19

and 5/93TSX P57 2623M 1/19

and 5/40TSX P57 2823M 1/19

5/40 and 5/93TSX P57 303M 1/19TSX P57 353M 1/19

and 5/93TSX P57 3623M 1/19

and 5/40TSX P57 453M 1/19

and 5/93TSX P57 4823M 1/19

5/40 and 5/93TSX PAY 262 2/26TSX PAY 282 2/26TSX PCX 3030 5/1075/109, 5/110, 5/111 and 6/19

8/18

8


© Copyright Schneider Electric industries SAS 2004.

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be translated and/or reproduced or copied in any form or by any means, graphic, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording, taping or storage in an information retrieval system.

Owing to changes in standards and products, hardware and software, the characteristics given in the text and images in this document are not binding until they have been confirmed with us.

All software quoted in this document is the property of Schneider Electric Industries SAS, or a third party which has granted rights to Schneider Electric Industries SAS. The supply of such software confers a non-exclusive licence on the recipient to use such software solely for the purpose for which it was supplied.Any copying of such software, etc. (except solely for the purpose of producing back-up and security copies) is totally forbidden.

April, CCX, Concept, Ethway, Fipio, Fipway, Modbus, Modbus Plus, Momentum, Monitor Pro, PL7, TSX, Uni-TE, Uni-Telway, Vijeo Look and X-Way are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation SAS.Advantys, Altivar, Inductel, Magelis, Modicon, NUM, Phaseo, Square-D, Tego, Telefast, Telemecanique and XBT are registered trademarks of Schneider Electric Industries SAS.

All other products and brands quoted in this document are registered trademarks of their respective holders.

TSX SCA 50 5/805/107 and 5/113

TSX SCA 62 5/107TSX SCP CM 4030 5/81

5/110 and 5/113TSX SCP CM 4530 5/81

5/110 and 5/113TSX SCP CU 4030 5/107

and 5/110TSX SCP CU 4530 5/107

and 5/110TSX SCP CX 2030 5/81

5/109 5/110 and 5/113TSX SCP CX 4030 5/81

5/109 and 5/110TSX SCY 11601 5/80TSX SCY 21601 5/80

5/89, 5/107 and 5/109TSX SCY CM 6030 5/81

and 5/111TSX SCY CM 6530 5/81TSX SCY CU 6030 5/107

5/109 and 5/111TSX SCY CU 6530 5/107

TSX TTSX TAP MAS 4/41TSX TAP S15 05 4/25

4/29, 4/32 and 4/41TSX TAP S15 24 4/25

4/29 and 4/32TSX TLY EX 1/6

and 1/9

TSX WTSX WMY 100 5/27

TSX XTSX XBT H100 4/65

TWTWD USE 10AF 8/2

TXBTTXBT DM 00F 8/2TXBT DM M17 W V6F

8/2

VVY1 X411CA15 4/42

TXBTTXBT DM 00E 8/2TXBT DM M17 W V6F

8/2

XBXBT X000EN 8/2XBT Z968 5/111XBT Z9681 5/111

XZXZ CB 10201 5/67XZ CB 10501 5/67XZ CB 11001 5/67XZ LG101 3/43XZ LG102 3/43

TSX PLP 01 1/13TSX PLP 101 1/13TSX PSY 1610M 1/13TSX PSY 2600M 1/13TSX PSY 3610M 1/13TSX PSY 5500M 1/13TSX PSY 5520M 1/13TSX PSY 8500M 1/13

TSX RTSX REY 200 1/9TSX RKA 02 1/6TSX RKY 12 1/6TSX RKY 12EX 1/6TSX RKY 4EX 1/6TSX RKY 6EX 1/6TSX RKY 8 1/6TSX RKY 8EX 1/6

TSX STSX SAY 100 5/67TSX SAY 1000 5/67TSX SCA 10 5/80

and 5/113TSX SCA 50 5/80

5/107 and 5/113TSX SCA 62 5/107TSX SCA 64 5/80

and 5/113TSX SCA 72 5/80

and 5/107TSX SCP 111 5/80

5/107 and 5/109TSX SCP 112 5/80

5/107 and 5/109TSX SCP 114 5/80

5/107 and 5/109TSX SCP CC 1030 5/81

5/109 and 5/110TSX SCP CD 1030 5/81

5/109 and 5/110TSX SCP CD 1100 5/81

5/109 and 5/110

Date post:	29-Aug-2021
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	4 times
Download:	0 times

5 - Communication · 2016. 7. 25. · TSX CPP 110 TSX SAY 100 TSX SAY 1000 TSX SCP 11p (2) TSX SCY...

Documents